Bible Software
Version 7.4
User’s Guide
Accordance
Bible Software
Version 7.4
User’s Guide
OakTree
Software, Inc.
www.accordancebible.com
Welcome to Accordance®
Accordance offers a unique combination of the most powerful Bible study software available
anywhere, together with a deceptively simple interface which is easy to learn and use.
Whether you are a new user or already familiar with Accordance, we recommend that you use
the documents on the CD-ROM, and the Accordance Help with Tutorial, to get an overview of the
features of the software.
This manual is a comprehensive explanation of the features of Accordance. It contains
information and examples that help you learn to use the software in a more efficient manner.
Some features of Accordance are so powerful that you probably will not see all the implications
of these features when you first use the software. The manual contains insights gained through
extensive use and testing of the software.
Technical support is provided by OakTree Software, Inc.
Website: www.accordancebible.com
Telephone: (407) 339-0266 Fax: (407) 339-9188
E-mail: Support@accordancebible.com
Accordance software by Roy B. Brown
Accordance manual by Helen A. Brown
This manual and the software described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright
laws, neither this manual nor the software may be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of
OakTree Software, Inc., except for disk backup purposes or as specified in a separate site license agreement,
if applicable. Under the law, copying includes translation into another language or format, or transmission
from one computer to another over a network.
© 2007 OakTree Software, Inc.
498 Palm Springs Drive, Suite 100
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Accordance is a registered trademark, and AccordIt, Helena, Yehudit, and Rosetta are trademarks of OakTree
Software, Inc. Apple, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. System
7, OS 8, OS 9, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. LaserGREEK, SuperGreek, LaserHEBREW,
SuperHebrew, and Hebraica II are registered trademarks of Linguists’ Software. Alexandria and Jerusalem are
trademarks of Zondervan Corporation.
The CD-ROM and manual are warranted to be free of physical defects for 90 days after you receive this
product. If a defect is found within this 90 day period, return the defective item postage prepaid for a
replacement.
This software has been thoroughly reviewed and tested and will be supported with periodic upgrades.
However, except as specifically stated above, there are no other warranties, express or implied, regarding the
enclosed product, its merchantability, or its fitness for any particular purpose. This software is sold “as is”,
and the purchaser assumes the entire risk as to its quality and performance.
APPLE COMPUTER, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ENCLOSED
COMPUTER SOFTWARE PACKAGE, ITS MERCHANTABILITY, OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS PERMITTED IN SOME STATES. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY PROVIDES YOU WITH SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. THERE MAY BE OTHER RIGHTS THAT
YOU HAVE WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
Contents
Introduction
Chapter 1
Installation and First Time Launch
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding and Running Your Copy of Accordance .
Registering Your Copy of Accordance . . . . . . . .
Setup Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-6
1-7
1-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-7
2-8
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-12
Setting Up
Types of Files in Accordance . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving and Naming the File Icons . . . . .
Cleaning up the Accordance Folder . . . . .
The Accordance Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Texts and Tools to Accordance . .
Using a Module from a Different Location
Preference Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Macintosh Memory (OS 7 to 9) . . . .
Chapter 3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Getting Help
The Documentation on the Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
The Accordance User’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Accordance Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Chapter 4
Getting Oriented
Key Accordance Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Accordance Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the Search Window . . . . . . . . .
Contextual Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Printing Windows and Text Panes
Setting Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-2
4-4
4-6
4-7
4-11
4-11
4-11
Floating Windows and Arrange Modules
The Resource Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Arranging and Adding Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
The Instant Details Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
1
Contents
Searching the Bible
Chapter 6
Viewing the Text
Working with Text Panes. . . . . . . . . .
The Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating through the Text . . . . . . .
Selecting and Marking Verses . . . . . .
Viewing Texts and Tools in Parallel .
Changing the Display in a Text Pane
Comparing Texts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verse Matching and Discrepancies . .
Selecting and Copying Text . . . . . . .
Chapter 7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-6
6-7
6-9
6-14
6-16
6-18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-2
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-10
7-10
Doing Searches
Using the Search Entry Section .
The Search Text Pop-up Menu .
Displaying a Text by Reference
Defining Search Arguments . . .
Expressions in Accordance . . . .
Entering Words and Phrases . . .
Setting the Search Field . . . . . .
Search Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Search Symbols and Commands
Searches Using Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searches Using Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stand-alone Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Multiple Commands in a Search . . . . .
Linking Search Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching the Contents of Another Window .
Searching the Word List of Another Window
Chapter 9
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-2
8-5
8-6
8-8
8-11
8-13
8-15
8-17
Keyed Bible Texts
Working with Keyed Bible Texts . . . . .
Getting More Information . . . . . . . . . .
Searches Using Key Numbers . . . . . . .
Search Arguments with Key Numbers
Different Key Number Schemes . . . . .
German Bibles with Lemmas . . . . . . .
Chapter 10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-2
9-3
9-6
9-7
9-9
9-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-2
10-2
10-4
10-9
10-13
10-21
Graphical Searches
Introduction to Constructs . . . . . . .
The Simple Construct Window . . . .
Using a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Element Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Connecting Items. . . . . . . . . . .
Using Multiple Construct Windows
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
Digging Deeper
Chapter 11
Getting Details
The Details Workspace . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of Details Windows
Graphs and Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hits Graph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analysis Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analysis Bar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analysis Pie Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Bar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concordance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-2
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-7
11-8
11-10
11-11
11-12
11-17
11-19
The Amplify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Amplify Features . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features of Amplify Windows.
General Features of Amplify Windows
Triple-click Amplify Shortcuts . . . . .
Amplify Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-4
12-5
12-5
Amplify Features
Amplifying Your Selection
Context . .
Parsing . .
Syntax . . .
Speak . . .
Search . . .
Favorites .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-2
13-5
13-7
13-9
13-10
13-12
An Overview of Tools . . . . . . . . . . .
The Tools Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Text Display of a Tool . . . . . . .
The Browser Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Range in a Tool . . . . . . .
Hypertexting in Tools . . . . . . . . . . .
General Features of Tools Windows
Amplifying with Tools . . . . . . . . . .
Searching in Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Search Options . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14-2
14-3
14-7
14-8
14-11
14-12
14-17
14-18
14-22
14-26
Consulting Study Aids
Chapter 14
Tools
3
Contents
Details for any Reference Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
The Tool Pane in a Bible Text Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Reference Tools for Non-Biblical Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Chapter 15
Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets
The Search All Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Editing Groups of Modules
Amplifying to the Search All Window . . .
Creating and Editing Text and Tool Sets.
Amplifying to a Text or Tool Set . . . . . . .
Differences between Sets and Groups . .
Chapter 16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15-2
15-4
15-5
15-5
15-6
15-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-2
16-2
16-6
16-8
16-9
..........
..........
..........
and Verses .
..........
..........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-2
17-4
17-4
17-4
17-7
17-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18-2
18-2
18-4
18-4
Creating a User Notes File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Edit Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The User Notes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The User Notes Pane in a Bible Text Window
Setting Defaults for User Notes . . . . . . . . . .
Amplifying to User Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicating or Renaming User Notes . . . . . .
Merging User Notes Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19-2
19-3
19-8
19-11
19-12
19-13
19-14
19-14
Parallels
Parallel Text Modules . . . . . . . . .
The Parallel Window . . . . . . . . . .
The Parallel Text Panes . . . . . . . .
General Window Features . . . . . .
Amplifying to a Parallel Window
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Doing your own Thing
Chapter 17
Color Highlighting
Highlight Styles . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Style. . . . . . . . . .
The Highlight Palette . . . . .
Adding Highlights to Words
Multiple Highlight Files . . .
Searching for Styles . . . . . .
Chapter 18
Reference Lists
Opening a Reference List Window
The Reference List Window . . . . .
Adding and Deleting Verses . . . . .
Searching the Contents. . . . . . . . .
Chapter 19
4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
User Notes
Contents
Chapter 20
User Tools
The User Tool Window . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Blank User Tool . . . . . . . . .
Duplicating or Renaming a User Tool .
The Edit Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amplifying to User Tools . . . . . . . . . .
Importing to a User Tool. . . . . . . . . . .
Merging User Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-4
20-7
20-8
20-10
Importing Bibles
Preparing the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Importing the Bible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Using the Bible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
General Features
Chapter 22
The Workspace and Slide Show
The Workspace and Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
The Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Chapter 23
Working With Windows
Types of Accordance Windows .
Window Features. . . . . . . . . . . .
The Window Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicating Windows . . . . . . . .
The Text items and Palette . . . .
The Character Palette . . . . . . . .
Entering Hebrew Text . . . . . . . .
Chapter 24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23-2
23-2
23-5
23-8
23-9
23-10
23-11
Other Features
Contextual Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Accordance Widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6
Differences Between Accordance on Classic and Mac OS X . . . . . . 24-10
Chapter 25
Printing and Saving
Printing the Contents of a Window. . . . .
Setting the Page Details . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving in Accordance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a Window as an Accordance File .
Saving Groups of Windows . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Text in a Text File . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Graphics as a PICT File . . . . . . . .
Greek and Hebrew Export Options . . . . .
Unicode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transliteration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25-2
25-2
25-4
25-5
25-6
25-6
25-7
25-8
25-11
25-12
5
Contents
Appendices
Appendix A
Setting Preferences
General . . . . . . . . . . .
Appearance . . . . . . . .
Text Display . . . . . . .
Tools Display . . . . . .
Greek & Hebrew . . . .
Compare Text . . . . . .
Instant Details Box . .
Arrange Tags . . . . . . .
Citation . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech. . . . . . . . . . . .
Search Window . . . . .
Parallel Window . . . .
User Notes Window. .
Edit Window . . . . . . .
Map Window Layers .
Map Window Display
Timeline Layers . . . .
Timeline Display. . . .
Syntax Window . . . . .
Appendix B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-8
A-10
A-10
A-11
A-11
A-12
A-12
A-13
A-13
A-14
A-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-2
B-2
B-4
B-4
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-9
B-10
B-10
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Accordance Menu (in OS X) .
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Amplify Menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . .
Appendix C
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Names and Symbols
Working with Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Working with Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Punctuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Glossary
Index
6
Installation and
First Time Launch
1
Chapter Contents:
Introduction .................................................... 1-2
System Requirements...................................... 1-2
Installation ...................................................... 1-3
Finding and Running Your Copy of Accordance. 1-6
Registering Your Copy of Accordance............. 1-7
Setup Assistant................................................ 1-8
1
Installation and First Time Launch
Introduction
Each Accordance CD-ROM includes an installer for the program, documentation, and fonts.
The texts and tools which Accordance can display and search are called “modules”. These may
be Bibles or other books, or data for the Atlas or Timeline. Each module has been specially
prepared for Accordance. Each CD-ROM contains a different selection of modules, and some
CD-ROMs can be purchased at different “levels,” with additional add-on modules available for
unlocking. Some modules, and the latest version of Accordance, are available for download
from the website.
Summary
Installation is usually easy:
1. Check the version number printed on each CD-ROM label or in the Read Me First
document, and reserve the latest until last. See opposite page for details. If any CDROMs have a version prior to 5.7, please check the website.
2. Run the installer on each CD-ROM. Read the information following the License, and
select Easy or Standard Install, or whichever other options apply to you. You will
need your own password on OS X, and any unlock codes supplied in the package or
on your invoice.
3. Then simply run Accordance. You may want to download and run the latest
Accordance update from the website after running the other installers. Most people
do not need to study the details provided in this and the next chapter.
Installation details for Accordance will depend on several factors:
•
You may be a first time Accordance user.
•
You may be upgrading your Accordance program and modules.
•
You may be adding modules from an earlier CD-ROM to a later version of Accordance.
•
You may be reinstalling your old CD-ROMs on a new computer.
Specific installation steps for each of these situations are included on each CD-ROM in a
document called Installing Accordance.
An updated summary of instructions for installing each CD-ROM on each Mac OS is posted on
the website at www.accordancebible.com/install.htm.
System Requirements
You can use Accordance on any Macintosh with a hard disk, CD-ROM drive, and System 7.5 to
OS X or higher. On a PC it can be run on an emulator available from the website.
The space required on the hard disk depends on the modules being installed. Accordance itself
requires a minimum of 20 megabytes of hard disk space for installation, if you choose not
to copy any modules or documentation from the CD-ROM. However, all standard Accordance
installations do copy the modules to the hard disk.
1-2
Installation
Order of Installation
The order of installation is not critical for all CD-ROMs with version 5.7 or higher. However, it
is usually best to install the CD-ROMs in order from the oldest to the newest. The Accordance
version is usually printed on the CD label, and is always shown in the Read Me First document
on the CD-ROM. All installers for 5.7 or above have the version number in red on the
information page after the license.
Note: It is not necessary to install an old CD-ROM if you have a newer version of the
same series, except in the rare cases that a module is no longer available on
the newer CD-ROM. CD-ROMs sold as upgrades always include the full modules.
However, you are not entitled to sell or give the older CD-ROMs to another user.
WARNING: Installers with version 5.6.1 or earlier are NOT compatible with version 5.7
or higher. In most cases you should upgrade your CD-ROMs. If you have Classic
you can install older CD-ROMs first, then those with 5.7 or higher. There may be a
newer installer for a CD-ROM on the website. Sometimes you can manually install
the modules by dragging them to the Accordance folder on the hard drive, and
using Accordance to open them. Please see the instructions on the website.
Using the Installer
1. First turn on the Macintosh computer and any external drives. You are now in the
Finder looking at the Macintosh desktop.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive.
3. Double-click on the CD-ROM icon to open the Accordance CD-ROM window.
On the CD-ROM you will find an Installer icon.
4. If you use Mac OS 9 or 10, double-click on this icon. On OS X the installer
will request your own Mac administrator password.
5. If you have the Mac
emulator on PC, or Mac
OS 7 to 8, open the
folder named for 68K
Mac and double-click on
the 68K Installer.
6. Work through the initial
license and read the
informative screen titled
Read Me, then click
Continue to reach a
window like this:
The window lists the
various installation
options.
Introduction
1-3
1
Installation and First Time Launch
7. Normally, if you have plenty of hard disk space, you will select either Easy Install,
or Standard Install, or the Level at which you purchased the CD-ROM.
8. If you do not have space, you can select just the Minimum Install to have only the
software and essential files installed. All the other files can be accessed directly
from the CD-ROM, but this is not recommended in most cases.
9. Below the line are optional additional groups or modules which you may have
purchased and wish to install individually, using an unlock code. (Click the I
information button for more information on each item.)
10. Choose the appropriate Installer items by clicking on them, and (if necessary)
select the drive on which you want Accordance to be installed. Then click Install.
Note: Normally you will want to install the Accordance folder on your main hard
drive , but if space is limited you may prefer to install and run Accordance on a
removable or alternate disk drive.
Note: On the PC emulator you must create and select an additional drive for all but
the smallest Accordance installation.
11. Read and dismiss any dialog boxes.
12. When the Installer requests an unlocking code, enter it in the text box and click OK.
Finding the Unlock Codes
Most CD-ROMs do not require unlocking
codes (or passwords) at all: only certain
CD-ROMs have optional levels, groups, or
individual modules that require codes.
You should have the unlock codes for
everything you have purchased.
1-4
•
Some CD-ROMs, such as the Library
7 or Jewish Collection, are usually
packaged with the code for the purchase level inside the folder. You only
need to check the level, not the items that are included in your level, plus
any additional codes you have purchased. The installer will need a code for
each item you check. All the groups and unlocks are shown in the installer
to allow for custom unlock purchases, but everything included in a level is
automatically installed with the level code.
•
Your invoices from OakTree list all your new codes in the Description column.
You should keep the invoices for future reference in case you need to reinstall.
•
If you have free Bible unlocks with your package, you must tell us which Bibles
you want and we will supply the codes, these are not automatic unlocks.
•
If you have lost old codes, you can contact us to get them emailed to you.
Installer Actions
1. The Installer finds your previous Accordance folder or creates a new Accordance
folder on the hard drive you selected.
If the Installer finds more than one folder with Accordance, it will let you select the
folder for installation. If you then click New it will create a new folder.
2. Installs in the Accordance folder:
•
The correct OS X, PowerPC, or 68k version of Accordance
•
A Modules folder with the modules you installed in folders labeled Texts and
Tools
•
A Manuals & Documents folder
•
Read Me First document specific to the CD-ROM
•
A Read Mes folder with specific module documentation
•
Words and roots files which will be moved to a Gloss folder.
3. In OS X it also installs:
•
A new alias for Accordance may be added to the Dock
•
Two widgets and Read Me files on the Desktop (in OS 10.4 and up)
•
Six Accordance fonts in Library/Fonts
•
An alias of Accordance Help in Library/Documentation/Help.
4. In older Macintosh systems, the Accordance folder also includes:
•
A Help document that will open Accordance Help and an Accordance Help file
(these files should be kept in the same folder as Accordance, but cannot be
opened directly)
•
Six Accordance fonts in the Fonts folder of the System Folder
•
Accordance Help in the Help folder of the System Folder, or in the
Accordance folder
•
Help Viewer in the Help folder of the System Folder
•
CarbonLib or Drag and Drop Extensions in the System Folder.
5. Updates in the Accordance folder:
•
Any older versions of modules which are on the CD-ROM.
•
Converts all Accordance files to the new file type.
6. Deletes from the Accordance folder :
Any older copies of Accordance and some old Guide and Help files.
Introduction
1-5
1
Installation and First Time Launch
Finding and Running Your Copy of Accordance
OS X
In OS X you should see an icon of Accordance in the Dock. Click on the icon to
launch Accordance.
You can remove any old version icons by dragging them out of the Dock.
If the latest version is not in the Dock, you need to find it in the Accordance
folder (we put this folder on the root level of your hard drive). You can either:
drag the Accordance program down to the Dock where it will create an icon, and then
click the icon to run the program, or
double-click on the program to run it and put the icon in the Dock temporarily. While it
is running, click and hold the mouse on the icon until you see a pop-up menu, then
select Keep in Dock.
You may move the entire Accordance folder to another location, such as Applications, but you
should not move Accordance itself out of the Accordance folder or it will not be able to access
any of the modules.
Classic
In earlier OS including the PC with emulator, open the Accordance folder (on the root level of
your hard drive) by double-clicking on it. You can also open the folder by clicking once on it
and selecting Open (File menu or ⌘-O). Then open Accordance in the same way. You can also
start the program by double-clicking any Accordance file.
If you wish to access Accordance from your desktop, launcher or Apple menu, you should make
an alias of the Accordance icon by choosing Make Alias (File menu). This alias can then be
moved to the location of your choice (and the word alias can be deleted from the name).
WARNING: DO NOT move the program icon itself out of the Accordance folder, or it will
not run properly.
The installer deletes previous versions of the program. If you attempt to use an old alias of the
program, you will encounter problems. You should make a new alias for the new version and
trash the old alias.You can now begin to use Accordance.
1-6
Registering Your Copy of Accordance
1. If this is the first time you are
using this copy of Accordance, a
dialog box appears asking you to
register your name. You can use
the return key to start a new line.
2. After you enter your name and
(optional) affiliation and verify
that it is correct, click the OK
button or press the enter key.
3. A dialog box then appears for
verification of your name and
affiliation. If your name and
affiliation are not correct, click on
Cancel and make any corrections.
Otherwise, click OK to permanently
save your entry.
A dialog box with your name and
affiliation will appear each time you
start Accordance.
Introduction
1-7
1
Installation and First Time Launch
Setup Assistant
The first time you run
Accordance the Setup
Assistant guides you
through some initial
settings. You can reset
these preferences and
many others at any
time in the Preferences
dialog box. See
Appendix A for details
of the Preferences.
The first window
introduces the Setup
Assistant.
The next window
lets you choose to
work initially with
separate windows or a
workspace.
We recommend
selecting the
workspace.
The workspace is
a blank window in
which other windows
appear as tabs. It is
a convenient way to
keep your windows
organized and
accessible. See Chapter
22 for details.
1-8
Then you choose
whether to open
Accordance with a new
window or to reopen the
windows that you had
when you quit.
We recommend
selecting the last
session.
Once you have some
open windows you can
return to Preferences
and select a third option
of a default session with
your preferred window
arrangement.
The pop-up menus in
the next window let
you select the Bible
you want to start with,
and the font and size
for English text in most
windows.
Later you can set the
font size globally and
individually for texts
and tools.
We recommend at least
14-16 points with the
high screen density of
newer monitors.
Introduction
1-9
1
Installation and First Time Launch
Lastly you set whether
Bible text appears in
separate verses or in
paragraphs.
You can change this
later for each text.
Now you are done
with the initial setup.
The final window
gives you a few tips to
get you started with
Accordance.
1-10
Setting Up
2
Chapter Contents:
Types of Files in Accordance .......................... 2-2
Copying Modules............................................. 2-3
Moving and Naming the File Icons ................. 2-4
Cleaning up the Accordance Folder ................ 2-4
The Accordance Fonts ..................................... 2-5
Adding Texts and Tools to Accordance........... 2-5
Using a Module from a Different Location...... 2-7
Preference Files ............................................... 2-8
Important Backups ........................................ 2-10
Multiple Users ............................................... 2-10
User Files ....................................................... 2-11
Using Macintosh Memory (OS 7 to 9) ............ 2-12
2
Setting Up
Types of Files in Accordance
When you finish installing Accordance, you will see a number of files in the Accordance folder
similar to those shown here.
Accordance Files
1. The Accordance Program
The program file is named Accordance. In Classic systems it is followed
by a version number such as 7.2 and PPC or 68K. This is the Accordance
application itself. To check the version number in OS X you can select the file and
choose Get Info (File menu or ⌘-I). If you have multiple copies of the program,
you can delete all except the latest version by moving them to the Trash can.
2. Settings
Files with icons like the Settings contain important information needed by
Accordance, and will be collected in a folder named Accordance Preferences.
This folder must be kept in the same folder as Accordance. If they are not
already present, the folder and files will be created automatically when you
run Accordance. In OS X a copy of this folder is created in each user’s Library/
Preferences folder. See later in this chapter for more details on these files.
Note: You may also see an Accordance Settings ƒ folder in the Accordance folder,
with older versions of the settings files.
3. Modules and Glosses
You should also see a Modules folder with several Accordance-compatible text
and tool modules. Double-clicking a text or tool module launches Accordance
and opens a window displaying that text or tool.
Files with names like Greek words or Hebrew roots are collected
in a Gloss folder. These files supply additional information for
the original language morphologically tagged texts.
4. Graphic Data and Backgrounds
Atlas and Timeline files have special icons for the data itself,
and for the different colored backgrounds.
5. Saved Windows
Accordance window files contain different kinds of windows that
have been saved within Accordance. When you open a window file in
Accordance, the searches defined in any Search windows in the file are
automatically performed. Double-clicking a window file launches
Accordance and opens the windows from the file.
5. User Files
The user notes files are Accordance modules that you create
yourself. Each note in a file is attached to a specific verse. You
can add to and edit these notes at any time.
The user tools files are Accordance modules that you create or
import. You can add to and edit these tools as well as search them.
2-2
In OS X these files are copied to, and new files are saved in the user/Library/
Accordance Files folder.
Standard Macintosh Files
1. Help
Help opens the Apple Help files which give on-line
interactive help for all the features of Accordance.
Accordance Help links the program to the Apple Help
files (in OS 8 and 9) but cannot be opened itself.
2. Text or RTF File
When you save the text contents of a window in Accordance, it is
saved as a text file or an RTF file. This text file can be opened and
edited in most word processors.
3. PICT File
When you save the contents of a graphical window in Accordance, it is saved
as a PICT file.
A PICT file can be imported as a graphic into most page layout programs and
some word processors.
4. Read Me Files
Documentation supplied with Accordance may be text files which can be
opened by Simple Text or TextEdit, or PDF files for Preview or Adobe Reader.
They contain important information about the software and the modules. You
can read the documents on screen or print them for future reference.
Most of these files will be in a folder called Manuals & Documents. The Read
Mes folder contains important information about individual modules.
Copying Modules
Normally all modules are installed on your hard drive, although any Accordance module can be
accessed directly from the CD-ROM if there is no room on the hard drive.
You should always use the installers to add modules, wherever possible, since they correctly
move all the modules that belong together, and add them to the pop-up menus in Accordance.
The installers place new modules into Texts and Tools folders within a Modules folder in the
Accordance folder.
You only need to copy modules manually if the installer is for versions earlier than 5.7 and you
already have a newer version of Accordance or do not have Classic. To copy any item to your
hard disk, simply drag its icon to the disk or folder into which you wish to copy it.
Note: Many modules are “locked” so that only licensed owners of that module can use
it in Accordance. There is no point in copying these modules to your hard disk
unless you have purchased the license.
Note: If you manually copy modules to your hard disk, YOU MUST STILL ADD THESE
MODULES to the pop-up menus from within Accordance before you can use them.
Introduction
2-3
2
Setting Up
Upgrading Modules
Many Accordance modules are revised and upgraded on new releases of the CD-ROMs. The
newer installers automatically replace older copies of modules found in your Accordance
folder, with any newer ones on the CD-ROM (when you select Standard or Easy Install). To take
advantage of module corrections and upgrades, please check the website for news on updates.
Some modules are posted for download by the AccUpdater widget, which offers an easier way
to obtain modules which have been updated recently. See Chapter 24-Other Features.
Moving and Naming the File Icons
You may move the entire Accordance folder to another location, such as Applications, but you
should not move Accordance itself out of the Accordance folder or it will not be able to access
any of the modules.
If you move Accordance modules into other folders after they have been added to Accordance,
you will be asked where each module is the next time you attempt to access it. You will need
to navigate to its new position. If you rename modules, Accordance may not be able to handle
them correctly.
After the Accordance Preferences folder and its files have been created, they should not not be
renamed or moved. Otherwise new settings files will be created. You will then need to add all
your modules again and recreate your ranges and default settings. See below for details of the
Preferences folders.
The Apple Help file must also remain in the same folder as Accordance (in OS 8.6 and 9).
In the Finder you are free to rename the files you save in Accordance, such as window files and
any text or PICT files. However, if you rename a user notes or user tool file, Accordance will no
longer be able to access it. (See Chapters 20 and 21.)
Cleaning up the Accordance Folder
You may save space and reduce clutter by deleting the following files:
Any older copies of Accordance (shown by the version number).
Any old AppleGuide tutorials.
Any documentation you have read or printed, or prefer to access directly on the CD-ROM.
Any modules which you do not use, or which have been functionally replaced by
others with different names, or are duplicates.
Any modules which you rarely use and prefer to access directly from the CD-ROM.
CAUTION: Do NOT delete the Accordance settings files! They will be automatically
upgraded when you run the new version. If you delete these files you will need to
add all your Accordance modules again, and recreate all your ranges and default
settings.
2-4
The Accordance Fonts
Six Accordance fonts are included with the software, and will be installed in your system by the
Installer. See the Accordance Fonts.pdf for full details of the fonts.
Adding Texts and Tools to Accordance
When you run the Installer, the modules included in the installation will be copied from the CDROM to your Accordance folder, and added automatically to the pop-up menus in Accordance.
You will need to add modules to Accordance yourself if:
•
You have copied them to the hard drive yourself
•
You choose to use any modules directly from the CD-ROM
•
The module does not appear on any pop-up menu even though it is in the
Accordance folder
•
Another Admin user installed additional modules after you first ran Accordance.
To add the new modules to the pop-up menus
so that they are available to Accordance, select
Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option ⌘-A),
and click the Add Module button. The standard
Macintosh dialog box, shown on the next page,
appears allowing you to select a file name. See
Chapter 5-Floating Windows for more details on
the Arrange Modules window.
This dialog box allows you to:
•
Open the pop-up menu to navigate back
“up” to the desktop.
•
Open folders and see the lists of contents
•
Select more than one item in the list, by
pressing the shift or command key as you
select additional items.
When opened from Add Module, only modules
that have NOT been added to Accordance
appear in bold, modules that have already been
added are dimmed in OS X and do not appear at
all in earlier systems.
Introduction
2-5
2
Setting Up
In this dialog box,
and other dialog
boxes in Accordance
that contain lists,
you can also use the
up and down arrow
keys to select an
item in the list.
The Add modules
dialog box normally
reappears to allow
you to add another
module, until
you click Cancel.
However, it does
not reappear if you
select more than
one module to add
at once, nor if it
opened automatically
because there are no
text modules in Accordance.
If the modules have not been copied to the hard disk, you can add them to Accordance by
navigating in this dialog box to the CD-ROM on the desktop and finding the Modules folder.
Locked Modules
If the module is “locked”, you will be asked
to enter an 18 digit password in order
to add the module. This is the only time
that you will be asked for the password.
If you do not have the password, click on
Cancel, and contact OakTree Software,
Inc. to purchase the module or request a
lost password.
Some modules are “locked” as part of a
group (such as the Basic Group). After you
enter the group code for the first module
in the group, all the other modules can be
added without unlocking.
After a module is been added it will appear
in the pop-up menus in Accordance, and
its name will no longer appear on the list of files available for adding. Note that new modules
added in this way do not open a new window.
2-6
Arrange Modules for Non-admin User
Using Arrange Modules, in OS X, non-admin users can only add to their own pop-up menus
modules which have already been added to the main Accordance preferences, as above.
The same Arrange Modules window and Add Module dialog are used, but the only modules
available are those which have already been added to the main preferences but do not appear
on the user’s own menus.
Earlier Systems
If you are using OS 8.1 or earlier, particularly
the emulator on a PC, and do not have the
Navigation Extension, this older navigation
dialog box will appear instead of the one shown
above. You can select only one item at a time in
this window.
Other Methods
You can also add new modules by double-clicking directly on the file icon in the Finder (this
may not work if the module comes from an older CD-ROM), or by selecting the name from the
dialog box when you choose Open… (File menu or ⌘-O). In either case, a new window opens
and displays the entire module.
Using a Module from a Different Location
To replace an older module on your hard drive with its newer version from the CD-ROM, simply
drag the icon of the new module from the CD-ROM to the folder containing the older module.
Normally, the installer will do this automatically except on Minimum Install.
To use a module from the CD-ROM which was previously used on your hard drive, either delete
the module from the hard drive or move it. Then the next time you choose that module within
Accordance, you will be asked where the module is and you can navigate to its location on the
CD-ROM. You will not need to enter a password if the module is already on the pop-up menus.
Any module you used directly from a previous CD-ROM can be used from a new CD-ROM which
includes it, but Accordance will ask you to navigate to its new location, the first time that you
request it.
To use a module on your hard drive which was previously used from the CD-ROM, first copy
the module to your hard drive and then restart Accordance without the CD-ROM in the drive.
Then the next time you choose that module within Accordance, you will be asked where the
module is and you can navigate to its new location on the hard drive.
Introduction
2-7
2
Setting Up
Preference Files
This information is primarily for network administrators, and for reference in case of technical
problems. Most users should not need to consult this section.
History
Accordance 7 changed the way that your individual settings and preferences are managed.
In earlier versions they were stored in the Accordance settings file and similar files, and in
versions 5 and 6 these files were collected in the Accordance settings ƒ folder which remained
in the Accordance folder together with the Accordance application itself.
New Preferences
When you run Accordance Version 7 and above for the first time it creates a new Accordance
Preferences folder with the settings files, if one does not already exist. The folder may be
created in several places:
In the Accordance folder the main Accordance Preferences folder contains these settings:
•
Settings from any old settings files that were in the folder from an earlier version.
•
The record of any and all new modules added to Accordance by an Installer, or
manually by the administrator.
•
New settings files installed for the Map or Timeline.
•
All new settings saved by any user in Classic OS (7 through 9).
In OS X each user will have a copy of Accordance Preferences in the user’s /Library/Preferences/
containing:
•
A copy of the settings from the main Accordance Preferences folder at the time this
user first used Accordance 7.
•
All new settings saved by this user in OS X.
This arrangement has the following benefits:
•
Each user can have their own settings and preferences.
•
Non-admin users can access Accordance even when it is placed in Applications.
•
Multiple users can access the same copy of Accordance and its modules
simultaneously.
Individual Settings Files
The settings files contain the following information. If a particular kind of module is not
installed, the settings file may not exist.
2-8
•
Favorites: User’s choice of modules for quick access
•
General: Miscellaneous settings from Preferences and other windows
•
Maps: All the defined layers and sets, their arrangement, as well as default settings
for the Map window
•
Parallels: Default settings for Parallel windows and their arrangement
•
Search All: The groups which have been defined for searching in the Search All
window
•
Search Ranges: The ranges which have been defined for searching in the Search
window
•
Startup session: Either a defined session or the windows that were open when last
quitting the program
•
Text sets: The sets of texts which have been defined for opening or amplifying
•
Texts: The installed text modules, their arrangement, and their individual display
settings
•
Timeline: All the defined layers and custom lists as well as default settings for the
Timeline window
•
Tool sets: The sets of texts which have been defined for opening or amplifying
•
Tools: The installed tool modules, their arrangement, and their individual display
settings
•
User Items: Any user items defined for the Timeline
•
User Layers: Any user layers drawn for the Map
•
User Notes: The installed User Notes modules and their arrangement
•
User Tools: The installed User Tool modules, their arrangement, and their individual
display settings
These details are included here for two reasons:
1. Administrators of multiple users may need this information.
2. Settings files can occasionally get corrupted. If you get a message that a certain file
is corrupt, you can delete it from your user Preferences. Our Technical support may
recommend that you remove a certain file to correct a problem you are having.
If you delete one of these files from your user Preferences: Texts, Tools. Parallels, Maps,
Timeline, User Items, or User Layers, Accordance will then copy the file from the main
Accordance Preferences folder. If it does not find a file to copy, and for other settings, it will
create a new one. You may lose settings that you saved on that file.
Note: A Module Installation Log file in each Accordance Preferences folder records what
files are moved, copied or installed. Accordance does not use this file, but it may
be useful for troubleshooting.
Hint: If you install the Bible Atlas, and the Accordance map settings and User Layers files
are not moved automatically to the Accordance Settings ƒ folder, please move them
there yourself and replace the interim files which have been created. You should
then delete the Maps and User Layers files from both Accordance Preferences
folders, before running Accordance again.
Introduction
2-9
2
Setting Up
Important Backups
For security, each user should make a regular backup of their user’s /Library/Preferences/
Accordance Preferences, and their user’s /Documents/Accordance Files.
The Accordance settings ƒ folder used in earlier versions is kept intact in the Accordance folder
both as a backup, and for backwards compatibility with earlier versions of Accordance.
Multiple Users
Accordance 7 in Mac OS X now allows multiple users on one computer and over a network. This
should be transparent to all users, but the details are provided for those who need them.
Installation
Installation of Accordance can only be done by an administrator. This user will install
Accordance and the accompanying modules, and run Accordance for the first time, and after
subsequent installations.
Accordance creates the main Accordance Preferences folder in the Accordance folder with
information on which modules have been installed. If this is an upgrade from a version of
Accordance earlier than 7.0, all old settings will be incorporated into the new preferences files.
Accordance then makes a copy of Accordance Preferences in the user’s /Library/Preferences/
Accordance Preferences for that user, and for each subsequent user who logs onto the computer
and runs Accordance.
Each user thus starts with the set of preferences from the main folder. Any changes he makes,
such as adding ranges, are only in his own settings and are not available to other users on the
same computer.
Sharing Preferences
If the administrator wants to set up specific preferences for other users, he can use one of two
methods:
1. He can log in as each user and set up the ranges, the text and tool display, and all
the other settings for them, or
2. He can set up his own copy of Accordance the way he wants everyone to be able
to start. He then copies his Accordance Preferences folder from his user’s /Library/
Preferences/ to the Accordance folder, replacing the “main” copy which exists there.
These settings are now available to each new user.
Subsequent changes the administrator makes to his settings are not available to other users,
except that any modules he adds to Accordance by an installer or through Arrange Modules
are added to the main Accordance Preferences. Each user may then add them to his copy of
Accordance. They are not added automatically to other users.
2-10
The administrator can also copy individual files from his Preferences to the main Preferences.
Any user can access the new preferences by deleting the file of that name from his user’s
/Library/Preferences/Accordance Preferences. In the case of the Texts, Tools. Parallels, Maps,
Timeline, User Items, and User Layers the settings file will be automatically copied to the
user’s Preferences. Other files, such as Search Ranges can be manually copied to the user’s
Preferences.
Example: You create some interesting user items for the Timeline. If your User Items file
is placed in Accordance folder/Accordance Preferences it will be available to any
user who removes his own User Items.
User Files
User Notes, User Tools, and Highlights are all files which the user can edit. These user files are
saved in one of two locations:
Accordance folder/Modules/Shared filetype contains all user files available to
Accordance when first running version 7 and all user files created or added while
running in Classic OS
In OS X the user’s /Documents/Accordance Files/filetype contains the user’s own copy
of all user files available to Accordance when first running version 7, and all user
files created or added while running in OS X.
Any changes made by the user to any of these files in OS X are made to his copy of the files,
and are not immediately available to other users.
The first time you run Accordance 7 or above as an upgrade, it moves the following to
Accordance folder/Modules:
•
All installed User Tools to a folder called Shared User Tools.
•
All installed User Notes to a folder called Shared User Notes.
•
Current Highlight settings to a folder called Shared Highlights.
Sharing Files
To make a User Notes or Tool file available to other users, place it in the Accordance folder/
Modules/Shared filetype folder. When another user adds this user file, Accordance will make a
copy of it in their user’s /Documents/Accordance Files/filetype folder. If a user file with the same
name already exists, they can manually replace their copy with the new one.
To allow another user to load a Highlights file that you have prepared, place a copy of the
file in an accessible location, and let the user move or copy it to their user’s /Documents/
Accordance Files/Highlights folder.
Introduction
2-11
2
Setting Up
Using Macintosh Memory (OS 7 to 9)
In OS X memory management is automatic, but in earlier systems you may need to increase
the amount of memory allocated to Accordance, if you want to work with many large texts and
tools simultaneously or with map windows. The amount of memory that Accordance takes up
when you use the program depends on the memory allocation for Accordance, the memory
available in your Macintosh, and the memory requirements of other programs that you want to
run at the same time as Accordance.
Adding Memory to Accordance
To increase the memory allocation, quit
Accordance and select the program icon by
clicking on it once. Then select Get Info
(File menu or ⌘-I) to open a dialog box that
gives information about Accordance. Choose
Memory in the pop-up menu to see the Memory
Requirements. The first line in the box reads
Suggested size:. Below this are two boxes labeled
Minimum size: and Preferred size:.You can select
the numbers in these boxes and enter a larger
number. You may increase the Preferred size,
but you should not decrease the Minimum size.
Close the Get Info dialog box. The additional
memory will be available next time you launch
Accordance.
Checking Memory Usage
To see how the different programs are using
the memory of your computer, and how
much you have available, click on a Finder
icon or window and select About This
Computer… (Apple menu). The dialog box
shows a horizontal bar for each open software
program indicating how much memory is
allocated and how much is actually being used
(solid bar).
2-12
Getting Help
3
Chapter Contents:
The Documentation on the Disk.................. 3-2
The Accordance User’s Guide ........................3.2
Accordance Help........................................... 3-5
3
Getting Help
Accordance offers three sets of documentation for its users: this User’s Guide, Flash movie
demos and DVD Tutorials, and Accordance Help interactive on-line help. Many Macintosh
users do not even look at their documentation until they run into a problem. Some prefer a
systematic and detailed book, and others like the convenience of interactive help on-screen
when they need it. We have tried to accommodate all these learning styles
The Documentation on the Disk
This User’s Guide and other documentation is available on the CD-ROM as a PDF file which can
be opened with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
This document is designed to introduce you to the software, and help you get started enjoying
the power of Accordance. We strongly recommend that new users get an overview of the
software by starting with the movie demos and the Accordance Help Tutorial unless they plan
to read this User’s Guide from cover to cover!
The Demo files folder on most CD-ROMs includes demonstration texts so you can try out the
different modules including Greek and Hebrew for yourself. These files are also available for
download from the website.
The Accordance User’s Guide
This book is a comprehensive illustrated manual which details all the functions of Accordance.
Unlike the other documentation, this manual attempts to give complete explanations of every
feature in every window.
For a quicker overview and introduction to the major features, please go through the Tutorial
and read the Accordance Help described above. The Help is also updated with every new
version of the software.
This manual is designed for reference, and for users who prefer a detailed explanation of every
feature. Even the experienced user will benefit from studying the manual in order to fully
utilize the power of Accordance.
The User’s Guide is accompanied by three supplements, for Morphologically Tagged texts, the
Atlas, and the Timeline. These supplements are included on the appropriate CD-ROMs. Some of
the volumes are available for purchase in printed and bound form.
Note: The illustrations in this manual were made with OS 10.4 – the windows and buttons
may look different on another Macintosh system.
3-2
The manual is divided into several sections:
Introduction
Chapters 1 and 2 cover most of the questions raised in calls for support. Please read
and follow the instructions carefully.
Chapter 1–Installation and First Time Launch summarizes the installation of
Accordance and the associated files and modules from the CD-ROMs, for the new
user and as an upgrade.
Chapter 2–Setting Up is a reference chapter which discusses the different
Accordance files, adding, backing up, and multiple users.
Chapter 3–Getting Help describes the documentation available with Accordance and
the use of Accordance Help interactive help
Chapter 4–Getting Oriented gives an overview of the Accordance interface.
Chapter 5–Floating Windows and Arrange Modules describes the Resource
palette, the Arrange Modules window, and the Instant Details box.
Searching the Bible
The Search window is the core of Accordance. It allows you to search for words or phrases
in Bible texts. The results are displayed in text panes, allowing you to view as many texts in
parallel as you desire.
Chapter 6–Viewing the Text describes the display of the Bible text in parallel panes,
and how to work with the text.
Chapter 7–Doing Searches describes the menus and buttons that help you define
your searches.
Chapter 8–Search Symbols and Commands helps you learn how to define specific
searches.
Chapter 9–Keyed Bible Texts shows you how to view and search the Bibles with
original language information such as Strong’s numbers.
Chapter 10–Graphical Searches describes the unique Construct window for defining
a search graphically.
Digging Deeper
The Details and Amplify features of Accordance give you instant access to further information
about your search results.
Chapter 11–Getting Details describes the Graph, Analysis, Concordance, and Table
windows which analyze the entire result of your search.
Chapter 12–Amplify Features describes the Amplify features in general, and the use
of Amplify windows.
Chapter 13–Amplifying your Selection shows you how to get the context of
selected verses, to search for a selected word or phrase, or hear your selection
read aloud. It also covers some special Amplify features for Keyed Bible texts.
Introduction
3-3
3
Getting Help
Consulting Study Aids
Accordance lets you move freely between your Bible texts and a wide variety of tools and other
modules, which are described in this section.
Chapter 14–Tools describes the use of lexicons, commentaries, or other reference
works which you have added to Accordance. These tools are fully searchable and
feature a wide array of hypertext capabilities.
Chapter 15–Search All Groups, Text, and Tool Sets shows you how to create and
search a set of Accordance modules at the same time.
Chapter 16–Parallels displays parallel passages of scripture such as Kings and
Chronicles in parallel panes. The lists of parallel passages are available as separate
Accordance modules.
Doing your own Thing
This section describes features that let you save and recall your own work as you study.
Chapter 17–Color Highlighting shows you how to highlight words and verses in
different colors and styles.
Chapter 18–Reference Lists let you collect and display any verses you select.
Chapter 19–User Notes describes the User Notes and Edit windows which let you
add your own multilingual notes to any verse.
Chapter 20–User Tools describes the User Tool and Edit windows which let you
import, create, and edit your own tools.
Chapter 21–Importing Bibles helps you import a Bible text from another source.
General Features
Chapter 22–The Workspace and Slide Show lets you organize your windows with
tabs, and display them for projection.
Chapter 23–Working with Windows shows you how to work with multiple windows
in Accordance, and how to link them together in various ways. It also details
special features of text entry in the original languages
Chapter 24–Other Features covers Contextual menus, the Accordance Widgets, and
the differences in Classic systems.
Chapter 25–Printing and Saving describes how to save and print windows and their
contents in Accordance.
Appendices
Appendix A–Setting Preferences shows all the options for default settings in
Accordance.
Appendix B–Menu Reference and Key Commands describes each menu item in
order, and lists the keyboard shortcuts.
Appendix C–Names and Symbols details their use in the entry box.
3-4
Accordance Help
Accordance Help offers interactive help for all the features of Accordance, with a Tutorial to
help you get started with the basics. These files are automatically installed in the Help folder
of your System. They use the Apple Help Viewer which is similar to an Internet browser, and is
very easy to use, navigate and search. An AppleGuide file in the Accordance folder links the
Help “book” to Accordance on OS 8.6 to 9.
Earlier Systems
The Apple Help files require OS 8.6 or above. If you are using an earlier system you can access
these files with any Internet browser. The Help files will be installed in a Help folder in your
Accordance folder instead of the System, along with a Help icon that links to your Internet
browser. Double-click the icon to open your browser to a page with links to the Tutorial and
Accordance Help. The Window Help interactive feature will not be available to you. On the PC
with emulator you must transfer the files back to Windows in order to use them.
Help Menu
The Help menu to the right of the Window menu gives you access
to Accordance Help. You can also open the Help Viewer from any
other application that uses it, and navigate to Accordance Help.
Accordance Help opens the full interactive guide to all the features and windows of
Accordance. It is fully searchable and has many hypertext links between the pages. The first
section, TUTORIAL, opens an interactive introduction to the features of Accordance using the
demonstration modules supplied on the CD-ROM.
To open the main Accordance Help window
select Accordance Help (Help menu), or press
Command-? (⌘-?).
The Help Interface
The buttons in the top left let you go back and
forward to pages you have already seen, or select
another Help file (in OS 10.4). The View menu lets
you adjust the font size.
The Ask a question box searches the current Help
file for the words you enter in the box after you
press return or enter. The results are ranked for
relevance.
The left side of the window shows the main sections of the
Accordance Help file. Clicking on a section opens the contents list for
that section. Click on any title of interest to open the page on that
topic on the right side.
The last section on the left entitled What’s New covers the changes in
each version of Accordance, and links to the relevant pages.
Introduction
3-5
3
Getting Help
The Tutorial
Accordance Tutorial is the first section of
Accordance Help which introduces the new user
to the basic features of Accordance using the
demonstration modules on the CD-ROM. New users
are strongly recommended to work through the
tutorial in order to gain an understanding of the
main types of windows and functions. Simply click
the links to explore the Tutorial, and follow the
directions with Accordance.
Window Help
You can go directly from any Accordance window
to the description of that window in Accordance
Help. Simply select Window Help (Window menu
or option-⌘-?). The Help opens to the page which
illustrates and describes that window and the
functions of its menus and buttons.
This context sensitive help can also be accessed
from many of the dialog boxes, including all the
Preferences and Set windowtype Display dialog
boxes. The Help window will guide you through
each of the options presented in that dialog box .
Accordance Help also includes definitions of all
the Greek and Hebrew grammatical tags. Selecting
Window Help for the tag details dialog box for a
specific part of speech, opens the description of each of the options available for that part of
speech.
3-6
Getting Oriented
4
Chapter Contents:
Key Accordance Concepts ............................... 4-2
The Accordance Interface................................ 4-4
Understanding Windows ................................. 4-6
Description of the Search Window .................. 4-7
Contextual Menus.......................................... 4-11
Saving and Printing Windows and Text Panes . 4-11
Setting Defaults ............................................. 4-11
4
Getting Oriented
Key Accordance Concepts
Accordance has been designed around a few key concepts, which open the door to
understanding the interface and using it effectively:
1. The Bible is Central
The primary purpose of Bible Study software is to help you to study the Bible, and the
Accordance interface is designed accordingly. When you launch Accordance, the first
thing you see is a window displaying the entire text of the Bible (whichever one you
choose as your default). Thus, the Bible itself serves as the central hub around which
your study revolves.
2. Searching is Central
Bible software should center around the act of searching the Bible, so Accordance gives
you everything you need to perform a search right from the very beginning.
The Accordance Search window is designed to make defining a search as quick and
painless as possible. You can find a passage by entering its reference, or you can search
the text of the Bible for a particular word or phrase. You can specify the Bible translation
or original language text you wish to search, limit your search to a specific range of
verses, and use a variety of sophisticated search criteria. All of these options can be
accessed directly from within the Search window, so there’s no digging through dialog
boxes or preference panels just to define a search.
3. What You See Is What You Get
The Mac pioneered the concept of WYSIWYG: that what you see on screen should
faithfully represent what you get on the printed page.
Accordance is built around this same simple concept that what you see should be what
you get. That’s why the Search window is not only the place where you define a search; it
is also the place where the results of that search are displayed.
You define the search in the top part of the window, click OK and the results of the search
are displayed in the bottom part of the same window. If you leave this window open and
come back three hours later, you can see immediately what you had been searching for
before you left.
This WYSIWYG concept has been carried over to every other window in Accordance. For
example, in the Map window the settings in the pop-up menus at the top of the window
determine the geographical features which are displayed on the map. This makes it easy
to figure out how to use each different kind of Accordance window since any differences
between them are merely a function of the particular kind of information they enable you
to access.
4. Instant Access
4-2
Bible software should be unobtrusive, placing a wealth of information at your fingertips
without itself getting in the way. It should encourage you to ask questions of the biblical
text by making it easy to find the answers to those questions. It should enable you to
follow a path of study, consulting other resources as needed, without leading you away
from the text of the Bible itself.
Accordance accomplishes this by making every Accordance feature and module readily
available from the Resource palette. No matter where you are in the program or what
you’re looking at, you can select any Bible text, commentary, dictionary, map, timeline, or
other resource to open or to search.
If you select a word or verse reference before choosing a resource from the Resource
palette, Accordance will automatically search that resource for the word or verse you
selected. This enables you to get the information you need almost instantaneously,
making it easy to follow a train of thought through multiple resources.
5. Economy of Effort
Following a train of thought means not having to jump through unnecessary hoops to get
the information you need. Yes, the Resource palette makes it easy to open and search any
module in your Accordance library, but Accordance offers several shortcuts to the most
important resources.
Triple-click on the words or verses you’re interested in, and Accordance will open the
relevant dictionary or commentary with more information on your selection.
Simply pass your cursor over a word or item to get more information about it in the
Instant Details box located at the bottom of the screen.
To see your search results in an entirely new light, click the Details button on the Search
window to display them in different graphs and tables.
The menus at the top of the screen, and the contextual menus that pop-up with a rightclick in different areas of many windows, offer easy access to additional features.
6. Minimal Clutter
For Bible software to be unobtrusive and avoid getting in your way, it should let you view
a multiplicity of resources with a minimum of window clutter. Every second you spend
shuffling through lots of open windows is time taken away from your study of the Bible.
Accordance keeps window clutter to a minimum in two ways: through Window Panes and
Workspace Tabs.
Window panes enable you to compare multiple Bible texts or translations, view a
commentary in parallel with the text of the Bible, or keep your user notes for a passage
clearly visible, all within the same window.
Window panes can be used to keep Bible texts, commentaries, and user notes neatly
organized, but what about all the other resources available, such as lexicons, dictionaries,
general books, maps, timelines, and parallels? The Accordance Workspace window will
keep all of these separate resources together in one place, all neatly organized and
displayed as tabs. You never have to worry about losing one window behind another or
having to rearrange them … unless, of course, you want to!
7. Personal Preferences
Accordance lets you customize the appearance and function of almost every window, so
that it displays what you want and how you want it. In the Preferences you can set many
defaults which apply throughout the software, until you change them.
Then, whatever window you have in front, select the first item in the Display menu, or
use the shortcut command-T (⌘-T), to set the options that apply to that window and the
text it is displaying.
Conclusion:
Understand these seven design concepts, and you’re already well on your way to being an
Accordance power user!
Introduction
4-3
4
Getting Oriented
The Accordance Interface
Accordance follows the standard Macintosh interface; therefore it is very easy for an
experienced Macintosh user to learn to use the special windows and features. If you are
familiar with the Macintosh, you may want to skip this section and go on to the description of
the Search window.
Opening Accordance
Accordance can be opened by clicking on the program icon in the Dock, or by double-clicking
on the icon in the Accordance folder or any Accordance file icon. You can also select an icon in
the Finder with a single click, then choose Open (File menu or ⌘-O).
A welcome message appears for a few seconds, then a Search window opens. Although the
appearance of the windows and menus may vary depending on the Macintosh system, the
initial screen looks something like this:
Menu bar
Resource palette
Search window
Instant Details box
desktop
Two floating windows also appear at the edges of the screen:
•
the Resource palette lets you open new windows of any module and gives you
instant access to further information about selected words
•
the Instant Details box shows more information about the word under the cursor.
(See Chapter 5-Floating Windows and Arrange Modules.)
4-4
The Menu Bar
The menu bar at the top of the screen shows the name of each menu. Each menu contains a
list of items that perform functions in Accordance. To choose a item, position the pointer on a
menu name and hold the mouse button down. When the menu appears, keep the mouse button
down, drag the pointer to the item, and then release the mouse button. The selected function is
performed.
Note: If you close all windows without quitting the program, double-clicking on the
Accordance program icon will only change the menu bar from the Finder to the
Accordance menu bar. Use the File menu to open a new window.
The File Menu and New Submenu
An ellipsis (…) after
an item indicates that
selecting this item
opens a dialog box
with further choices.
An item is dimmed
if it does not apply
at this moment.
A triangle pointing to the
right. indicates that there is
a submenu under the item.
When you highlight the item
with the mouse, the submenu
appears to the right. Drag the
mouse out onto the submenu
and select the item you want
by highlighting it, and then
releasing the mouse button.
The ⌘ symbol indicates that you
can hold down the command key
and press the next key indicated,
to perform the same function. A
⇧⌘ combination indicates the
shift and command keys. On
Page Setup the symbols indicate
control-command P, and on Print
Settings option-command P.
These additional symbols do not
appear on older systems, but the
key combinations do work.
Quitting Accordance
To quit Accordance choose Quit (Application or File menu or ⌘-Q). A dialog box appears
asking whether you want to save the contents of all independent windows. Click Don’t Save or
press the d or n key, unless you want to save your work. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
There is no need to close any windows before quitting, and it is best not to close the floating
windows, as they will remain closed when you reopen the application.
Introduction
4-5
4
Getting Oriented
Understanding Windows
For more information on working with windows, see the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with
your computer.
Most Macintosh windows have the following features:
drag the title bar to
move the window
click the close
button to close
the window
click the minimize button to
hide the window in the dock
click the zoom button to toggle
the window to full screen size
drag the scroll bar
slider to scroll the
window contents
click the up and
down arrows to
scroll the text one
line at a time
drag the size
box to resize the
window
The title bar across the top of each window displays the name of the window. The title bar is
dimmed when the window is not the front or active window.
To close a window, either click on its close box or select Close (File menu or ⌘-W), All of these
have the same effect.
Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes and alert messages are somewhat simpler:
enter text in the text box
pressing the enter or return
keys is like clicking the
colored button (the one with
a border in older systems)
click on any button to perform
the indicated function and
dismiss the dialog box
Note: The illustrations in this manual show OS 10.4. If you have an earlier system, the
frames and buttons of windows and dialog boxes will look somewhat different.
4-6
The Workspace
As in most other software, this documentation and the software start with the use of
independent windows. Once you are familiar with the different windows, you may choose to
organize them as tabs in a workspace. The only visible difference will be in the top part of the
window where the title and
a close button appear on a
tab below the title bar of the
workspace. (See Chapter 22-The
Workspace.)
Introduction to the Search Window
Accordance uses a number of specialized windows for the different features of the software.
The Search window is the core window which is used to search Bible texts, and illustrates some
common features of Accordance windows. It consists of the search entry section and the text
pane. When you launch Accordance, a Search window appears displaying the first Bible text.
search text pop-up menu
Search for radio buttons
Details button
search entry
section
History pop-up
menu
argument entry box
more options
section hides
additional buttons
Add pane popup menus
section divider
text pane
display text pop-up menu
reference box
text access buttons
Opening a Search Window
font size buttons
To open a new Search window, select a Bible from one of the Text pop-up menus at the top of
the Resource palette. You can also open a new Search window by selecting Search Text from
the New submenu (File menu or ⌘-N), choosing the Bible module in the Open… dialog box
(File menu or ⌘-O), or by double-clicking on the file in the Finder or in the Arrange Modules
window (Edit menu or option-⌘-A).
Introduction
4-7
4
Getting Oriented
Accordance will also open a new Search window whenever it is launched or brought to the
front, and no other windows are open other than the floating palettes.
The Window Title
When you open a new Search window, the title shows the name of the current text. The name
of the window updates whenever you change the search text. However, if you change the name
of the window by selecting Name… from the Set submenu (Window menu or option ⌘-N), the
new name will no longer update when you change the text.
The Search Entry Section
The search entry section is the place where you enter your search or reference criteria.
Accordance then uses your criteria to determine which portions of the text to display in
the text window panes. The criteria can be as simple as a chapter and verse reference or as
complex as an intricate Greek or Hebrew grammatical construct. Only the portions of the text
that fit your criteria are displayed in the text window panes.
The search entry section is described in detail in Chapter 7. This overview is only an introduction
to concepts that are described fully throughout this manual.
The buttons and pop-up menus in the search entry section and the More
options section set the options that determine the extent and nature of
your search.
The Search Text Pop-up Menu
The search text pop-up menu shows the current search text and allows you to select from
any text available to your copy of Accordance. The criteria you enter into the search entry
section are matched against the contents of the search text.
Hint: To use a pop-up menu, hold the mouse button down anywhere within the
rectangle. After the list of items appears, drag the mouse to your new selection
and release the button. Your new selection appears in the pop-up menu.
Note: If a text does not appear in this pop-up menu, you need to make it available
to Accordance by selecting Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option-⌘-A),
and clicking the Add Module button. (See Chapter 2-Getting Started.)
The Search for Radio Buttons
The Search for radio buttons toggle or switch the entry section between searching for Words
and Verses. You can also press command-semicolon (⌘-;) to switch the search. Setting the
search to Verses allows you to enter the book, chapter, or verse references for the text you
wish to view. The Words search lets you enter words or phrases, and other more complex
search criteria.
When you first open Accordance, the search is set to Verses and an asterisk appears in the
argument entry box. The asterisk indicates every verse, so the text pane displays the entire
text of the first version you added to Accordance. The asterisk is automatically selected so
that you can immediately enter a new reference.
4-8
The Argument Entry Box
Search arguments and verse references are entered into the argument entry box. Clicking
the mouse in the argument entry box causes the blinking insertion point to appear. You can
then enter one or more references — or the arguments for your search — by either typing or
using items in the Search menu. Pressing the tab key, or triple-clicking in the box, selects all
its contents, so a new entry replaces the previous contents.
The History Pop-up Menu
The History pop-up menu stores and lets you retrieve the search arguments used previously
in this window. Selecting an argument from the pop-up menu lets you go back and repeat
the search without having to re-enter it.
More Options
Clicking the More options disclosure triangle reveals three additional pop-up menus and a
checkbox:
The Field Pop-up Menu
The first pop-up menu labeled Search within every
displays the current field or context for the search.
(For example, if the search field is set to Verse, then
a search for Adam < AND> Eve would find them only
when they occur in the same verse.)
The Range Pop-up Menu
The search range pop-up menu labeled of shows the
current search range and allows you to select the whole or a
portion of the search text. Some basic ranges are provided for
the new user. You can define your own ranges, including nonadjacent sections of the search text.
The Compare Texts Checkbox
The Compare texts checkbox highlights differences between the
first two texts of the same language in the panes below.
The Context Pop-up Menu
The pop-up menu labeled Add context lets you add additional
verses before and after the verses containing the “hits.” The default is
None so that only the hit verses are displayed.
The Section Divider
The section divider is a double gray line which can be moved up or
down to increase the height of the argument entry box. (The cursor changes to
a two-headed arrow whenever it is over a line which can be “dragged”.)
Introduction
4-9
4
Getting Oriented
The OK Button
The OK button is dimmed until you enter your arguments into the argument entry box. After
you enter your search arguments, the OK button is darkened and clicking it (or pressing the
return or enter key) causes Accordance to perform the search.
The Progress Window
If your search will take more than a few
seconds, the progress window appears.
The speed of the search is indicated by the
advancing bar. Clicking Stop, or pressing
escape or the command-period (⌘-.) keyboard
shortcut, causes Accordance to cancel the
search. During a long search you can click on the Finder or a window of another program
and work on something else while you are waiting.
The Text Pane
The text pane is the area in the middle of the window where the text that meets the criteria
entered in the search entry section is displayed.
The text window pane is described in detail in Chapter 6. This overview is only an introduction to
concepts that are described in more detail in the following chapters.
Setting the Display Text
The display text pop-up menu contains a list of all the text versions that are available to
Accordance. This pop-up menu shows the abbreviation of the current text that is displayed
in the text pane. The display text need not be the same as the current search text. You can
use this pop-up menu to change the display text at any time.
Changing the Display
The font size buttons let you quickly and proportionally increase or decrease
the size of all the fonts used in the pane. Selecting Set Text Display… (Display
menu or ⌘-T) lets you choose the font, size, style, and color of different
elements in the text, and well as other options.
Adding Multiple Panes
You can simultaneously view multiple text
panes with different versions, as well as
reference tools such as Bible Notes and your
own Notes. You add panes by choosing the
version from the Add pane: pop-up menus at the top right of the text pane. Multiple panes
are synchronized so they each display the same verse at the top of the pane. Clicking the
Close button at the top left of the pane closes that pane.
4-10
Moving through the Search Results
You can move through the search results by using the scroll bar to the right of the pane.
Clicking on the up or down arrow scrolls the text one line in either direction. Clicking on
the scroll bar above or below the scroll bar slider, or pressing the page up and page down
keys, moves the text one “page” in the respective direction. You can also drag the slider to a
new location on the scroll bar. The other controls on the bottom of the window enable you to
move through the text in increments of verses, chapters, or books, or to a specific reference.
Contextual Menus
A right-click on a two-button mouse opens a contextual menu with the most important options
appropriate for the area of the window that is clicked. Pressing control while clicking also
opens the contextual menu. This feature is supported within Accordance in older Classic OS.
In the Search window you can right-click in the argument entry box, in the surrounding entry
section (for More Options), and in the text pane. Most other windows have areas that support a
contextual menu. The options you see also depend on what you have selected in the window.
(For details of the contextual menus, see Chapter 24-Other Features.)
Saving and Printing Windows and Text Panes
You can save most windows as an Accordance file to reopen later. You can also save the
contents of individual text panes so they can be opened in a word processor. To save the
contents of a text pane as a text file, select Plain Text… from the Save As Text File submenu
(File menu). To save a Search window as an Accordance file, select Save… (File menu or ⌘-S).
You can print the text of one or all text panes by selecting Print… (File menu or ⌘-P). (See
Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
Setting Defaults
The Set-up assistant offered you certain options that affect the appearance and function of
Accordance. The Preferences dialog box allows you to set these and many more options for
the entire program, which remain in effect unless you change them, even when you quit and
reopen Accordance. This dialog box opens when you choose Preferences (Application menu
in OS X, or Edit menu in earlier systems, or ⌘-,). (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.)
Introduction
4-11
4
Getting Oriented
Recommendations
We recommend that most users adjust the following settings in the Preferences:
General:
Open initial window as workspace with tabs
Default startup to Last session or a Default session
Suppress opening text information
Suppress save warning for all windows
Text Display:
Show as, Font, Size, and Color, Highlighting color, and Reference display
Tool Display:
Font, Size, and Color, Highlighting color, and default Bible text
Greek & Hebrew:
Export options, see Chapter 25
Search Window:
Text and other sttings for new Search windows
After clicking on Details, show (Plots and Analysis, but not Concordance or Table)
Map Window Display:
Default tool
Timeline Display:
Default tool and text
4-12
5
Floating Windows
and Arrange Modules
Chapter Contents:
The Resource Palette ....................................... 5-2
Arranging and Adding Modules ...................... 5-5
The Instant Details Box ................................... 5-8
5
Floating Windows and Arrange Modules
When you first launch Accordance two windows appear on
the screen “floating above” any other Accordance windows:
the Resource palette along the right side, and the Instant
Details box at the bottom. Three additional floating palettes,
the Highlight, Text, and Character palettes, are described in
Chapters 17 and 23.
Features of Floating Windows
The floating windows are opened by the first items in the
Window menu. The menu has a check beside the item as
long as the window remains open. Selecting the item from
the menu either opens or closes the window.
A floating window does not change the fact that another
window is the front or active window.
To move a window drag the bar at the top or left of the
window.
To close a window simply click in the close box in the top left
corner or select the item in the Window menu.
The floating windows disappear when you click on the Finder
or the window of another program, or when you open a modal dialog box (which
must be dismissed before you can continue).
Selecting Hide Palettes (Window menu or option-⌘-0) hides all the open floating
windows until Show Palettes is selected from the menu.
When you close and reopen a floating window it will reappear in the position on the
screen where it was when you closed it. When you quit and reopen Accordance, the
program remembers whether or not the window was open.
The Resource Palette
The Resource palette gives you instant access to almost all the modules and
features that are available to you in Accordance.
Features of the Resource Palette
If the palette is not open, select its name from the Window menu.
The palette appears down the right hand side of your screen as a set of
icon buttons and triangles.
Clicking the triangles, or their labels, opens and closes sections of the
palette. The default palette has the Texts and Tools sections open, and
the next three sections closed, but Accordance retains the palette the
way it is when you quit and relaunch the program.
If you slowly move the cursor over an icon, a button tip will
appear under the cursor showing the name of the button.
5-2
Most of the icon buttons access pop-up menus, as indicated by the small black triangle
to the bottom right. The pop-up menu buttons either open or search the module(s)
you choose.
Hint: Click and hold the mouse button on the icon to open the pop-up menu.
The result of clicking the buttons depends on whether or not you currently have any
words selected or the cursor flashing in a text pane.
Opening a New Window
If you do NOT have a selection in a text pane, the cursor remains an arrow, so that
selecting an item on a pop-up menu opens a new window displaying the contents of
that item. This applies to the first four sections of the palette, and to the Search All
items in the Search button. Over other buttons that require a selection, the cursor
changes to an X.
Hint: If you DO have text selected, you can still open a new window by using the right
mouse click, or pressing the control key as you click on the icon, or before you
select the item.
Amplifying
If you have a selection, or the cursor is flashing in a word in a text pane, the cursor
changes to a magnifying glass over the palette, indicating that Accordance will
amplify your selection depending on what you choose from the Resource palette.
This usually means that Accordance will search for your selection in the resource
you open.
The Amplify features enable you to view more information about the words you have
selected in almost any window. (See Chapter 12-Amplify Features.)
These features correspond to the items in the Amplify menu. Selecting an item
on the Resource palette performs exactly the same function as selecting the
corresponding item from the Amplify menu or submenus. There are keyboard
shortcuts for many of the amplify actions (see Appendix B).
Selecting an Item
A single quick click on an icon button opens or amplifies to the last
module selected from the list, or the first module on the list.
Holding the mouse button down on the icon opens the menu and lets
you select another module to open or search.
A check mark indicates the previous item selected.
Most pop-up menus also have an option to open or search all the
modules in that menu.
Introduction
5-3
5
Floating Windows and Arrange Modules
The Buttons
The Resource palette is initially set to display icons in a vertical arrangement,
but the display can be customized as described on the next page.
Texts:
The first three icon buttons open or search the English, Greek, or Hebrew
text you select (or all the texts).
Text sets lets you define and open groups of texts.
The Parallel button opens a parallel database or searches it for the
reference of the selected Bible verse in a Bible text pane.
Context displays the context of selected verses in the same Bible text with
the same parallel text panes.
Tools:
Each icon button opens or searches the category of tool you select.
English tools, such as dictionaries.
Greek and Hebrew tools, such as lexicons or dictionaries.
Reference tools, such as commentaries or Bible notes.
General tools, such as writings.
Tool sets, lets you define and open groups of tools.
Background:
These icon buttons open or search for a selected name in special windows.
Map opens the background of your choice (requires the Bible Atlas).
Timeline (requires the Bible Timeline).
My Stuff:
These icon buttons access modules you create yourself, and the menu items
that let you create these modules.
My Tools button opens or searches the user tools.
The My Notes button opens or searches the user notes for the reference
of the selected verse in a Bible text pane.
Language:
Each button lets you see more information on your current selection.
Parsing displays the parsing details and gloss of selected words in a text
with Key (Strong’s) numbers or grammatical tags.
Diagram opens a window where you can create a grammatical diagram of
the selected words.
Speak reads any selected words audibly.
Syntax opens a syntactical chart of the selected words which you can edit
and annotate.
5-4
Search:
A single click on the Search button searches for the selected words in a
duplicate of the same Search or Tool window. This pop-up menu also opens
the Search All window which searches all available modules, or a st where
you can keep a copy of the modules you access most frequently.
(See Chapters 13-Amplifying your Selection, G5-Grammatical Windows, A4-Amplifying to and
from the Atlas, and T2-Amplifying to and from Timelines.)
Customizing the Palette
Two sets of radio buttons on the Appearance
page of the Preferences dialog (Application
or Edit menu or ⌘-,) let you select a horizontal palette and buttons with text labels.
The horizontal palettes have neither section labels nor disclosure triangles.
The position of each orientation of the palette is saved independently.
Arranging and Adding Modules
The Arrange Modules window makes it easy to organize the modules in the pop-up menus of
the the Resource palette and many windows. You can add and remove modules and organize
them into submenus, as well as add them to your Favorites.
The Arrange Modules Window
Selecting Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option-⌘-A) opens a special window which allows
you to manage all your modules.
This special window can be left open for quick access, or closed using the close button in
the top left. It cannot be merged into a workspace. It retains its position when closed and
reopened, and between sessions.
The Main Pane
The main pane displays the icons for each category of editable pop-up menus.
The categories themselves cannot be edited in any way.
Clicking the disclosure triangle opens the list of names for that category. You
can now arrange and edit the list of modules within the category.
The window can be copied and saved as an image, or printed.
Introduction
5-5
5
Floating Windows and Arrange Modules
The Buttons
Add Module allows you to add another
module to your copy of Accordance.
(See Chapter 2-Setting up.)
New Folder creates an untitled folder
below a selected item (or inside a
selected open folder).
New Divider places a dividing line
below the selected item (or inside a
selected open folder).
Alphabetize reorders the list of items
at the level of the selection.
Remove deletes the selected item.
Update saves the changes to the popup menus.
Using the Window
Adding Items
Module names can be added to categories (other than Favorites) using the Add
Module button as above. The module is added at the bottom of the relevant
category.
Folders and dividing lines can be added by clicking the buttons after
selecting a category or any item. If the selected item is an open folder, the
new folder or line is created inside the folder.
Modules moved into a folder will appear in a submenu on most pop-up
menus which list that category of modules. In dialog boxes with module
pop-up menus, items in folders are all in one list, separated by dividing
lines.
In many ways, all three types of items are treated in the same way in this
window.
Selecting Items
Click on an item to select it.
Shift-click to select contiguous items.
Command-click to select additional non-contiguous names.
Press the up or down arrow keys to select the next item instead.
Click and drag the mouse to select items within the marquee.
Once you have a selection you can:
Move an item by selecting and dragging it to a new location within the same
category, or to Favorites. The new location is indicated by the line under an
item, or a box around a folder.
Alphabetize the names at that level by clicking Alphabetize.
5-6
Add a folder or dividing line below (or inside) the selection.
Click Remove (or press delete) to delete an item. If you delete a module it is
deleted only from your user’s Preferences files, it can still be added back to
Accordance.
Note: Removing a folder with items in it, deletes only the folder, not the
contents; the contents are moved up to the level of the folder.
Folders
Modules placed in a folder appear in a submenu of the pop-up menus.
This is a convenient way to organize a long list of modules.
Click New Folder to add a folder. The name untitled is selected so
you can rename it. Names of current modules are not accepted.
Double-click a folder name to edit it.
Click the adjacent triangle to view the contents of the
folder.
Drag any item (module, folder, or divider) into a folder
to place them on the submenu.
Note: All the Texts appear in one category in this
window. If all the texts of one language (English,
Greek, or Hebrew) are included in one folder, the pop-up menu for that
language on the Resource palette will ignore that folder and place the
items inside it at the top level of the menu.
Opening Modules
Double-clicking a module name opens the module in a new window or adds a
tab in the workspace behind this window.
Hint: You can keep this window open at the side of the screen as a way of finding
and opening any modules. It retains its size and position between sessions.
Favorites
The Favorites pop-up menu lets you collect together for convenience the
modules you use most often. Items from Texts, Parallels, Tools, and User
Tools can be dragged to the Favorites to add them to that pop-up menu. The
items remain in their original position, and a copy is added to the Favorites.
The Browser
The font size of this window is set in the Appearance page of the Preferences
dialog (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,).
Clicking in the left margin of an open folder (where the cursor becomes
an X) closes that folder.
Option-click on any category triangle opens and closes all the
categories and subfolders in the window. This allows you
conveniently to view a complete list of modules.
Hint: If you copy or print to PDF the complete list of modules, you can then
email it to OakTree, if they have a question about what you have installed.
Introduction
5-7
5
Floating Windows and Arrange Modules
Saving your Changes
Click Update to implement the changes you have made, but leave the window
open for further editing. If you have deleted any modules from the pop-up
menus, you will be given a warning and an opportunity to cancel the changes.
Click the Close button to dismiss the window. If you have any unsaved changes,
a save warning will appear allowing you to save or discard your changes, or
return to the window.
Hint: Once you have set up your modules in Arrange modules, you can
replace the Texts, Tools, and Parallels settings files in the Accordance
folder/Accordance Preferences with the files from your user’s /Library/
Preferences/Accordance Preferences as a backup as well as for new users.
If you have to delete your user preferences for any reason, the modules
and arrangements will be restored from the Accordance folder
The Instant Details Box
The Instant Details box displays more information about the word or item currently under the
cursor. The information displayed depends on the type of module and the exact position of the
cursor.
Features of the Instant Details
If the box is not open, select Instant Details (Window menu or ⌘-B).
As you use the mouse to move the cursor over the screen, the instant details are
constantly updated.
There is no need to click on the word, nor to make the window the front window.
Simply place or drag the cursor over the word and the information will appear in
the box.
The information displayed depends on the type of module and the exact position of
the cursor.
This text cannot be copied or altered. It is shown only as a quick reference for the text
being viewed.
To freeze the text temporarily, press the shift key when moving the cursor.
Clicking the font size buttons lets you adjust the text sizes in the box.
The box can be resized by dragging the square gray grow box in the lower right corner.
Selecting Preferences and Instant Details Box (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,)
lets you set which items are displayed for keyed and morphologically tagged texts,
and turn on the auto-fade (see below).
The following types of information may be displayed in the box:
5-8
A word in a Keyed Bible text:
The English word, the Key (Strong’s) number,
the dictionary form of the original word, and
the English transliteration of the original
Greek or Hebrew word. See Chapter 9-Keyed
Bible Texts.
A word in a German Bible tagged with lemmas:
The word and the lemma.
A word in a morphologically tagged original
language text:
The lexical, inflected, and root forms (if
different from the lemma) of the word in the
original language, and transliterated into
English, the grammatical analysis of the word,
and the English meaning of the dictionary
form. See Chapters G2 and G4.
A word in untagged Greek or Hebrew text:
The English transliteration of the word.
A Map window:
The distance from the first option click,
elevation, and coordinates of the cursor
position. See Chapter A1.
A Timeline window:
The date and region of the point under the
cursor, and the distance from the first option
click. See Chapter T1.
A Scripture reference in a Tools window, or a
User Note or User Tools window:
The first verse of the reference, in the default
Bible text for that tool.
Other hypertextable items in a tool:
Details of abbreviations, bibliography, section
titles, etc. See Chapter 14-Tools.
Introduction
5-9
5
Floating Windows and Arrange Modules
Auto-fading
Checking Set to automatically fade in in the Instant Details page of the Preferences dialog
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) turns on the auto-fade.
This makes the Instant Details box fade whenever there are no items displayed in the box,
thus saving space on small screen monitors.
Pressing shift or moving the mouse quickly to the Instant Details box stops the fading and
allows access to the title bar, Size buttons and grow box.
Setting the Defaults
You can set the display
of the box by selecting
Instant Details Box
from the list in the
Preferences dialog box
(Application or Edit
menu or ⌘-,).
These options only
affect the items
displayed in the floating
Instant Details box, not
the parsing of selected
words in the Parsing
window.
Set to automatically
fade is described
above.
The Font size: pop-up
menu lets you choose Small, Medium, or Large.
The Key Number options will be dimmed unless a Keyed Bible text is added.
Unchecking the English word, Dictionary form, Key number, or English
transliteration removes that item from the Instant Details box.
The Greek and Hebrew options will be dimmed unless a morphologically tagged or
keyed text is added. Unchecking the Inflected form, Lexical form, Root form,
Grammatical details, English gloss definition, or English transliteration
removes that item from the Instant Details box. (The English gloss definition is
dimmed unless a tagged text has been opened in that session.)
The grammatical details can be displayed as Abbreviations or as Full words.
Clicking OK closes the dialog box and saves ALL the changes you have made to the
different pages. Clicking Cancel closes the dialog box without saving ANY changes.
Note: The order of the grammatical tags can be set in the Arrange Tags pane of the
Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,).
5-10
Viewing the Text
6
Chapter Contents:
Working with Text Panes ................................. 6-2
The Text........................................................... 6-3
Navigating through the Text ........................... 6-4
Selecting and Marking Verses.......................... 6-6
Viewing Texts and Tools in Parallel................. 6-7
Changing the Display in a Text Pane .............. 6-9
Comparing Texts ........................................... 6-14
Verse Matching and Discrepancies................ 6-16
Selecting and Copying Text........................... 6-18
6
Viewing the Text
Working with Text Panes
The text panes of the Search window display the results of your search in a Bible text. All the
verses in the current search text that meet the criteria you provide are displayed in the text
pane. The window can be resized using the zoom or size box to show as much of the text as
your screen size allows.
The items in the top and bottom bars apply to all the panes below.
number of “hits”
current verse/total verses
Details button
Add pane popup menus
display text
pop-up menu
font size buttons
user notes
mark
bookmark
text access buttons
reference box
The Top Bar
This bar shows some search statistics and displays buttons which apply to the window.
The large numeral 30 at the far left indicates the number of “hits” found by the
current search criteria. This number disappears when the search is for verses.
Verse 1 of 27 indicates the first verse visible in the text pane, and the total number of
verses in the text pane. The first number changes as you scroll through the search
results. The second number changes when you perform a new search that finds a
different set of verses.
Note: The number of hits may be more or less than the number of verses. In the
above example, Adam occurs more than once in some of the verses, so there
are more hits than verses. In a search for Adam <AND> Eve, the number of
hits is the sum total of the occurrences of Adam and of Eve in the matching
verses. Conversely, the use of certain search fields may cause several verses to
be displayed for each hit as described in Chapter 7.
The Details button is active when a word search has been performed in the window.
Clicking it opens a new workspace which lets you quickly access four types of
analysis of the results of your search: Graph, Analysis, Concordance, and Table, as
described in Chapter 11.
The Add pane icon buttons open pop-up menus which allow you to add other Bible
versions, Reference Tools, and your own User Notes in new panes parallel to the
Bible text (see below).
6-2
The Panes Bar
This bar repeats a set of buttons for each pane.
At the top left of the pane is the display text pop-up menu, which allows
you to set the text to be displayed in the pane. This pop-up menu
contains all the texts that you have added to Accordance, and that
belong to the same corpus as the search text. If the search text is a Bible
text, all Bible texts appear in this menu, but if, for example, the search
text is a Qumran text, only the Qumran versions can be selected as display texts.
Changing a display text does not change the results of the search; it only changes
the version in which the results are shown.
A text tip with the full name of the module appears if the cursor lingers over any
text or tool pop-up menu.
Note: If a text does not appear in this pop-up menu, you need to make it available
to Accordance by selecting Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option ⌘-A), and
clicking the Add Module button.
The font size buttons let you quickly increase or decrease all the current font
display sizes in the pane below. Clicking on the large A or pressing ⌘-=
(plus) increases the font size of all text in the pane, with special font styles
such as verse references increased in proportion to the main text. Clicking on the
small A or pressing ⌘-- (minus) decreases the font sizes. Pressing option while
clicking this button changes the font size of all the panes.
The position button on some panes switches the pane between a second row below
the Bible text to a vertical pane parallel to the texts. Pressing option while clicking
this button places the pane to the left of the panes in the other row.
The Bottom Bar
This bar contains buttons for navigating through the text, as described later in this chapter.
The Text
The results of a search appear in the text pane in its current text version.
Right-click or control-click in the text pane opens a contextual menu with options for the text
display and for a variety of functions that are available for your text selection.
Style of Hits
If the version in the text pane is the same as the search text, the words which match the search
criteria (the “hits”) are highlighted with a different color and/or style. The style of the highlight
is selected in the text pane display settings described later in this chapter.
Note: No hits are shown if the pane displays a text other than the search text, or when
the text is searched by verse rather than by word.
Searching the Bible
6-3
6
Viewing the Text
Text Styles
Some texts have certain
styles included when they are
formatted for Accordance.
These styles include italics for
words implied but not found in
the original text, SMALL CAPS for
the Divine Name (LORD), and in
some texts, for quotations of
the Old Testament in the New,
and poetry designated by short
indented lines with a further
indent when the text wraps
around.
Note: Texts with poetic styling
will be closest in appearance to the printed text if you select the Continuous
verse display, and Omit Book and Chapter reference display in the Text
settings dialog box described later in this chapter.
Note: SMALL
CAPS
styled text is not as clearly legible at the smaller point sizes.
Certain versions of the New Testament show the words attributed to Christ in red letters. You
can hide the red letter text as shown below.
Certain Bibles include the markers for the margin notes. These markers are for reference
only — you cannot search for them nor link directly to the note. Pressing the option key while
copying, copies the text without the superscript markers.
Navigating through the Text
The Scroll Bar
You can move through the search results by using the scroll bar to the right of the pane.
Clicking on the up or down arrow scrolls the text one line in the corresponding
direction.
Clicking on the scroll bar above or below the scroll bar slider, or pressing the page up
and page down keys, moves the text one “page” in the respective direction.
Pressing the home and end keys on the extended keyboard scrolls the window to the
top or bottom respectively.
You can also drag the slider to a new location on the scroll bar. As you move the slider,
the text scrolls rapidly to the new position.
The mouse scroll wheel also scrolls the part of the window under the cursor.
6-4
The Reference Box
The reference box at the lower right enables you to go directly to any verse in the search
results. It displays the reference of the verse that is currently at the top of the text pane.
To edit a reference, press tab twice to select the text in the reference box, and type or
paste the new reference.
When you click the Go To button (or press return), the verse closest to the reference
appears at the top of the text pane.
The Text Access Buttons
Use the text access buttons to move quickly and easily through the text pane.
Clicking one of the up or down triangle buttons once moves you to the previous or
next verse, chapter, or book, respectively.
If you hold the mouse down on a text access button, the search results scroll
continuously until you release the mouse.
An additional pair of buttons, the Mark buttons, appear only when verses have
bookmarks, and jump the text to the next mark.
Pressing the shift key while clicking a button moves you through 10 verses, chapters,
books, or marks at a time.
Prior and Next buttons appear after you click a Mark button or a hyperlink in a tool
pane, to enable you to retrace your steps.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Pressing command, option-command, or control-option-command with the up and down
keys on the keyboard, performs the same actions as the verse, chapter, and book
access buttons.
Control-command with the up and down arrows moves to the next mark, and with the
left and right arrows moves to the prior or next step.
Pressing shift with these arrow key combinations advances the text 10 times.
Auto Scrolling
You can allow a window with a single pane to scroll slowly automatically. Commandclicking on the up or down scroll bar arrows starts the auto-scrolling, and any
mouse click stops it.
Select the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or
⌘-,) to enable and set the speed of the scrolling.
Searching the Bible
6-5
6
Viewing the Text
Selecting and Marking Verses
Selecting
A verse is selected whenever the mouse is clicked on the text, or text is selected anywhere
within the verse. A selection may include more than one adjacent verse in a pane. After a verse
is selected, its reference is used to access some features in the Resource palette (or Amplify
menu), and also to add to a reference list in the Selection menu. (See Chapter 12-Amplify
Features and Chapter 18-Reference Lists.)
Bookmarks
Bookmarks are temporary marks that you can easily add to
verses.
When the Context pop-up menu is set to All, a
bookmark appears on each hit verse.
Selecting Mark Selection (Selection menu or ⌘-7) adds
a blue bookmark to a selected verse or verses.
Bookmarks appear in the selected pane only until a new
search is performed. They allow you advance the text
from one marked verse to another, and to add the
marked verses to a reference list.
Holding down the option key while the cursor is over a text pane, converts the cursor
symbol to a bookmark. Clicking the bookmark cursor on any part of a verse also
marks the verse. If the
verse is already marked,
clicking the bookmark
cursor on the verse will
remove the bookmark.
The first time you select
Mark Selection you will
get a reminder of the
alternative way to add
bookmarks.
The bookmarks appear in the right margin of the text pane. New Mark access buttons
appear in the bottom of the window to enable you to move to the next marked
verse, in a manner similar to the other text access buttons. Pressing controlcommand with the up and down keys also moves to the next mark. Prior and Next
buttons enable you to retrace your steps after clicking a Mark button.
Like selected verses, marked verses can be added to a reference list by selecting a list
from the Add Marked Verses To submenu (Selection menu). (See Chapter 18Reference Lists.)
Hint: Adding marked or selected verses to a Reference List window is a convenient
way to print non-contiguous verses from a Search window.
Selecting Remove All Marks (Selection menu or option-⌘-7) clears all bookmarks.
6-6
Color Highlighting
Color Highlighting lets you mark the
background of the text in a variety
of colors and line patterns. Unlike
bookmarks, the highlighting is saved and
can be seen in any window with the same
text. (See Chapter 17-Color Highlighting.)
User Notes
A red dot in the same margin marks each
verse in the text pane which has a note
attached to it in a user notes file. The dot
is visible over a bookmark added to the
same verse.
Double-clicking on the dot opens all the
user notes for that verse. (See Chapter 19User Notes.)
Viewing Texts and Tools in Parallel
You can view your search results in multiple versions at the same time
by opening new text panes in the Search window.
Adding Panes
To open a new text pane, select the version from the Add pane: Text pop-up menu in
the top bar of the text pane. The menu displays the same texts as the display text
pop-up menu described above.
A single click on the icon adds the text that was last selected, or the first text.
A new text pane appears in the Search window showing all the verses found by the
search (provided that those verses occur in the new version).
The top of each text pane displays the same verse in the search results.
You can open as many text panes as will fit in your window. (There is a minimum
width for a pane.) If no more panes can be opened in the first row, the next pane
starts a second row below the first.
Scrolling
Movement of the text panes is normally synchronized. The text of the top verse in
every other pane in the Search window matches the verse at the top of the selected
pane. Differences in verse numbering are accounted for as described later in this
chapter.
Searching the Bible
6-7
6
Viewing the Text
When you use the up or down arrow on the scroll bar, the selected pane moves one
line at a time. The other panes do not move until the selected pane has a different
verse at the top. When you use the scroll box or reference box to move through
the text, all the panes move together.
Pressing the control key or the right mouse button while scrolling, scrolls only the
selected pane, so you can compare different passages. The panes are synchronized
again if you release the control key or right mouse button and scroll to another
verse, or if you click any access button.
Features of Panes
Whenever you are viewing more than one pane, only one of the panes is “selected” or
active. The selected pane has a blue outline inside the pane border. To select a
pane, click the mouse anywhere within the pane, or press shift-tab to select the
next pane.
A selected pane
is indicated by a
solid blue frame
around the pane.
Bookmarks and user note marks always appear in the selected pane, and will move
across if another pane is selected. The “hit” words are highlighted only in panes
displaying the same text as the search text.
The width of a pane can be changed at any time. When you move the mouse over the
dotted line that divides the panes, the cursor changes into a two-headed arrow. You
can then drag the divider to a new position.
Hint: Changing the width of a pane is useful for lining up the verses between texts
that are viewed in different fonts or have significantly different translations.
Each pane has its own display text pop-up menu and font size buttons. Pressing the
option key while clicking a font size button increases or decreases the font size
in all the panes. When there are multiple panes a close button appears to the
left of each display text pop-up menu. Changing the search text to another corpus
changes all the text panes as well (but not any User Notes or Reference tools).
The pane position button appears on a text pane when it is added to the lower row
for lack of space. It disappears once the pane is switched to the top row.
6-8
To close a text pane (when there is more than one in the window), click the close
button, or drag the divider to near the window edge or the edge of the adjacent
pane. You can also select the pane you wish to close by clicking anywhere within
its boundary, then select Close Pane (File menu or ⌘-Y).
Other Panes
The Reference Tool and My Notes buttons beside the Add pane: Text button
add special panes to view either Reference tools such as the margin notes or
commentaries, or your own commentary (User Notes).
These panes are first added in a horizontal pane at the bottom of the window, but
can be toggled between the rows by clicking the pane position button. Pressing
the option key while clicking the button switches the pane to left of the other row
(instead of the right). Pressing option while adding a pane adds it directly to the
upper row.
Each pane displays the entire tool rather than the entries for selected verses, but all
the panes scroll together so that the verses at the top of the panes are aligned as
closely as possible.
The text of the tools shown in these panes is the same as in the specialized windows
for these tools, and allows amplifying and hypertexting. However, you cannot
search the tools inside the Search window.
Clicking internal links in a tool pane jumps the entire window to the new position.
Prior and Next buttons appear in the bottom bar to allow you to return to the
original position.
The Reference Tool pane is described in detail in Chapter 14-Tools. See also Chapter 19-User
Notes.
Changing the Display in a Text Pane
The Text Settings dialog box allows you to customize how text is displayed in each text pane.
You can also set a separate default display format for each available text, and choose different
colors for the different elements of each text. The current settings for the display of the text
also apply when the text is printed. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
To format the text display, select the pane of the text you wish to format by clicking
anywhere in the pane. A blue outline appears just inside the dotted dividing line
for the current pane. Select Set Text Pane Display… (Display menu or ⌘-T). This
brings up the Text Settings dialog box.
The title of the Text Settings dialog box includes the name of the text or version in the
selected pane. Clicking the OK button in the dialog box applies these settings only
to the selected pane. To make these the default settings for all subsequent panes
created for this text, click the Use as Default button.
Searching the Bible
6-9
6
Viewing the Text
format settings
for text of verses
format settings
for references
format settings
for search hits
Formatting the Text
The upper left portion of the dialog box labeled Contents allows you to set the format for the
display of the text of the verses themselves.
The Show as Pop-up Menu
The Show as: pop-up menu sets the layout of the verses in
the pane. An example of each layout is shown beside the
description.
The Paragraphs option shows the text of contiguous
verses as a continuous stream without moving to the
next line after each verse. If the text supports paragraph
markings, the display text starts a new line only when a new
paragraph begins. If the text does not support paragraphs,
the display text starts a new line at the start of each chapter.
This option displays text which has been formatted as poetry
so that it resembles the printed text as closely as possible.
Note: If the verses are not contiguous, each verse begins on a
new line. This makes it easy to identify the beginning of a new section of
the search results.
In Paragraphs display, only the verse numbers are shown within a
paragraph. This overrides the current settings for the reference display
location (described below).
Paragraph markers are suppressed in this option.
6-10
The Paragraphs with space option is the same as the
Paragraph option except that there is a blank line before
each new section begins. This option helps to differentiate
between non-adjacent verses in the search result, as well as
between paragraphs and chapters.
The Separate verses option causes the displayed text to begin
a new line at the start of each verse.
The Separate with space option is the same as the Separate
option except that it displays a blank line between each verse
in the text.
The References only option displays only the references of
verses that meet the search criteria.
These options are also available in the Show Text as submenu of the Display menu (see
below).
The Font
You can choose from any Font available on your system, along with a range of
sizes. If the selected text requires a non-Roman Accordance font (such as
Greek or Hebrew), the font is dimmed and cannot be changed.
Note: In Classic systems, Accordance fonts at sizes without bitmaps (especially
11, 16, 21 and 30) may appear very ragged.
The Color: pop-up menu lets you choose the color of the main text in the pane.
The Checkboxes
These options are dimmed if they do not apply to this text.
Hide verse highlighting and Hide word highlighting let you turn on or off
the background color highlighting that you can add to the text as described
in Chapter 17.
Hide red letter turns off the red letter color used in some Bibles for the words
attributed to Christ.
Suppress poetry removes the short lines and indents that indicate poetic
lines, and is useful for display in narrow panes.
Hide superscripts displays the text without the superscripted numbers and
letters which refer to the footnotes.
Hide spaces displays Greek or Hebrew texts without spaces to approximate the
appearance of early manuscripts.
Searching the Bible
6-11
6
Viewing the Text
The Style of the “Hits”
The Search Highlighting section in the lower left of the Text
Settings dialog box contains the color and style pop-up menus.
The Color pop-up menu controls the color display of the “hit”
words in the text.
Hint: You can use the White color to hide the “hits” for
teaching or examination purposes.
The Style pop-up menu lets you choose the style of these
same “hit” words. The word “Sample” displays the currently selected styles. Each
style selected in the menu shows a check mark. To remove a style, select it again
from the menu, or select Plain Text to remove all styles.
The Format of the References
The upper right portion of the Text display dialog box labeled
References allows you to format the verse references.
The Show as Pop-up Menu
The Format pop-up menu allows you to specify where the
references appear in relation to the verses, and which parts, if any,
of the reference are shown.
Above Verse positions the reference on a line by itself. The text
of the verse begins on the line after the verse reference.
Before Verse positions the reference at the beginning of the
first line of the verse text. This is the Accordance default.
After Verse positions the reference at the end of the last line of
the text of the verse.
Omit Entire Reference option the text of the verses without
references.
Omit Book and Chapter displays only the verse number. The
book name and the chapter number appear only on the first
verse of each book and chapter respectively.
Omit Book Name Only displays only the chapter and verse
numbers except at the start of each book.
The Checkboxes
The four checkboxes let you vary the display of the
references:
Abbreviate book name allows you to specify whether
you want to display the full book name or an
abbreviation of the book name.
Include text abbreviation includes an abbreviation of
the name of the text in this pane as a part of each
reference, i.e. Gen. 1:1 (KJV).
6-12
Use decimal (.) verse divider separates the chapter and verse with a period (.)
instead of a colon (:).
Note: An option in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) uses European verse notation in all
windows. It uses a comma (,) in place of a colon (:) to divide chapter and
verse, and a period (.) in place of a comma to separate a list of references.
Use English book names appears for some foreign language texts. If
unchecked, the book names appear in the language of the text.
The Font
You can use the Font, Color, and Size pop-up menus to select from
any font available on your system along with a range of font sizes
and colors.
The Style pop-up menu lets you select from the standard styles. The
word “Sample” displays the currently selected styles.
At the bottom of the menu is a Superscript option. This option
is effective only when one of the Continuous verse display
options is selected as described in the previous section.
When both options are selected, verse references within
a paragraph are displayed as a superscript number in the
currently selected reference style
Applying the Changes
Clicking the OK button in the Text Settings dialog box applies these settings to the selected
text pane in the Search window.
To save your settings as the
default for each subsequent
display of that text version,
click the Use as Default
button on the bottom left. After
clicking on this button you are
asked to verify that you want
to save these settings as your
default. Click the Save button
in the verify dialog box to
confirm that all subsequent displays of this text will use these settings.
To set the default display for ALL Bible texts at once select Text Display from the list in
the Preferences dialog box (Preferences or Edit menu or ⌘-,). (See Appendix A-Setting
Preferences.)
Searching the Bible
6-13
6
Viewing the Text
Display Menu Options
The verse display of the front pane
can be quickly changed by choosing
items in the Display menu.
The Show Text as submenu
offers the same options as
the Show as pop-up menu
in the Text Settings dialog
box. The current selection is
indicated by a check mark.
Hide Verse References
displays the text without the references,
and cannot be selected together with
References only.
Selecting List All Book Names with a
Search window in front, opens a window
displaying English Bible book names and
standard abbreviations in order for the
selected text, and the alternate names for a
text in another language.
Comparing Texts
Checking the Compare Texts
checkbox in the More Options
section of the Search window
(or on a Text or Reference
window), highlights the
differences between the first
two texts of each language in
the panes.
Three kinds of highlighting are
used:
different words (strikethrough)
inserted words (heavy
underline)
deleted words (heavy
vertical line).
6-14
The highlighting appears in the first pair of panes with the same character set (Latin, Greek, or
Hebrew), the first pair of panes with another character set, and any panes that display the same
text as one of the highlighted panes. For example, if the panes display NRSV, KJV, GNT-T, NJB,
GNT-TR, and KJV, all but the NJB will be highlighted, the NRSV will be compared with the KJV,
and the GNT-T with the GNT-TR.
The highlighting is printed if it is displayed when the text panes are printed.
The following options can be set in the Compare Text page of the Preferences dialog
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,):
•
Comparison of words, lemmas or tags (ignored in untagged texts)
•
Case sensitivity (for upper case and final forms)
•
Ignoring punctuation
•
Ignoring accents and other diacritical marks
•
Colors for each kind of highlighting.
Note: When the compare is set to lemmas or tags rather than
words, an (L) or (T) appears beside an active Compare
Texts checkbox.
Note: Punctuation differences include tabs and return characters, but blanks and
superscripts are always ignored. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences and
Grammatical Supplement Chapter G5.)
Selecting List Text Differences (Display
menu) creates a report of the text
differences in the first two columns that
use the same character set but different
texts.
It can also be opened from the
contextual menu in the surround of
the search entry section.
This report can be printed or saved
as text with tabs separating the
columns.
The report depends on the same
Preferences as the Compare Text
feature described above. It is
simply another way of showing and
exporting the differences.
The report is not updated when the text changes in the Search window.
Searching the Bible
6-15
6
Viewing the Text
Verse Matching and Discrepancies
Between different Biblical texts there are often discrepancies in the numbering and order of
verses. Accordance always attempts to match the content of verses in parallel panes rather
than the actual verse reference. For instance, Psalm titles in Hebrew, though usually a single
separate verse, are sometimes merged with the first verse, and sometimes take up an extra
verse. This results in a shift of the verse numbers relative to most English translations. (In
Accordance, unnumbered Psalm titles are designated verse 0.) The Septuagint (LXX) has many
instances of reordering of verses, and so do translations such as the Latin Vulgate and New
American Bible (NAB). The order of books in the Bible texts also varies between versions.
Accordance matches the order of the books and verses in the text panes to that of the current
search text shown in the search text pop-up menu in the upper left of the window. In each text
pane the corresponding verses are shown with the correct reference for that display text.
Missing Verses
Under some
circumstances a
verse may be found
in the search text
when there is no
corresponding
verse in one of
the display texts.
In this case, two
dashes (--) appear
in the display
text to signify the
verse that has no
equivalent in this
version.
In the above example, Psalm 51 is displayed in the Jewish Publication Society (JPS) text
which follows the order of the Hebrew Bible. The title takes up two verses so that
verse 1 in the NAS95S matches verse 3 in the JPS. The title in verse 0 (KJV) matches
verse 1-2 JPS. It has been assigned to verse 2 (JPS) so that verse 1 (JPS) is missing in
the NAS95S as indicated by the two dashes.
Hint: When a verse is “missing” from a display text, you can use the Context button in
the Resource palette to view the surrounding verses. (See Chapter 13-Amplifying
your Selection.)
Hint: When a verse is “missing” from the search text (such as 2 Cor 13:13 in the GNT), it
will not display in parallel panes even when the entire chapter is displayed. To see
the verse, change the search text to the another version that includes the verse,
and click OK.
6-16
Verses Out of Order
When there is a discrepancy in verse order or numbering between different versions
of the text, Accordance matches the order and the text of the verses in the other
display versions to the verses in the search text. In the example below, the verses
of 1 Kings 4 and 5 have been both renumbered and reordered in the NAB as
compared to the KJVS.
In the following example the NAB is the search text. The KJVS display is reordered to
match the NAB. Note that the NAB has renumbered the end of 1 Kings 4 and the
beginning of chapter 5, so that 1 Kings 4:27 (KJVS) corresponds to 1 Kings 5:7
(NAB). In addition, the NAB places 1 Kings 4:20 and 5:1 (NAB) after 5:8. If the KJVS
were the search text, the NAB display would be reordered to match the KJVS.
Searching the Bible
6-17
6
Viewing the Text
Selecting and Copying Text
The text in a text pane can be selected much like the text in a standard word processor. The
text cannot be changed, but you can select it for copying or printing. Copying the selection
places it on the clipboard and makes it available for pasting at an appropriate place in
Accordance or another program. The selected text is highlighted (surrounded by a color).
Selecting Text
In Accordance you can select text in the standard Macintosh ways:
•
Click and hold the mouse button down at either end of the text you wish to select,
and drag it across the rest of the text.
•
Click the mouse at the starting point of the text you wish to select. The blinking
insertion point appears at that location. Move the mouse to the end of the text you
wish to select. While holding down the shift key, click the mouse.
•
Double-click anywhere on the word to select a single word without its punctuation.
•
Double-click and drag to select word by word.
•
Use the arrow keys in combination with the shift and option keys to select text
word by word or line by line.
•
Click the mouse anywhere in the text and choose Select All (Edit menu or ⌘-A)
to select all the text in the window, pane, or box where the cursor is blinking. This
selects all the text whether or not it is currently visible.
After you have selected the text, you can use the copy options below, or:
•
Open the contextual menu with a right or control-click and select the most
common functions. (See Chapter 24-Other Features.)
•
Amplify to any of the features of the Resource palette. (See Chapter 12-Amplfy
Features.)
•
Print it by choosing Print Selection… (File menu). (See Chapter 25-Printing and
Saving.)
•
Send it to OS X Services, such as Mail, Stickies, certain word processors, Apple’s
Summarize service, etc.
Copying Text
To copy your selection, choose Copy (Edit menu or ⌘-C).
This copies the text to the clipboard. Up to 500 verses
can be selected for copying.
Copied text can be pasted either in Accordance or into
another program. Click the mouse to place the blinking
insertion point where you want to place the copied text.
Now choose Paste (Edit menu or ⌘-V).
The pasted text appears, and the blinking insertion point is
moved to the end of the pasted text. You can also replace
a portion of text by selecting it and choosing Paste. The
selected text is replaced by the previously copied text.
6-18
Note: In Accordance you can paste text only into places where you can enter text.
Thus, while you can paste text into the argument entry box, certain other text
boxes, or an Edit window, you cannot paste text into the contents of a text pane.
Text copied to the clipboard retains its font and style information. When you paste
into another program which supports this feature, the fonts and styles used,
and the highlighting of “hits” are preserved. Not all word processors accept this
information from the clipboard. You can also retain the font and style information
by saving the contents of a pane as an RTF text file and importing it into your word
processor. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
Note: Text in SMALL CAPS is converted to ALL CAPS for export. The Superscript/
Subscript styles are not preserved during copying because these styles are not
supported in the clipboard.
Pasting a List
If you copy and paste a list of words or verse references into the argument entry box,
Accordance replaces the carriage returns with commas or semicolons, depending on the
current Search for setting. This makes it easier to convert the list into search criteria.
Copy As Options
The Copy As submenu (Edit menu) offers various special options
for copying selections:
No Superscript (or option-⌘-C) copies the selected text
without any superscript characters.
Citation (or control-⌘-C) copies the selected text without
according to the format set in the Citation page of the
Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or
⌘-,). (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.)
References (or option-⌘-R) lets you copy to the clipboard only verse references from
the front window. You can then paste the references into the argument entry box of
any window, or into another document.
The references will be formatted according to Accordance conventions, so that
they can be used immediately to find the verses.
If there is no selection in the text pane, and the cursor is not flashing in the
window, the references for all the verses currently in the window are copied.
If text is selected in the text pane, only the references of the selected verses are
copied.
Pressing the shift key while selecting Copy Citation or Copy References copies
references with the full book names (i.e. Genesis rather than Gen.).
Transliteration (or option-⌘-T) copies and converts the selected text to Rosetta
transliteration font.
Searching the Bible
6-19
6
Viewing the Text
Style Only and Paste Style (or ⌘-[ or ]) let you copy the font, size, style, and color of
any selected text, and paste these characteristics onto a new selection in certain
panes such as the Edit window for User Notes or Tools. This feature is especially
helpful when you repeatedly need to set more than one characteristic, such as the
font and size, or two styles together.
Drag and Drop
Accordance supports the Macintosh drag and
drop feature. This feature requires System 7.5
or above.
When you select text, the cursor changes
to a white arrow and a square. You can now drag the selection to anywhere in the
window, or to another window.
Holding the option key down while you drag copies the selection to a new location
within the same text box. A plus sign on the cursor indicates that it will make a copy.
If you attempt to drag the selection to a part of the window which cannot accept it,
the cursor changes to a large X. If you drag the selection to a window which does
accept it, the selection appears to return to its original location when you release
the mouse button.
You can also simply drag your selection and drop it in your word processor document.
Many word processors support this feature.
If you drag and drop your selection onto a Finder window or the desktop, a text
clipping is created. It forms a stand-alone file which can be opened in the Finder,
and copied to the clipboard at any time. Some programs that support drag and
drop also allow you to drag the text clipping and drop it into a document.
You can suppress the drag and drop feature in the General page of the Preferences
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,).
Greek and Hebrew Options
When Greek or Hebrew text is exported from Accordance, whether by copying, dragging, or
saving as text, it is affected by the current options in the Preferences dialog box. Choosing
Greek & Hebrew after selecting Preferences (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) gives you
many options including converting the text to English characters or to Unicode. (See Chapter
25-Printing and Saving.)
6-20
Doing Searches
7
Chapter Contents:
Using the Search Entry Box ............................. 7-2
The Search Text Pop-up Menu ......................... 7-5
Displaying a Text by Reference....................... 7-6
Defining Search Arguments............................. 7-7
Expressions in Accordance.............................. 7-8
Entering Words and Phrases............................ 7-8
Setting the Search Field................................. 7-10
Search Ranges................................................ 7-10
7
Doing Searches
The Search Entry Section
The search entry section is the place where you tell Accordance what you want it to find in a
Bible text. The search entry section consists of the argument entry box in which you enter the
search itself, and various pop-up menus and buttons which affect the search and its display.
These items were introduced in Chapter 4, and are now described in detail.
search text pop-up menu
tie symbol
Search for radio buttons
recycle
symbol
argument
entry box
search field
pop-up menu
search range
pop-up menu
Compare Texts
checkbox
Add context
pop-up menu
History pop-up menu
Entering a Search
The basic steps for entering a search argument are:
1. Select the text to be searched in the Search text pop-up menu.
2. Choose between Search for Words or Verses.
3. Enter the search criteria in the argument entry box.
4. Set any applicable options.
5. Click OK.
The Right-click or control-click contextual menus give you quick access to the most important
options inside the argument entry box, and around it (More Options).
The Argument Entry Box
The actual criteria for your search (the search argument) are entered into the argument entry
box. A wide array of commands and options is available to help you define the precise nature
of your search. These can all be entered into the entry box using menus and dialog boxes. You
can also simply type a word or phrase in the box, and click OK to perform the search. The
entry of search arguments is described in detail later in this chapter.
Using the Tab Key
Pressing the tab key while the Search window is the front window selects the entire
contents of the argument entry box.
Pressing the tab key again selects the contents of the reference box in the lower right
corner of the window.
Subsequent tab actions toggle the selection between these two boxes.
7-2
Language of the Argument Entry Box
All entries in the argument entry box appear in the system font except when the search text is
a non-Roman language such as Greek or Hebrew. In these cases Accordance uses the system
font only for commands and verse references. When you enter your search criteria, Accordance
automatically switches between fonts and languages as needed.
Note: In OS 8 and 9 you have a choice of system font settings.
Using the OK Button
Clicking the OK button, or pressing return or enter, performs the search and updates the
search results. If the OK button in the entry box is dimmed, the search argument has not
changed since the last time the search was performed. If the button is not dimmed, the search
results below do not match the criteria above.
The Search for Radio Buttons
Above the argument entry box there are two radio buttons labeled Search for Words…Verses
which set the search mode.
Clicking these buttons or their labels, or using the keyboard shortcut commandsemicolon, (⌘-;) toggles or switches between the two kinds of searches, and selects
the contents of the entry box.
When Verses is selected (option-⌘-V) you can enter the book, chapter, or verse
reference for the text you wish to view.
Selecting Words (option-⌘-W) enables you to enter words, phrases and other more
complex criteria for searching the text.
The search argument is automatically selected when you toggle the radio buttons so
that you can quickly enter a new argument
The History Pop-up Menu
The small double arrow labeled History in the top right corner of the
Search window (and on all other windows that have an argument entry
box), saves the last search arguments for Verses and Words searches,
as well as the setting of the radio buttons, and lets you recall them by
selecting one from the menu.
The last search argument appears in the menu after the search is completed.
Selecting Clear Menu removes the stored items from the list.
Up to 50 arguments can be recalled from the menu. Earlier arguments are dropped if
this limit is exceeded.
The length of the recalled argument is limited to 255 characters.
Greek and Hebrew words appear in the system font, but will convert back to the
original font when searching a Greek or Hebrew text.
The searches on the menu are recalled if the window is saved as a file and reopened
(this applies also to Tools windows).
Searching the Bible
7-3
7
Doing Searches
The Tie and Recycle Symbols
The brown tie symbol and the green recycle symbol appear above the History
pop-up menu when appropriate. They do not appear in a new Search window
until one of these options is selected in the Window menu.
The tie symbol indicates that the scrolling of this window is tied to the scrolling of
another window.
The recycle symbol indicates that the window will be reused for repeated Amplify
functions. Clicking on it turns it on and off.
(See Chapter 12-Amplify Features, and Chapter 23-Working with Windows.)
Resizing the Entry Section
You can resize the search entry section by moving the section divider that
separates it from the text window panes. When the cursor is over the line, it
changes to a two-headed arrow, allowing you to drag the line up or down to a new location.
The More Options Section
The More options triangle opens a middle section with the Field, Range, and Context pop-up
menus, and the Compare Texts checkbox.
The prompt explains the purpose of the first two pop-up menus which are described in detail
later in this chapter. If a range other than [All text] is selected, and the section is closed, the
range name appears beside More options as a reminder. Similarly, brackets appear beside More
options if one of the brackets options is selected in the Field pop-up menu.
The field and range pop-up menus are dimmed in a Verses search, as they do not apply. These
pop-up menu settings are retained in memory and are restored when you toggle back to the
Words search. These pop-up menus are described in detail later in this chapter.
The Compare Texts feature is covered in Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.
The Add Context Pop-up Menu
The pop-up menu labeled Add context: lets you add verses around the “hit”
verses in your search results. The advantage of this feature is that, unlike the
Context feature, the hit words in the results remain highlighted, yet the verses
can be read in context.
Selecting one of the numbers from the menu displays the specified number of
verses before and after each hit verse.
Choosing None displays only the hit verses. Selecting All displays the entire
text with a bookmark beside each hit verse in addition to the highlighted hits. The
Mark buttons then appear to allow you to jump to the next or prior hit verses.
7-4
You can set the number of context verses at any time. If you have not yet performed
the current search, the effect of setting the context will only be seen when you
click OK or press return or enter.
If you reset the context after doing a search, Accordance performs the search again,
updates the window to display the desired number of verses, and returns to the
verse you were viewing.
The Search Text Pop-up Menu
The search text pop-up menu shows the current search text and allows
you to select from any text currently available to Accordance. The
setting of this menu determines the version of text that is searched. The
criteria and arguments that you provide in the argument entry box are matched against the
contents of this text. The options available to you in Accordance are tailored to the type of
text specified in the search text pop-up menu. Keyed Bible texts (like the KJVS or NIV-G/K) and
morphologically “tagged” Greek or Hebrew texts offer additional capabilities that do not apply
when searching plain texts.
A text tip with the full name of the module
appears if the cursor lingers over any text or
tool pop-up menu.
To change the search text, select a different text from the search text pop-up menu. If
the window is set to search for Verses, and there is an asterisk in the argument entry
box, the contents of the text panes will be updated to display the entire new text.
Otherwise, the OK button is undimmed and must be clicked to repeat the search for
the new text.
Pressing control 1 through 9 changes this pop-up menu to the corresponding (first
through ninth) text on the list. Pressing control + (=) or control up arrow changes to
the next text, and pressing control - or control down arrow changes to the prior text on
the list.
The search text does not need to be the same as the text displayed in the text panes
below it. However, the panes change automatically to display the new search text
if you change to a text not currently displayed in the text panes (and there are text
panes displaying the previous search text), or if you change to a different corpus such
as the Qumran instead of the Bible.
Select Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option-⌘-A) to set the arrangement of the
modules in this and all other pop-up menus of this type. See Chapter 5-Floating
Windows and Arrange Modules for more details on the Arrange Modules window.
Searching the Bible
7-5
7
Doing Searches
Displaying a Text by Reference
When Accordance is first opened, the Search window displays all the verses of the first text
available to Accordance. The window is set to search for Verses and the argument entry box
contains an asterisk (*) which signifies every verse in the text. Each time you open Accordance,
the entire default text will be displayed in the first Search window unless you set the default
search to Words. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.)
To display a specific portion of the text, set the search to Verses, press tab to select the
current entry, and enter the references in the argument entry box. Click OK to display the
requested text. Up to 32,000 characters can be used for the entry of references.
Finding a Single Book
To specify a single book, type the name or abbreviation of the English name of the
book. For example, entering gen displays only the book of Genesis.
Note: In Accordance, you only need to enter enough of a book name or a command to
make it unique.
Note: Do not enter a space in between a book number and its name. To find the first
book of Kings enter 1Ki or 1Kings. However, if it is the first reference in the
list the space is ignored, so 1 Kings, 2Ki is acceptable.
The Symbols Submenu
The Enter Symbol submenu
(Search menu or contextual
menu) displays a list of
the available symbols
with a brief description
of their function. The list
of symbols depends on
whether the window is
set to search for Words or
Verses.
Symbols which are dimmed
on the menu are not
appropriate for the current
setting of the window.
Selecting a symbol from this
submenu places it in the
argument entry box.
Of course, you can also enter
the symbol from the
keyboard.
7-6
Using Symbols
To specify a range of books, enter the first book name, a hyphen (-) or option hyphen
(–), and the last book name. For example, entering Genesis-Deuteronomy defines
a range that covers the first five books of the Bible. A hyphen can also be used to
describe a range of chapters or verses.
Chapter numbers follow the book name after a space. Use a colon (:) or a period (.)
between a chapter and a verse in a reference. For example, Gen 1:2 finds the
second verse of the first chapter of Genesis.
To specify multiple sections of a text, use a comma (,) between similar items in a
list, and a semicolon (;) to separate different items. For example, Gen 2:5-6, 9-10;
3-4 will find Genesis chapter 2 verses 5, 6, 9 and 10, and all of chapters 3 and 4.
Note: The European verse notation option in the Appearance page of the
Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) affects reference entry
as well as display. It uses a comma (,) to divide chapter and verse, and a period
(.) to separate a list of references.
Adding f or ff after a reference extends it to the end of the last unit. Thus Mal 2:4ff
includes all the verses to the end of chapter 2, Mal 2ff includes all the chapters
until the end of the book, and Mal f includes all the books to the end of the Bible.
If you paste or drag a list of references into the argument entry box, the carriage
returns are replaced by semicolons to create a valid entry.
(For a detailed discussion of valid names and symbols in Accordance, see Appendix C.).
Note: References which are entered out of order are displayed in the order in which they
are entered.
Note: A reference to a verse or chapter which is missing in the search text displays
the closest text to it. Therefore the entry Esther 0-99 displays the whole book
irrespective of the number of chapters in that version of the text.
Note: In English texts the reference verse 0 is used for Psalm titles. In some apocryphal
books such as Sirach, chapter 0 is used for the introduction to the book.
Defining Search Arguments
The search argument tells Accordance what to find in the search text. It is entered in the
argument entry box with the search set to find Words. Usually the argument is a simple word
or phrase typed directly into the box.
In addition, Accordance allows you to create very sophisticated arguments using symbols and
commands. The next chapter is devoted to the details of these search commands and symbols.
Up to 32,000 characters can be used for the entry of the search argument.
You can also define your searches graphically by dragging and dropping the parts of the
argument. These search arguments are described in detail in Chapter 10-Graphical Searches.
Searching the Bible
7-7
7
Doing Searches
Expressions in Accordance
Expressions are the basic building blocks that form search arguments in the argument entry
box. An expression in Accordance can be a word, phrase, Key number, a stand-alone tag
definition, or a group of expressions in parentheses.
One form of an expression is simply a word from the search text. A word expression can
also contain wild-card characters for one or more letters. For example, the expression
king* stands for all words beginning with the letters king, including kings and
kingdom.
A phrase is also a valid expression in Accordance. A phrase is a group of words
separated by spaces. The argument out of the ground and the argument king* of
Israel are both phrases.
In Accordance, a group of expressions that are enclosed in parentheses are treated
as a single expression. This means that they can be acted on by commands and be
combined as part of larger search criteria. For example, the argument (king* of Israel
<AND> David) is treated as a single expression.
Entering Words and Phrases
The simplest search is one that looks for an exact word or phrase. For example, you can search
for each occurrence of Aaron or Moses and Aaron.
Word Entry and Spell Checking
You can enter words by typing directly in the argument entry box, and also edit the entry. After
you click OK to begin the search, your entry is checked to verify that each word actually occurs
in the search text. If it does not, the Select Words dialog box appears and highlights a word
closest in spelling to the word you entered. You can then select the word you want to enter.
The Select Words Dialog Box
You can also enter words in the argument entry box by selecting Enter Words… (Search menu,
contextual menu or ⌘-J) so that the Select Words dialog box appears:
The Select Words dialog box contains an alphabetical list of every word that appears in
the current search text.
As in many similar dialog boxes in Accordance, the scroll bar, arrow keys, and scroll
wheel scroll the list of words in the usual manner.
To see the words from another available text, use the Text: pop-up menu to choose
a new text. Choosing a new text in this dialog box does not change the current
search text setting in the Search window.
Because texts offer so many words to choose from, the Go to: box offers an efficient
way to move through the list. Typing in this box scrolls the list to the place where
the typed word appears in the alphabetical listing. For example, typing pow in the
Go to box scrolls the list to powder.
7-8
To select a single word, doubleclick on it in the scrolling list, or
click once to select it and click
OK. This closes the dialog box
and places the selected word in
the argument entry box (at the
insertion point).
If you select multiple words,
they are placed in parentheses
and treated as alternate search
criteria. This means that a search
field meets the criteria if it
contains any of these words.
To select more than one word
from the list, click once on each
word that you want to select.
As you click on them, the words
accumulate in the Words to
enter box on the bottom right
of the dialog box where you can
edit them if necessary. You can
also shift-click to select up to 20 contiguous words.
If you use the Go to box to locate the words, it clears after each word choice so it is
ready for the next entry.
If the Use exact word checkbox is checked, an equal sign (=) is placed before
each word in the entry box. This constrains the search to the exact form you have
selected, as described in the next chapter. The Select Words dialog box recalls the
state of this checkbox when you close and re-open it, for morphologically tagged
texts and for all other texts.
After you select all the words you want, double-click on the last word
you want or click OK to place the selected words in the argument
entry box as a comma-separated list of words in parentheses. A
multiple-word selection might look like this: (power, powerful,
powers). This argument is equivalent to entering power <OR> powerful <OR>
powers, but in parentheses it can be combined with other words in a phrase, or
with search commands.
Phrases and Complex Arguments
If you want your search argument to be a phrase, type or copy the phrase into the entry box.
Complex search arguments can be built using wildcards and other symbols as well as a variety
of commands, and these are described in Chapter 8.
Searching the Bible
7-9
7
Doing Searches
Setting the Search Field
The search field pop-up menu labeled Search within every
in the More options section displays the current context or
field for the search. This sets the “granularity” of searches that
involve relationships between words and phrases. The entire
search criteria must be met within the unit of text selected in
the search field pop-up menu. For example, if you enter Adam
<AND> Eve with the search field set to Clause, then both
words must occur in the same clause for the verse to be “found.”
The settings for the search field are Verse, Chapter, Clause,
Sentence, Paragraph, and Book. A search field of Book slows
your searches and is rarely needed.
Note: If the search field is set to Clause, Sentence, or Paragraph, the entire sentence
containing a “hit” is displayed. Because sentences often cross verse boundaries,
verses that do not contain hits are often included in the display.
Texts with paragraph information use the ¶ symbol to indicate the beginning of a paragraph. If
a search text does not have paragraph data, the Paragraph item is dimmed (not selectable). If
a text has no punctuation, such as the Hebrew Bible (BHS-W4), the Clause and Sentence items
are also dimmed.
(See Appendix C-Names and Symbols for details of the punctuation symbols which define clauses
and sentences.)
The options below the line Ignore Words Inside Brackets and Search Words Inside
Brackets can be selected when the field is set to Verse. These options limit the search
to either words outside the brackets or those inside. Brackets are usually used to mark
editorial additions. This feature is particularly useful in the research texts such as Qumran or
Inscriptions, the Hebrew Bible, and the Amplified version. When one
of these options is selected, either closed or open brackets appear
beside the More options label as a reminder.
Search Ranges
When the Search window is set to search for Words, the search range lets
you limit your search to specific books, chapters or verses. For example,
you may want to search only the book of Psalms, or create a range of all
the books of poetry, and search them together.
The search range pop-up menu labeled of in the More options section
shows the current search range and allows you to select a previously
defined range or define a new search range. You can save any number of
ranges. The default value for the search range is [All text], which tells
Accordance to search the entire search text. Selecting a previously defined
range from the menu limits subsequent searches to the specified range.
7-10
The Define Ranges Dialog Box
The Define Ranges dialog box lets you define a new range, modify or delete an existing range,
and reorder the names on the list. You can open this dialog box by selecting Define Range…
from either the search range pop-up menu or the Search menu (or ⌘-R, or the contextual
menu).
If you have not defined any ranges, a basic set is
provided for you.
The first or the currently selected range is
highlighted in the list, and its name and
definition appear in the text boxes.
To define a new search range, click New, and
enter a name for the range into the Name box
in place of [new range name]. You can enter
any name up to 31 characters, however, it
should describe the new search range.
If a name on the list is selected, the new name is
added below it, otherwise it is added at the
bottom of the list.
Next enter the biblical references which describe
your new search range into the Definition
box. Pressing tab will highlight [new range
definition] and allow you to replace it with
your own definition. This can be a single
book or a series of references. The range need
not consist of adjacent verses. Up to 510
characters may be used in a definition.
In general, the format used for defining a range is the same as that used to display a
text by reference, as described above. You can specify chapter and verse references
if you wish, and use a hyphen to define a series of books, chapters, or verses.
However, the range Judges-Ruth will include only those two books in most English
Bibles but nearly the entire Hebrew Bible. To avoid such anomalies you can specify
each book rather than a range.
Once you have completed your definition, click the Verify button to add your new
range to the search range list. Clicking on any other button, except Delete, or
clicking on another name in the list, also validates the definition.
Accordance checks the appropriateness of the definition for the current search text,
both the references and the book order of ranges. If you enter Ruth-1Sam, the
range will be accepted for English Bibles but not for the Hebrew Bible where Ruth
is found towards the end.
The text pop-up menu labeled Use book order in shows the current search text. You
can select another text to allow validation of your range. Ranges can be added for
texts from a non-Biblical corpus such as Qumran.
You can modify any range in the list by clicking on it and editing its name or
definition.
Searching the Bible
7-11
7
Doing Searches
You can add additional search ranges by clicking the New button, typing a name and
definition for the range and clicking on the Verify button.
The Delete button removes the currently selected range, or a new range that you do
not wish to keep. To delete an existing range, click on the name of the range, then
click Delete. There is no confirmation dialog box or Undo feature for deleted
ranges; however, closing the dialog box without updating discards any changes
made since the dialog box was opened.
Organizing the Ranges
You can organize the search ranges in the list. First click on the search range you want
to move to highlight it, then click (or click and hold) the Up or Down button to
move it in the list. The order you select will determine the order in which your
search ranges appear in the search range pop-up menu.
Hint: You can indent ranges to group them on the list by adding blanks (pressing
the space bar) before the name.
Hint: You can create a dividing line to separate names on the list by creating a range
with any valid definition, but only one or more hyphens (-) as the range name.
Applying the Ranges
When you have finished defining ranges, click the Update button to save all your
changes to the Range pop-up menu, and make the current range the selection in
the front window.
The window remains open allowing you
to continue editing the ranges while
working in other windows.
Closing the window before updating
opens a dialog box which lets you
save or discard the changes you have
made.
If a range other than [All text] is selected, and the More
options section is closed, the range name appears
beside More options as a reminder.
Note: An alternative way of defining temporary ranges is to use the Range command
which is described in Chapter 8.
7-12
8
Search Symbols and
Commands
Chapter Contents:
Searches Using Symbols.................................. 8-2
Searches Using Commands ............................. 8-5
Connecting Commands ................................... 8-6
Stand-alone Commands................................... 8-8
Using Multiple Commands in a Search ......... 8-11
Linking Search Arguments ............................ 8-13
Searching the Contents of Another Window... 8-15
Searching the Word List of Another Window .. 8-17
8
Search Symbols and Commands
Symbols and commands enable you to define very specific and complex searches of the texts in
Accordance. This chapter describes the use of these symbols and command in plain (untagged)
texts. Additional options are available for the Keyed bible texts described in the next chapter.
Many more searches can be defined for the morphologically tagged original language texts, as
described in the Grammatical Supplement, Chapters G-1 and G-3.
Searches Using Symbols
You can use symbols in
Accordance (such as * and ?)
to help define your search
arguments. The Enter Symbol
submenu (Search menu or
contextual menu) shows the
available symbols with a brief
description of their function.
Selecting a symbol from this
submenu places it in the argument
entry box. (See Appendix C-Names
and Symbols.)
Except for these specific uses,
punctuation is not accepted in the
argument entry box, and is ignored
in the search text unless preceded
by a period. Use the field popup menu to limit the search to a
clause or sentence.
Grouping
Parentheses are used to group multiple expressions such as alternative words separated by a
comma, or expressions joined by commands. They are described later in this chapter.
Wild-cards
You can use wild-card symbols both within single words and within words that are part of a
phrase.
The Asterisk
An asterisk (*) indicates a global wild-card; that is, any number of letters in a word.
Standing alone or as part of a phrase, the asterisk signifies any word. When used alone
the asterisk will find all the words used in the current range. (When searching for
Verses the asterisk stands for all verses.)
8-2
The asterisk cannot be used to stand for the first or last word in phrase, unless it
is qualified by other criteria.
Combined with specific letters it stands for any number of letters. For example, the
argument sing* finds any word that starts with sing including sing, singer,
singleness, etc., and b*g finds any word that begins with b and ends with g,
regardless of its length.
Negative Wild-card
A hyphen immediately following a wild-card expression excludes the words following the
hyphen from the expression. For example, the argument sing*-single* finds any word that starts
with sing except for single, singleness, etc.
Character Wild-cards
Use a question mark (?) to represent any single letter in a word. You can specify
the characters for the ? wild-card by placing them in parentheses immediately
following the question mark. A hyphen (-) preceding the characters specifies that
the characters after the hyphen may not occur in that position, and a hyphen
between the characters specifies a range.
For example:
b?t
finds any three-letter word that begins with b and ends with t
(bat, bet, bit, but).
b?(a-i)t
finds bat, bet and bit.
b?(eu)t
finds only the words bet or but.
b?(-u)t
finds all the words with the exception of but.
A repeated character in a word can be found using a question mark followed by
parentheses containing an equal sign and a numeral referring to the number of a
prior question mark in the same word.
For example: the entry a??(=1) would find all and add, but not and.
To find any 5 letter palindrome such as level use the argument ????(=2)?(=1) to
specify that the word must have 5 letters, the fourth is the same as the second,
and the fifth is the same as the first.
Hint: Use the Analysis Detail to see all the words found by the wild-card. For example,
set the range to a single chapter, and search for * to get a list and count of all the
words used in the chapter.
Inflected Form
Quotation marks (single or double, straight or smart) are used to enclose inflected
forms in morphologically tagged texts.
“arb”
For example:
finds only the exact word bara whereas
derived from this lexical form meaning create.
arb finds all words
Searching the Bible
8-3
8
Search Symbols and Commands
The “At” Sign
The At sign (@) is used to link together search criteria so that they apply to the same
word. Examples include words and Key numbers, tag information with lexical,
inflected forms or roots, or some commands. For example bibloß [NOUN] finds
biblos followed by a noun whereas bibloß @[NOUN] finds biblos when it is a noun
The symbol is entered automatically when grammatical tags are defined immediately
after a word.
Exact Search
The equal sign (=) requires a search for the exact form which follows it. The exact
search includes all accents, word punctuation such as hyphens and apostrophes,
and upper or lower case characters.
Thus a search for =mark finds mark but not Mark, and =its finds its but not it’s.
If the equal sign is not used, then accents, punctuation, and case are ignored in the
search. The equal sign is automatically entered in front of each word selected from
the Select words dialog box, if the Use exact word box is checked.
Note: Some older versions of Accordance modules do not fully support exact searches.
Root Form
The plus sign (+) requires a search for the root form in tagged texts, so that it finds
all words derived from that root. For example:
finds additional words that
come from the root
.
arb
arb+
Single Character
A period (.) followed by any single character except a blank space, searches for that
character. This can be used for alphanumeric characters, punctuation, accents
and cantillation marks. The search is case sensitive, and can only be used when
searching the Verse field (not within a sentence, chapter, etc.).
Parentheses and commas are used as usual to indicate alternative characters.
The character can be part of a phrase, an @ expression, or a connecting expression.
For example:
.b
finds any word including the letter b, but not B.
.;
finds any semicolon.
(.., .,)
finds any period or comma.
said .,
finds the word said followed immediately by a comma.
said <AND> ., finds the word said and any comma in the same verse.
./@[VERB]
find all Greek verbs which appear with an acute accent.
In Hebrew this capability allows searching for cantillation marks either individually or
together with a word or tag form.
Hint: Use a space before the period in order to see a backspace character that you
enter after the period.
8-4
In both Greek and Hebrew the search ignores differences in the amount of overstrike,
and combination with other diacriticals. Therefore similar diacritical marks are
found in one search. For example a search for an acute accent will not only find
all the different overstrike acute accents, but also all combinations of a breathing
mark with an acute accent.
The CHAR. item in the Construct window is similar, but allows multiple characters.
Many of the symbols are described in the relevant chapters, and summarized in Appendix C.
Searches Using Commands
Accordance offers a wide variety of commands to facilitate both simple and complex searches.
Search commands constrain your search and allow you to specify relationships between words.
All commands are indicated by surrounding brackets; either < > or [ ]. In general, the < >
brackets denote connecting commands while the [ ] brackets denote stand-alone commands.
Double clicking within a command in the argument entry box selects the whole command
including the brackets.
Entering Commands
When you select a command from the Enter Command submenu (Search menu or contextual
menu), it is pasted with the correct brackets into the argument entry box at the insertion
point (where the cursor is blinking). The keyboard equivalents for the commands are the shift⌘ key combinations indicated on the menu (hold down both the shift and command keys and
press the letter key). You can also directly enter the command by typing enough letters to
uniquely identify it. For example, Accordance reads <a> as <AND>.
connecting
commands
stand-alone
commands
Searching the Bible
8-5
8
Search Symbols and Commands
Connecting Commands
Connecting commands are used to set up relationships between expressions. These commands
must be preceded and followed by an expression. Multiple connecting commands can be
combined in the argument entry box. In the following explanation and examples, X and Z stand
for any valid expressions, and the search field pop-up menu is assumed to be set to Verse.
<AND>
X <AND> Z finds every case where X and Z are both present within the current search
field. Both must be present for the criteria to be met. For example, the argument
land <AND> promise finds every verse that contains both land and promise.
Example of an AND search
This example illustrates a simple search with a connecting command:
You want to find every verse in the KJV that contains both the words crown and gold.
First, set the search to Words and the search text to KJV.
Enter crown into the empty argument entry box. Select the item AND from the Enter
Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift-⌘-A). Now enter the
word gold and click OK.
The argument should read: crown <AND> gold.
Note: The number of hits is the sum of the occurrences of each word in the verses
that meet the search criteria, i.e. that contain both crown and gold.
8-6
<OR>
X <OR> Z finds every case where either X or Z is present in the current search field.
If either one is present, the search criteria is met. Entering land <OR> promise
finds every verse that contains either land or promise or both. This command
cannot be used in combination with other connecting commands.
Note: Alternative words that are a part of a phrase are entered in parentheses and
separated by commas. Thus, to search for verses that contain either the phrase
holy land or the phrase holy people, enter holy (land, people).
<NOT>
X <NOT> Z finds cases of X, where Z is not present anywhere in the same field. This
command is equivalent to <AND> <NOT>. Entering land <NOT> promise finds
every verse that contains land and does not contain promise. This command can
be used in combination with all other connecting commands except <OR> and
<XOR>.
<XOR>
X <XOR> Z finds every case where only one of X or Z is present in the current search
field. The <XOR> command differs from the <OR> command in that it does not
find cases where both X and Z are present in the current search field. Entering
land <XOR> promise finds every verse that contains either land or promise,
but not both. This command cannot be used in combination with other connecting
commands.
<FOLLOWED BY>
X <FOLLOWED BY> Z finds cases where X and Z are in the same field, with X always
followed by Z. This command is equivalent to <AND> <FOLLOWED BY>. Entering
land <FOLLOWED BY> promise finds every verse that contains promise
following land. This command can be used in combination with other connecting
commands except <OR> and <XOR>.
Hint: To find verses where X occurs twice, search for X <FOLLOWED BY> X.
<PRECEDED BY>
X <PRECEDED BY> Z finds cases where X and Z are in the same field with X always
preceded by Z. This command is equivalent to <AND> <PRECEDED BY>. Entering
land <PRECEDED BY> promise finds every verse that contains promise
preceding land. This command can be used in combination with other connecting
commands except <OR> and <XOR>.
Searching the Bible
8-7
8
Search Symbols and Commands
<WITHIN ? Words>
X <WITHIN ? Words> Z narrows the field of search between the two expressions
to a range of words. This is equivalent to <AND> <WITHIN ? Words>. Replace
the question mark in the argument with a number (with a space on each side). A
single number implies a range from one to that number of words. A specific range
can be entered by using two numbers separated by a hyphen. A range of 1 means
the expressions on either side of the WITHIN command must be adjacent to one
another.
For example, entering the command land <WITHIN 5 Words> promise means that
promise must be from 1 to 5 words away from land (0 to 4 intervening words).
A range of 5-7 means that promise must be from 5 to 7 words away from land.
Specifying a range of 5-5 means that promise must be exactly 5 words from land.
This command can be used in combination with other connecting commands
except <OR> and <XOR>.
Choosing the WITHIN item from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual
menu, or shift-⌘-W) places <WITHIN ? Words> in the argument entry box. The
question mark is selected so you can immediately enter your range.
Stand-alone Commands
Stand-alone commands are used to define an expression rather than to link two expressions
together.
[LINK — ]
The [LINK — ] command substitutes the arguments from another window, which can be
either another Search window or a Construct window. It can be used in combination
with other arguments and commands. It can also be used to perform the same
search simultaneously in different texts or with different search settings. (See also
Chapter 10-Graphical Searches.) [LINK — ] can also link the arguments of two Tool
or Parallel windows.
[CONTENTS — ]
The [CONTENTS — ] command substitutes the list of verses from another window,
which can be either another Search window or a Reference list window. It is used in
combination with other arguments and commands to perform a search within a set
of verses in another window, or to compare the contents of two search results. In a
Tool window [CONTENTS — ] can get the verse list of a Search window.
[HITS — ]
The [HITS – ] command lets you search the word list found in another Search window.
This lets you compare the words found in one text with another, rather than
compare the verse lists as in the CONTENTS command.
8-8
Note: After choosing the LINK, CONTENTS or HITS item from the Enter Command
submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift-⌘-L, C, or H), the name of a window
is entered into the argument entry box as part of the command argument. If you
type the command, enough characters to uniquely identify the window should be
entered after the command.
The use of the LINK, CONTENTS, and HITS commands is illustrated at the end of this chapter.
[MERGE — ]
The [MERGE — ] command is used only in the Tools window as described in Chapter 14.
[RANGE — ]
The [RANGE — ] command lets you enter any set of verse references in the brackets
as a temporary range. This command acts like the CONTENTS command in that
it limits the search to the specified verses, and can be modified by connecting
commands, for example [RANGE Gen 1-3] <AND> man.
The results with this command are identical to those obtained with the Range popup menu, except for the following COUNT command, and in the Hits and Analysis
Graph windows which cover the range shown in the pop-up menu.
If the range specified in the command falls outside the range set in the pop-up menu,
the menu defaults to [All Text].
[COUNT — ]
The [COUNT — ] command searches only for the words that occur the specified
number of times in the search range. For example if the Search range pop-up menu
is set to Gen 1-3, [COUNT 1-2] finds all the words that occur only once or twice in
this range.
However, when COUNT is combined with RANGE as in [RANGE Gen 1-3] <AND>
[COUNT 1] and the Search range pop-up is set to All Text, Accordance only finds
the words in Gen 1-3 that occur once in the entire text.
Adding other criteria
The [COUNT — ] command always uses a list of exact words (sensitive to case,
punctuation, and accent). It can be modified in three ways: with the @ symbol, with
connecting commands, and with an equal sign and modifier inside the brackets.
The @ symbol lets you add additional criteria for each word in the list. You can add
a word or wildcard expression, the negative hyphen, and Key number, lemma,
inflected, or grammatical information, depending on the type of text you are
searching. For example, [COUNT 1]@abi* finds any unique words beginning with
abi, and [COUNT 1]@-[KEY *] finds any unique words that have no Key number.
Connecting commands add additional criteria to the search within the current field,
in the usual way. Thus, [COUNT 1] <WITHIN 10 words> Adam finds any unique
words within 10 words of Adam.
Searching the Bible
8-9
8
Search Symbols and Commands
The default COUNT search in an untagged text uses the list of words (lemmas in a
tagged text) that occur the specified number of times. Additional modifiers can be
used inside the brackets to choose a different list for the search. These modifiers
are entered with an equal sign directly after the numeral. The modifiers are Keys,
Inflected, and Tags. Only the first character of each modifier needs to be entered.
[COUNT 1=k] uses the list of Key numbers that occur only once.
[COUNT 1=i] uses the list of inflected forms that occur only once.
[COUNT 1=t] uses the list of entire tags that occur only once.
For example, entering lov*@[COUNT 1 =k] searches for words beginning with lov that
are tagged with a Key number that occurs only once within the range. It does NOT
find words beginning with lov that are tagged only once, but with a Key number
that is also attached to other words.
See Chapter 9 for an explanation of Key numbers, and the Grammatical Supplement for
details of the use of the commands with morphologically tagged texts.
[KEY — ]
The [KEY — ] command lets you enter and search for the Key number of a word in a
Keyed Bible text. This feature is described in Chapter 9.
[STYLE — ]
The [STYLE — ] command lets you find text that you have highlighted. This feature is
described in Chapter 17.
[FIELD — ]
The [FIELD — ] command ([FIELD begin/end]) works together with the <WITHIN ?
Words> command to specify the range from the beginning or end of the current
search field. The — must be replaced with either begin or end. Thus, Adam
<WITHIN 2 Words> [FIELD begin] finds each case where there are less than two
words from the beginning of the current search field to Adam.
Choosing the FIELD item from the Enter Command
submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift-⌘-F)
opens a dialog box that lets you select Begin or End.
After you click OK in the dialog box, [FIELD Begin] or
[FIELD End] is placed in the argument entry box at the
insertion point.
8-10
Using Multiple Commands in a Search
You can combine multiple commands and expressions in the same search. This enables you
to perform complex searches with a single set of search arguments. However, complex search
arguments are sometimes ambiguous and produce misleading results. They are often more
clearly and easily defined in a Construct window. (See Chapter 10-Graphical Searches.)
Note: It is best to avoid the use of multiple <WITHIN>, <FOLLOWED BY>, or <PRECEDED
BY> commands with multiple expressions or parentheses (except for parentheses
containing only <OR>).
Parentheses
Parentheses are used to specify logical groupings of expressions. The expressions
inside the parentheses are evaluated first and then combined with the other
expressions in the argument.
Example of the use of parentheses
The following example shows the use of parentheses in a search:
You want to find the verses in the KJV with Adam and either Eve or the woman.
First, set the search to Words, and the search text to KJV (or KJVS).
Enter Adam into the empty argument entry box. Next select AND from the Enter
Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift-⌘-A).
Now enter (Eve then select OR from the Enter Command submenu or press shift-⌘O). Now enter the woman) and click OK.
The search argument should read: Adam <AND> (Eve <OR> the woman).
Click OK to perform the search.
Searching the Bible
8-11
8
Search Symbols and Commands
Precedence with Multiple Commands
If there are no parentheses in a search with multiple expressions, the commands are executed
in the order of their position in the argument entry box. Thus, X <AND> Y <OR> Z is
equivalent to (X <AND> Y) <OR> Z and finds any verses that have either Z or both X and Y. In
contrast to this, Z <OR> X <AND> Y is equivalent to (Z <OR> X) <AND> Y and finds all verses
that contain Y together with Z or X. Thus, you should use parentheses to specify precedence if
you have any doubt about the order in which your commands will be applied.
Combining Commands
You can use multiple connecting commands in the same search, in order to specify the exact
phrase or construction you wish to find.
Example of Multiple Commands
This example demonstrates a search with multiple commands:
You want to modify the previous search to find only cases where Eve or the woman
follow Adam in the verse and where the two expressions are, at most, four words
apart. To do this, enter this argument in the entry box:
Adam <FOLLOWED BY> <WITHIN 4 Words> (Eve <OR> the woman)
In this instance, <FOLLOWED BY> constrains the order of the words in the verse and
<WITHIN 4 Words> limits the amount of space between the words.
Click OK to perform the search.
Using <NOT> with Other Connecting Commands
When you enter the <NOT> command adjacent to another connecting command,
the meaning of the negated command is reversed. For example, land <NOT>
<FOLLOWED BY> promise means that a verse is found only if land occurs where
it is not followed by promise.
When <NOT> is adjacent to another command, the order of the two commands is
irrelevant. Thus, promised <NOT> <WITHIN 3 Words> land is the same as
promised <WITHIN 3 Words> <NOT> land.
Example of <NOT> with Other Connecting Commands
This example illustrates the use of multiple connecting commands and the use of <NOT>.
You want to find verses in the KJV that contain cave where it is not followed by field
within 10 words. Enter the following argument into the entry box:
cave <NOT> <WITHIN 10 Words> <FOLLOWED BY> field
Click OK to perform the search. The results are shown opposite.
Note that field occurs often in these verses, but never in the 10 words following cave.
Gen. 23:19 which contains cave of the field is correctly missing from these
search results.
8-12
Linking Search Arguments
Accordance allows you to link Search and Construct windows to a Search window to provide
additional arguments for a search. This feature adds power and flexibility to your searches.
The LINK command
Use the LINK command in the argument entry box to link to the argument of another
window. Place the insertion point where you want the LINK command to appear.
Select LINK from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or
shift-⌘-L).
If only one Search or Construct window is open the name of that window is
automatically inserted in the LINK command.
If you open a new Construct window
while a Search window is in front,
and the argument entry box in
this window is empty or all of its
contents are selected, Accordance
assumes that you want to link them
and does it automatically. This
results in [LINK windowname] appearing in the Search window as the Construct
window opens.
If there are no other windows open, a question mark is inserted with the LINK
command in the argument entry box. The question mark is selected so that you
can immediately enter a new window name.
Searching the Bible
8-13
8
Search Symbols and Commands
If there are other Search or Construct
windows open, a dialog box appears
showing the names of all available
windows. Select the name of the
window that you want to link to and
click OK. [LINK windowname] is
added to the argument entry box at
the insertion point.
Linking Search windows together enables
you to perform simultaneous searches
without duplicating your entire search
argument. For example, you may want
to use identical search arguments in
each search but specify a different
search text, search range, or search
field. You may also want to use the
second window to slightly modify
your search arguments while still
preserving the original search in the first window.
When you click OK in any linked window, the search is performed in that window and
in all the windows that are linked to it. If you modify the argument in any of the
windows, and click OK, the search is updated in all the linked windows.
Example of a Linked Search
The following example illustrates a simple search with linked windows:
You want to compare a search for
Adam or Eve in the KJV and ASV.
First, set the search to Words and
the search text to KJVS. Enter the
argument Adam <OR> Eve into the
argument entry box.
Select Duplicate (File menu or ⌘-D)
to create a new window and set the
search text to ASV. Tab to select
the text in the entry box and choose
LINK from the Enter Command
submenu (Search or contextual
menu, or shift-⌘-L). If the Select
window dialog box appears, select
the name of the other Search
window and click OK. At this
point, the two windows are linked
together.
Click OK to perform the search in both
windows.
8-14
Using LINK as Part of a Larger Search Argument
When the LINK command is in the argument entry box, it can be used as part of a more
complex search argument. In the previous example, [LINK KJVS] is equivalent to
Adam<OR> Eve, since this is the argument from the window KJVS.
You can add further commands and modifiers to the LINK command in the search
entry box. For example, you can make [LINK KJVS] <AND> wife the argument in
the second Search window. In this case, the second search finds only verses that
also contain wife.
Searching the Contents of Another Window
Accordance allows you to use the verse list of another window as part of your search argument.
You can search the contents of another Search window or compare two search results. You can
also search the verse list of a Reference List window which is used to accumulate your own
selection of verses. (See Chapter 18-Reference Lists.)
The CONTENTS Command
To include the CONTENTS command in the search argument, place the insertion
point in the argument entry box where you want the command to appear. Select
CONTENTS from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or
shift-⌘-C).
If there are other Search or Reference List windows open, a dialog box appears
showing the names of all available windows. Select the name of the window that
you want to search and click OK. [CONTENTS windowname] is added to the
argument entry box at the insertion point. This is similar to the LINK command
described above.
If there are no other windows open, a question mark is automatically inserted with the
CONTENTS command in the argument entry box. The question mark is selected so
that you can immediately enter a new window name.
If only one Search or Reference List window is open, the name of that window is
automatically inserted in the CONTENTS command.
You can now complete the search argument. When you click OK in either window, the
search is performed in that window and in all the windows that are linked to it by
the CONTENTS command. If you modify the argument in any of the windows, and
click OK, the search is updated in all the windows.
Examples of Contents Searches
The following examples illustrate searches of the contents of other windows:
In the previous example, the same search for Adam or Eve was performed in the KJV and ASV.
You notice that there were 34 “hits” in the KJV compared to 24 in the ASV. You decide
to find all the verses found in the KJV which were not found in the ASV.
Duplicate the KJVS window and add another text pane with the ASV.
Searching the Bible
8-15
8
Search Symbols and Commands
Tab to select the argument entry box of the new Search window. Choose CONTENTS or
press shift-⌘-C. When the Select window dialog box appears, select the name KJVS
and click OK.
Now enter <NOT> or press
shift-⌘-N. Then enter
CONTENTS again and
when the Select window
dialog box appears, select
the name ASV and click
OK.
The argument entry box
should read [CONTENTS
KJVS] <NOT> [CONTENTS
ASV].
Click OK to perform the
search. The resulting
Search window is shown
here:
Note that there are no
highlighted words as the
search merely compared
two lists of verses, and
found verses which contain
Adam or Eve in the KJV
but not in the ASV.
You notice that the ASV often
uses the man instead of
Adam. You can now search
this subset of seven ASV
verses for the phrase the
man.
Duplicate the KJVS 2 window
and change the search text
to ASV. Tab to select the
contents of the argument
entry box and enter:
[CONTENTS KJVS 2]
<AND> the man.
Now click OK. The new
window looks like this:
8-16
Searching the Word List of Another Window
Accordance uses the HITS command to incorporate the word list from another Search window
as part of your argument. Unlike the CONTENTS command which uses the list of verses, the
HITS command incorporates the actual list of words from the search results in the other
window. This powerful command allows you to compare the vocabulary of different passages,
different translations, or even different texts such as the Qumran and the Hebrew Bible.
The HITS Command
To include the HITS command in the search argument, place the insertion point in the
argument entry box where you want the command to appear. Select HITS from the
Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift-⌘-H). Like the
CONTENTS command, either a window name or a question mark will appear in the
command, or the dialog box will let you select a window.
Also like the LINK and CONTENTS command, clicking OK updates the search in all the
linked windows.
Example of a Hits Search
The following example illustrates searches using the hits from another window:
You want to compare the language used in Genesis 1-3 with the language used in the
rest of Genesis. Open two Search windows with the same Bible text such as KJVS. In
the first put * <AND> [RANGE Gen 4f] in the argument entry box. In the second
window put [HITS KJVS] <AND> [RANGE Gen 1-3] in the entry box. Click OK.
The first window shows all the words in the rest of Genesis, and the second window
highlights all the words in the first three chapters which are also found in the rest
of the book. The words not highlighted are unique to Gen 1-3.
Searching the Bible
8-17
8
Search Symbols and Commands
Adding Other Criteria
The HITS command is similar to the COUNT command in that additional search criteria can
be added to the [HITS windowname] expression in three ways: with the @ symbol, with
connecting commands, and with modifiers inside the brackets.
@ symbol
The @ symbol lets you add
additional criteria for each
word in the list. You can
add a word or wildcard
expression, the negative
hyphen, and Key number,
lemma, inflected, or
grammatical information,
depending on the type of
text you are searching in
the second window.
For example: to reverse
the above search and
highlight the words
unique to Gen 1-3, add
*@- in front of the [HITS
KJVS] in the second window. This tells Accordance to find all the words in the
range except those that were found in the first window.
Connecting Commands
Connecting commands add additional criteria to the search in the usual way.
For example: to limit the
search to unique words
occurring within 20 words
of the word good add
<WITHIN 20 words>
good to the search
argument, so that it reads
*@-[HITS KJVS] <WITHIN
20 Words> good <AND>
[RANGE Gen 1-3].
8-18
Additional Modifiers
The default HITS search in an untagged text uses the list of words (in a
morphologically tagged text the list of lemmas)
found by the search in the first window.
Additional modifiers can be used inside the brackets to
choose a different list for the search in the second
window. These modifiers are entered with an equal
sign directly after the word HITS. The modifiers are
Keys, Inflected, and Tags. Only the first character
of each modifier needs to be entered.
[HITS=k windowname] uses the list of Key
numbers from the first window.
[HITS=i windowname] uses the list of inflected
forms from the first window.
[HITS=t windowname] uses the list of entire
tags from the first window.
In the dialog box for selecting the window there are
radio buttons which allow you to choose between
the appropriate modifiers for this text.
See Chapter 9 for an explanation of Key numbers, and the Grammatical Supplement for details
of the use of the HITS command with morphologically tagged texts.
For example: to find the unique key numbers in the above search, the argument
should look like this: [KEY *] @-[HITS=k KJVS] <AND> [RANGE Gen 1-3]. The Key
number wildcard is necessary to exclude all the words which have no Key number
assigned to them.
Notice that the results are
quite different. For
example in Gen 1:10 Seas
is no longer highlighted
as that key number
applies to sea in the rest
of Genesis, but dry is
highlighted as this Hebrew
word occurs in Genesis
only here.
Searching the Bible
8-19
8
Search Symbols and Commands
Exact Searches
Note that the HITS search is exact for all searches except for case sensitivity. This
means that it does not find a match between words that have the same characters
but are accented or punctuated differently, such as sons and son’s (or vowelled
differently in Hebrew). However, differences in capitalization are ignored, so that
the search will find a match between job and Job.
There are many more possible permutations of searches using the HITS command.
8-20
Keyed Bible Texts
9
Chapter Contents:
Working with Keyed Bible Texts ...................... 9-2
Getting More Information................................ 9-3
Searches Using Key Numbers .......................... 9-6
Search Arguments with Key Numbers............. 9-7
Different Key Number Schemes ...................... 9-9
German Bibles with Lemmas ......................... 9-10
9
Keyed Bible Texts
Working with Keyed Bible Texts
A Keyed text is a Bible which includes a database of a Key number for each significant word in
the original text. Accordance currently offers Key numbers on special modules with the KJV
(KJVS), the NASB 1995 revision (NAS95S), and the NIV (NIV-G/K). The Key number may be a
Strong’s number or another similar scheme such as Goodrick-Kohlenberger. The Greek Texus
Receptus is also available with Key numbers (GNT-TRS).
Some German Bibles are “lemmatized” which means that the database includes the dictionary
form of the word. These lemmas are treated in Accordance very much like Key Numbers.
The Key number links the English word in its context with the dictionary form of the original
Hebrew or Greek word. Accordance lets you use these Key numbers as part of a search
definition in the search entry section or in the Construct window. You can also view the
numbers and original or transliterated words, and link directly to a dictionary entry for that
word. You can even “amplify” directly from the English word to find the original word in any
text or tool. This chapter explains how to view and search the Key numbers, and see the results
in the Details. (See Chapter 10 on the Construct windows, and Chapter 13 on amplifying from a
selection in a Keyed text.)
Searching the English Text
You can search the English text of a Keyed Bible text for words and phrases in exactly the same
way as a regular English text. You can also use the search commands as described in Chapter 8.
The results in the text pane will appear identical to those in a plain text without Key numbers.
Accordance gives you several ways to view the Key numbers.
Displaying the Key Numbers
The Instant Details box displays the details of the word under the cursor in a Keyed Bible
text. There is no need to click on the word, simply place or drag the cursor over the word, and
the Key number, original word and English transliteration will appear in the box.
This example shows the Instant Details
box when the cursor is over the word
“beginning” in Gen 1:1. For more
information on the Instant Details box,
see Chapter 5-Floating Windows.
Some words are assigned to more than
one Key number, so, for example, when
the cursor is over “below” in Gen. 1:
9 (NAS95S), the box displays both
numbers.
Note: Common words are usually not tagged with a Key number, so the Instant Details
box will be empty if the cursor is over these words.
Note: The English transliteration of Key number words is derived from the lexicon
which accompanies that number scheme, and often differs from the automatic
transliteration provided by Accordance.
9-2
Getting More Information
In addition to viewing the Key number, you can use the Details button and Amplify features to
display and analyze the Key numbers with the results of your search. These features are fully
described in Chapters 11-13 and will only be noted here.
Opening the Dictionary
Triple-clicking on a word with a Key
number opens the associated Greek or
Hebrew dictionary and finds the Key
number. Triple-clicking in the GNT-TRS
opens the first Greek dictionary with
Strong’s numbers (Thayer, NAS Greek, or
Greek Strong’s).
You can also select (or leave the cursor
flashing in) a word with a Key number, and
then amplify to the associated dictionary,
and Accordance will display the relevant
articles in the dictionary. Of course, you
must select Hebrew for the Old Testament,
and Greek for the New. Here is the Hebrew
Strong’s article displayed when the selection
is beginning in Gen. 1:1. If you select the
wrong dictionary, Accordance will simply
search for the English word.
The Contextual Menu
A right-click on a two-button mouse (or control click) opens the contextual menu. There are
slight differences in function when the selection is in a Key number text.
The Search for submenu lets you choose to search for a word or Key number in the
same text.
Selecting Dictionary from the Look Up submenu searches for the Key number in the
related dictionary.
The Look Up submenu also lets you select Parsing (see below).
Searching the Bible
9-3
9
Keyed Bible Texts
Details
The Details button on the Search window opens a workspace with a
number of additional options for displaying the results of your search.
In the Graph pop-up menu you can select Analysis Graph, Analysis
Bar Chart and Analysis Pie Chart. Each of these can display either
the words or the Key numbers found in your search.
Clicking the Analysis button in
the Details workspace lets you see
the results of the search with the
Key numbers and original words
displayed for each word.
See Chapter11-Getting Details for
more information on the Graphs and
Analysis.
9-4
The Resource Palette
Selecting a portion of text and clicking Parsing on the Resource palette displays each word
in the selection, together with the same details shown in the Instant Details box for the words
that have Key numbers.
Note: In the Analysis and Parsing windows you can select a word and amplify to
any text or tool with the same language to find that word. If you select a Key
number you can search a Keyed text or dictionary for that number.
Selecting text and clicking Syntax
puts all the selected words into a
spreadsheet, together with the details
of the Key numbers. You can edit this
spreadsheet and add your own notes
to it.
See Chapter 13-Amplifying your
Selection for details of Parsing and
Syntax.
The Option Click
Holding the option key down while
amplifying from a Keyed Bible text
lets you search for the original Greek or Hebrew in two ways:
Clicking Search or amplifying to a Keyed Bible text searches for the Key numbers
from the selection. See Chapter 12-Amplify Features.
Selecting any tool, or a Greek or Hebrew Bible text from the Resource palette,
searches for the dictionary forms of the original words.
Searching the Bible
9-5
9
Keyed Bible Texts
Searches Using Key Numbers
The shortcuts in the contextual menu and Resource palette are the easiest way to search for
Key numbers. When working with a Keyed Bible text, you can also directly search for the Key
numbers, and Accordance will find all occurrences of words that are assigned to that number.
Entering Key Numbers
To specify a Key number as
an argument, select Enter
Key Numbers… (Search or
contextual menu, or ⌘-L) to bring
up the Select Key Numbers
dialog box. This menu item is
dimmed unless you are searching
a Keyed Bible text.
You can use this dialog box to select
from the Key numbers for every
word in the search text. This
dialog box functions in the same
way as the Select Words dialog
box described in Chapter 7.
The Key numbers are shown on the
left side of the scrolling list.
The Greek numbers are prefixed
by the letter G, and the Hebrew
numbers follow with the H
prefix. Enter h in the Go to: box to see the Hebrew numbers. On the right side is a
matching English transliteration of the dictionary form of the original word.
Selecting the
Key number and
clicking OK, or
double-clicking
on the number,
places the number
in the entry box
with the KEY
command.
Here is a search
for the Hebrew
word ish, Key
number H0376, in
Gen 1-3:
9-6
If you select
more than
one entry,
each number
will appear in
the entry box
with the KEY
command. The
numbers are in
parentheses,
separated by
commas: ([KEY
H0120], [KEY
H0121]) and
are treated as
alternatives.
The results of
the search are
shown here:
The KEY Command
You can also enter the Key numbers individually by choosing KEY from
the Enter Command submenu (Search menu or shift-⌘-K). This
places [KEY ?] in the argument entry box. with the question mark
selected so you can immediately enter a Key number.
Search Arguments with Key Numbers
You can search for a single Key number, or
a string of alternative numbers as shown
above. You can also create a phrase of Key
numbers, alone or mixed with words.
You can also use all the search commands
which have been described in Chapter 8, in
combination with the Key numbers.
Wildcards
You can even use the asterisk wildcard to find
related words in the original language.
A search for [KEY *] will highlight every
word in the text that has a Key number. A
search for [KEY G557*] finds most of the
Greek words beginning with pseudo.
Searching the Bible
9-7
9
Keyed Bible Texts
The @ Symbol
Use the @ symbol to link a combination of the
Key number and the word so the linked
information all applies to the same word.
For example, man@ [KEY H0120] finds
man only when it translates the word
adam.
The @ symbol can also be used with a hyphen
to indicate a negative. For example,
man@- [KEY H0120] finds man when it
translates a word other than adam, such
as ish.
A search for man@-[KEY *] finds the word
where it occurs without a Key number.
@ and AND
Do not confuse the @ symbol with the <AND>
command. Use the <AND> command to denote
two different words or phrases that must occur
in the same search field. Use the @ symbol to
connect a Key number to a word and describe
only one word. Thus, a search for [KEY
H0376]@man finds man when it translates the
word ish, but [KEY H0376] <AND> man finds
man when it occurs in the same verse as ish, but
not necessarily on the same word.
9-8
Multiple Key Numbers
Where there is more than one Key number
on a single English word, all the numbers
are displayed in the Instant Details and
Parsing windows. A search for any of the
numbers will find that word. However, the
only way to search for words with both or
all the Key numbers on the same word is
to use the <AND> command, and this may
also highlight other examples of words
with one of these numbers in the same
verse.
Different Key Number Schemes
Different Keyed Bible texts use different schemes of Key numbers, so searches (and amplify
functions) based on Key numbers are only accurate within the related modules.
The KJVS (and Greek Strong’s and Hebrew Strong’s) use the original Strong’s numbers. The
NAS95S, NAS Greek, and NAS Hebrew use a modified Strong’s scheme in which most numbers
are the same as Strong’s, but additional entries were inserted with letter suffixes. For example:
the original Strong’s 1544 ekballo is 1544b e˙kba¿llw ekballo in the NAS Greek; and 1544a.
e˙kbai÷nw ekbaino is inserted. Thus searching from ekballo in the KJVS to the NAS95S will
find no hits, and vice-versa, since the numbers do not match.
The NIV-G/K uses an entirely different scheme (Goodrick-Kohlenberger) so the dictionary entry
for ekballo is 1675 [1544] e˙kba¿llw. The number in the brackets is the Strong’s number so
you can use this number to compare the search in the KJVS.
Note: Even when you search the English texts for the same original words, you may get
very different results due to variations in the way the Key numbers were assigned
to specific words. The verses found by the searches should be similar, but the list
of hit words may vary considerably.
Searching the Bible
9-9
9
Keyed Bible Texts
German Bibles with Lemmas
Several German Bibles are “tagged” with the German root form of the word. The lemmas can be
used in a similar way to Key numbers:
The lemma for the word under the cursor is
shown in the Instant Details box, with the
word in the text.
Triple-click on a word opens the related
dictionary (if available) and searches for
the lemma.
Details graphs, charts, and analysis display
the search results by words or lemmas.
Option-click when amplifying searches for the
lemma.
Enter Key Numbers (Search or contextual
menu, or command-L) opens a dialog box
with a list of all the lemmas.
Lemmas and words can be combined using the
@ symbol. For example, the argument [KEY
stehen] @-steht finds all words from the
lemma stehen except for the word steht.
The KEY item in the Simple Construct
window can be used to define a word, and
agreement in Key can also be specified.
9-10
10
Graphical Searches
Chapter Contents:
Introduction to Constructs............................ 10-2
The Simple Construct Window ...................... 10-2
Using a Construct.......................................... 10-4
The Element Items......................................... 10-9
The Connecting Items ................................. 10-13
Using Multiple Construct Windows ............. 10-21
10
Graphical Searches
Introduction to Constructs
The Construct window is a unique and powerful feature of Accordance. This window allows
you to graphically define the criteria that form the heart of your search. The contents of
a Construct window together form a single search argument. The major advantages of this
window are that you can easily define the words (elements) including their position in the
field, and then define relationships between any of the elements using the connecting items.
You can see at a glance exactly how you have defined each word, and how it is related to all the
other words in the construct, however complex.
A construct is especially useful when you want to combine several criteria to search for a
word, and when you want to specify relationships between words in a phrase.
The Construct window is used in a search by linking it to the argument entry box of a Search
window. Because a Construct window is simply another form of search argument, you can
combine multiple Construct windows in the same search, and take advantage of all the search
entry commands covered in Chapter 8.
A Simple Construct window is used to search non-tagged texts, such as English versions,
and Keyed Bible texts, as well as non-tagged original language texts. The Greek and Hebrew
Construct windows are used to search texts with grammatical tags such as the Greek New
Testament and the Hebrew Bible. This chapter introduces and describes the features common
to all the types of Construct windows. The Simple Construct window is used to illustrate
these features. Even if you are primarily interested in searching tagged texts, you will need to
review this chapter to learn the basic functions of the Construct window. (See also Grammatical
Supplement Chapters G2 and G4.)
The Simple Construct Window
The Simple Construct window is shown below, followed by a brief description of the different
parts of the window.
reverse direction checkbox
description box
connection area
construct palette
element column
10-2
The Description Box
You can enter a description of this construct into the description box. This allows you to state
the purpose and other details of this construct, but has no effect on the search. The description
becomes a part of the construct and is retained if the Construct window is saved and used
again at a later date. The font, size, color, and style of the description can be changed in the
Text palette (or Display menu). (See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.) You can also use the
Edit menu to copy and paste text into this box, retaining its font and style information.
The height of the description box can be changed by dragging the heavy section divider that
separates it from the connection area.
The Construct Palette
The construct palette contains the items that are used to build your construct. These palette
items enable you to define both the nature of individual elements and the relationships
between the construct elements. The details of the palette vary, depending on the type of
construct window.
Simple
Greek
Hebrew
connecting items
element items
Elements
The basic units that make up a construct are called elements. Each element
represents a word in the phrase that you want to find. An element is defined by all
the items that are placed into an element column.
Element items are used to define the elements of a construct. These items are found
in the construct palette between the short heavy lines.
Elements are defined by dragging element items into element columns and adding
details to the items to specify the exact definition of each construct element.
Searching the Bible
10-3
10
Graphical Searches
Relationships between Elements
The connection area above the element columns allows you to define multiple
relationships between any elements. For instance, you may want to specify the
distance in words between two elements. These types of relationships are specified
with connecting items. The default relationship is that the elements represent
adjacent words in a phrase.
Connecting items are the items that are above the short, heavy lines in the construct
palette (i.e. WITHIN, INTER, AGREE). Dragging these items allows you to specify
relationships between the construct elements.
Using a Construct
The following steps are required to build and use a construct:
1. Open a Construct window.
2. Link the construct to a Search window.
3. Define the elements of the construct.
4. Define the relationships between the elements.
5. Click OK in either window to perform the search.
Opening a Construct Window
To open a new Construct window, choose
the type of construct from the New
Construct submenu (File menu or ⌘1,⌘-2, or ⌘-3).
Note: The Greek or Hebrew Construct
submenu items will be dimmed if
Greek or Hebrew tagged texts are not
installed.
The name of the Construct window is used to link the window to a Search window and
is the default name for saving the construct to a file. To change the default name
of the Construct window, select Name… from the Set submenu (Window menu or
option-⌘-N).
Like other windows, you can save a Construct window as an Accordance file so you can
reopen it later. You can also save it as a PICT file which can be opened in a drawing
program. You can print the window or copy the whole window to the clipboard and
paste it into another program. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
Linking a Construct
To use a completed construct in a search, you must link the Construct window to the Search
window where the results of the search are displayed. Linking windows is described in Chapter
8. There are a number of ways to accomplish this:
10-4
1. If you open a new construct while a Search window is in front, and the argument
entry box in this window is empty or all of its contents are selected, Accordance
assumes that you want to link them and does it automatically. This causes [LINK
windowname] to appear in the Search window as the new Construct window
opens.
2. If the argument entry box in the front Search window is not empty when you open
a Construct window, you must link the Construct window to the search entry
section.
Either: make the Search window the front window and place the insertion point
in the argument entry box at the location where you want the LINK command
to appear.
Choose LINK from the Enter Command submenu
(Search or contextual menu, or shift-⌘-L).
If only one other window is open, its name is
automatically inserted with the LINK command
in the argument entry box.
If more than one other window is open, a dialog
box opens with the names of all open Search
and Construct windows. Select the name of the
Construct window you want to link. This adds
[LINK windowname] to the argument entry box
at the insertion point.
Or: control or right-click in the Construct window
pane and select the window from the Link
From submenu in the contextual menu.
Using Palette Items to Build a Construct
The first step in building a construct involves
using the construct palette items.
To use an item from the construct palette,
drag the item by holding down the mouse
when the pointer is over the rectangle
that contains the item’s name, move
the item to the desired location, and
release the mouse button. This places
the item in your construct and brings
up an appropriate dialog box (if further
information is required).
If you move an item to an inappropriate area
in the window, the item is ignored when
you release the mouse button.
Searching the Bible
10-5
10
Graphical Searches
Defining the Elements
Each element in the construct is defined by all of the element items in one column, that
combine to provide the definition for one word.
Always a Phrase
The elements in a construct are assumed to be part of a phrase. This means that
elements in adjacent columns must also be adjacent in the search text for
your search criteria to be met. The WITHIN connecting item allows you to
override this default and specify that the two elements can appear anywhere
within a range of words.
Note: Unlike the argument in the search entry section, the elements in a construct
are always sequence-specific. This means that the elements must appear in
the search text in the same order that they appear in the construct.
One or Both Directions
The Search in both directions checkbox tells Accordance to search for the
phrase as it is shown, and in the reverse direction. The elements remain
in order, but the entire phrase is reversed. For example, when the box is
checked, the construct David and Jonathan would also find the phrase
Jonathan and David.
Element Items
Element items define the individual elements of the construct. They allow
you to define the word itself, or the part of speech, or use certain
search commands. The element items in the Simple construct are
defined below.
Element items must be placed into element columns. If you drag an
element item into an area of the window other than an element
column, the item is ignored.
The NOT item is unique and is described later in the chapter.
To define an element item, drag the item into an element column. Each column
represents a word in your construct. After you place the item in the desired
column, a dialog box appears that lets you fill in any necessary information.
If you do not wish to use the dialog box, simply click OK to exit. Then type
the details directly into the item in the element column.
The Element Item in a Column
item label
element column
details of item
second item
10-6
When an element item is in a column, it is made up of two parts. The
first line of the item is its label, such as WORD. The label is always
displayed in boldface, uppercase letters. The lines following
the label contain the details that further define the item. The
definition of an item continues until there is a horizontal line.
Selecting Items
You select an entire item in order to move or delete it by clicking on
the label. This selects and highlights the entire item. To
select more than one item, hold down the shift key while
selecting the other items.
You can also select items in the element columns and
connection area by clicking on an empty area of the
window and dragging the mouse to form a rectangle
around them. This enables you to select several items at
once.
Moving and Deleting Items
You can move selected (highlighted) items by dragging them
with the mouse. Pressing the delete (backspace) key or
selecting Clear (Edit menu) deletes any selected item or
text.
Duplicating and Copying items
Holding down the option key while dragging a selection, duplicates the items in
the same area of the window. Dragging the selection to another Construct
window of the same type (even without holding down the option key), copies
the selection to that window.
Editing the Text of Items
Double-clicking on the label re-opens the dialog box for the item and allows
you to modify the details. To directly edit the text of the details below the
label, either click at the place you want to begin typing or select the text you
want to replace. Then you can either type or paste the desired text. The text
automatically wraps to the next line, and the item resizes to show your new
entry when you click outside of it.
Searching the Bible
10-7
10
Graphical Searches
Empty Columns
When you define the elements in your construct, you must not leave an empty
column to the left of any column that has been defined. In other words, the
elements in the construct must occupy consecutive columns from left to
right (or right to left in Hebrew).
Defining the Relationships
The connecting items allow you to specify relationships between construct
elements. These relationships are defined by WITHIN, INTER, and
AGREE.
Connecting items are placed above the element columns in the connection area.
You can change the height of the connection area by dragging the heavy section
divider that separates the connection area from the element columns. Any
connecting items already in place are repositioned within the new limits.
To place a connecting item, drag the connecting item into a position above the desired
element columns. The item automatically connects to the nearest element columns.
The Parts of a Connecting Item
A connecting item that is placed in the connection area consists
of four parts. The boldfaced text at the top of the rectangle
is the label. Under the label are the item details, which
determine how the item will apply to the element columns.
A linking arc extends from each side of the rectangle to
delineate which element columns are constrained by this item. A small
square handle sits on the midpoint of each arc. The handle is used to
reassign the connecting item to other elements.
The Connecting Arcs
Connecting items are linked to columns by arcs. These arcs specify which
elements are being modified by the connecting items. When the item is first
placed in the connection area, it is always connected to adjacent columns.
A connecting item can apply to any two elements anywhere in the construct. To
change one of the connections of an item to another column, move one of
the arcs by dragging its handle to the desired new location. When the mouse
is over the handle, the cursor changes to a two-headed arrow, enabling you
to drag the arc to a new location above another element column. The arcs
and items automatically center themselves between the columns to which
they are connected.
10-8
drag the handle of
the arc to widen
or narrow the
connecting constraint
Performing the Search
Click OK in either the Construct window or the Search window to which it is linked.
After the search, the Search window is automatically brought to the front so that you
can see the results.
A dialog box reminds you if there is no appropriate linked window.
The Element Items
WORD
When you drag the WORD item into a column, the Select words dialog box appears.
This dialog box allows you to select one or more words from every word that
occurs in the text. In the constructs for morphologically tagged texts, the INFLECT,
LEX, and ROOT items replace the WORD item. (See Chapters G2 and G4, Greek and
Hebrew Constructs.)
The Select Words dialog box functions in the Simple Construct window in the same
way as in the Search window with one minor difference: the default word list in the
box is the first non-tagged text in the text pop-up menu. If you select a different
text from the menu, it becomes the default for subsequent WORD items in that
Construct window.
As an alternative to using the Select Words dialog box, you can simply click OK in the
dialog box and type the desired word directly into the column. You can also use
the wild-card characters and related symbols as described in Chapter 8. When you
perform the search, Accordance verifies that your input is a valid word. If it is not,
the Select words dialog box appears and highlights the word closest in spelling to
the word you have entered. You can then select the word you want to enter. (See
Chapter 7-Doing Searches.)
KEY
The KEY item applies only to texts which include information such as Strong’s
numbers, as described in Chapter 9. When you drag the KEY item into a column, the
Select Key Numbers dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to select one
or more Key numbers from those that occur in the text.
The Select Key Numbers dialog box functions in the Simple Construct window in the
same way as in the Search window with one minor difference: the default word list
in the box is the first Keyed text in the text pop-up menu. If you select a different
text from the menu, it becomes the default for subsequent KEY items in that
Construct window.
Searching the Bible
10-9
10
Graphical Searches
Wildcards
Use wildcards to define the WORD and KEY items in the same way as in the Search
window. For example WORD * finds any word, and KEY * finds only words with
Key numbers.
CHARACTER
The CHAR. item is equivalent to the Single Character search using a period in the
Search window entry section, and described in Chapter 8.
Used alone it finds any word that includes the
specified character.
When combined with other criteria it specifies
that the word must also include this
character.
When you drag the CHAR. item to a column,
a dialog box appears that allows you to
specify the character. It also reminds you
that you can enter a space first in order to
see backstrike accents and other characters in the box and in
the item itself.
For example, this construct finds any question ending in here?.
If you enter multiple characters, the construct will
find any word with one or more of the characters.
HITS
The HITS item is equivalent to the HITS command in
the Search window described in Chapter 8. It uses
the word list from the specified window.
When you drag the HITS item to a column, and there
is more than one appropriate window, a dialog box
appears that allows you to choose the window for
linking, and select the list of words, Key numbers,
lemmas or tags as appropriate for the
search text.
For example, this construct finds all
words with the Key numbers found in
the KJVS window, when they are also
the fifth word in the search field.
10-10
COUNT
The COUNT item is equivalent to the COUNT
command in the Search window described in
Chapter 8. It limits the search to words that
occur the specified number of times in the
search range.
When you drag the HITS item to a column, a
dialog box appears that allows you to set
the count or range and select from the list
of words, Key numbers, lemmas or tags as appropriate for the search text.
For example, this construct finds words beginning with a which are tagged
with a Key number that occurs three time in the range.
PLACE
Use the PLACE item to specify what position in the search field an element must
occupy. For example, if your search field is Sentence, a PLACE of 2 means that
this element must be the second word in the sentence in order for your search
criteria to be met.
When you drag the PLACE item to a column,
a dialog box appears that allows you to
specify a single number in the first box, or a
range of numbers using both boxes.
Because its purpose is to further constrain an
element, the PLACE item cannot be the first
item at the top of an element column.
A single number in the PLACE item does not imply a range of numbers. Entering a
number in each box allows you to specify a range of positions within the search
field where the element must be found.
Using Multiple Items to Define an Element
You can place more than one element item in the same column. Each item can appear
only once in a column, but any combination of WORD, KEY, and PLACE can be used
to define an element. The resulting “hit” word in the search text must match each
item in the column, although alternative details can be specified within an item.
Searching the Bible
10-11
10
Graphical Searches
Example of Element Definition
This example illustrates the definition of an element:
You wish to find the words man or Adam when they translate the Hebrew word adam
and occur in the first five words of the verse.
To do this, first drag the WORD item from the palette to the top of the first element
column. When the Select Words dialog box appears, select Adam and man and
click OK. Now drag the KEY item into the column below WORD. This brings up the
Select Key Numbers dialog box. Select H0120 and H0121 and click OK.
Drag the PLACE item to the same column, and enter 1 in the first box and 5 in the
second, and click OK.
To perform the search, make sure the construct is linked to a Search window and click
OK.
Here are the results of the search:
NOT
The NOT palette item negates other items. Dragging NOT over an item negates the
entire item and is shown as a diagonal slash over the item. In general, the first
item in a column must be positive. For example, the NOT item can be applied to
the PLACE item to specify a location or range where the element cannot appear in
the search field.
In this example the search words may occur anywhere except in the third to tenth
places in the current field.
To remove the NOT item from an element item in a column, drag the NOT palette item
again onto the element that displays a slash.
10-12
Negating the First Item in a Column
If you place the NOT item over the top element item in the column, the entire column
is negated. This signifies that you do not want that element to appear in this
position in your construct. There are limitations on the use of the connecting items
with a negative column, and these are described at the end of this chapter.
Example of a Negative Column
The following example illustrates the use of the NOT item in the first element of a construct:
You want to find woman when it is not immediately preceded by an article.
Drag the WORD element item into the first element column and release the mouse, so
that the Select Words dialog box appears. Click OK and type a, the into the item
details area. Drag another WORD element item into the second element column
and enter woman.
Drag the NOT item over the first element. A slash appears over the element.
Make sure your Construct window is linked to a Search window, and click OK in either
the Search window or the Construct window to perform the search.
The construct finds woman where it is not immediately preceded by the or a.
Searching the Bible
10-13
10
Graphical Searches
The Connecting Items
WITHIN
The WITHIN item specifies the maximum separation between two elements. WITHIN
with a value of 2 specifies that there cannot be more than one intervening word
between the two elements. If WITHIN is not used, elements in adjacent columns
represent adjacent words.
When you drag the WITHIN connecting
item into the connection area above two
columns, the WITHIN dialog box appears:
This dialog box enables you to specify the word
separation between the first element and
the second. Entering a single number in
the first box specifies a range of 1 to that
number of words. For example, an entry of
5 means that there can be from 0 to 4 words between the two elements.
You can also specify a range for WITHIN. For example, if you enter 4 in the first
box and 8 in the second, then at least 3 words but not more than 7 words may
intervene between the elements.
Unlike the PLACE item, a single number in the WITHIN item implies a range. To specify
a distance of exactly 4 words between elements, enter 4 in each box in the WITHIN
dialog box. The range limits have the same meaning for the WITHIN connecting
item as for the WITHIN command described in chapter 6.
Note: The WITHIN item does not override the current field setting. For example, if the
field is set to Verse, a WITHIN of 500 words does not extend the search beyond
verse boundaries.
Example of WITHIN
The following example illustrates the use of the WITHIN item:
You will notice that in the previous example some occurrences of woman did have
a preceding article but with an adjective between the article and woman, so they
were not eliminated from the search.
To broaden the word separation to include these cases drag the WITHIN connecting
item into the area above the two columns. Enter 2 into the WITHIN dialog box and
click OK.
Make sure your Construct window is linked to a Search window, and click OK in either
the Search window or the Construct window to perform the search. The results are
shown opposite.
10-14
WITHIN Applies to Intervening Columns
The WITHIN item affects the intervening columns beneath the arcs. These
intervening elements can occur anywhere in the range of words. That is,
they no longer need to be adjacent
to one another, even though the
WITHIN item does not directly
connect to them.
To specify that intervening elements
are adjacent, use another WITHIN
with a setting of 1 to connect them,
as illustrated here:
Using NOT with WITHIN
The NOT item can be used with the WITHIN item to specify a range where the
elements cannot be found.
Placing the NOT item over a WITHIN
with a setting of 3 means that the
elements connected by the WITHIN
cannot be within one to three words
of one another. NOT WITHIN can
only connect columns which are
enclosed or connected by another
WITHIN item.
Searching the Bible
10-15
10
Graphical Searches
INTER
The INTER item allows you to specify words that can occur but are not required
between the elements in the columns. INTER limits the words that can occur
between two elements to those that match the criteria defined in the INTER. If no
word occurs between the two elements, the INTER item is ignored. Therefore a
word specified in an INTER item may or may not occur in the text, but all words
which do occur in the text between the two elements connected by INTER must
match the INTER criteria.
This INTER specifies that only the words and or or may appear between
the two elements below.
Used with WITHIN
Since INTER refers to words that can occur between elements, the
WITHIN connecting item must be used so that it encloses or
connects the columns joined by the INTER item. When the WITHIN
item is used by itself, any word can appear between the elements
constrained by the WITHIN. If the INTER item is also used, it
specifies exactly which word or words can appear between the two elements.
Using INTER
When you drag the INTER connecting item above the elements between which
you want to specify the intervening words, the INTER item appears above
the element columns. The first time you use INTER in a Construct window, a
dialog box appears to remind you that you must drag element items into the
INTER item to define the intervening forms.
Define INTER Like an Element Column
The INTER item holds the criteria that define the words which can occur
between the elements. To define these criteria, drag element items into the
INTER item in the same way as for an element column. You can also move
items between the element columns and the INTER item.
When you drag an element item into the INTER item, the same dialog box
appears as when you define this item in an element column. Thus, if you
drag the WORD item into the INTER item, the Select words dialog box
appears and allows you to specify which words can appear between the
elements constrained by the INTER.
INTER Applies to Intervening Columns
When the INTER item connects non-adjacent
columns, the constraints also apply to the
intervening element columns. Be especially
careful with INTER items constraining nonadjacent columns, as they may define a logically
impossible construct, as illustrated here:
10-16
These element columns require that the word milk appear between land and
honey, while the INTER item states that the only word which can intervene
between land and honey is the word and.
Using NOT with INTER
The NOT item can be used to negate the entire INTER item or to negate aspects
of the definition of the intervening forms.
Negating the entire INTER item
Negating the entire INTER item specifies what
words must not appear between the elements
connected by INTER. When you use a NOT to
negate the entire INTER, any word can appear
between the connected elements except those
that match the criteria in the negative INTER.
drag the NOT item
over the top or
bottom to make
the entire INTER
negative
To negate the entire INTER item, drag the NOT
palette item over the word INTER at the top of
the item, or over the bottom portion of the INTER item. A slash appears over
the word INTER.
This INTER item specifies that any words can intervene between the elements
except for man with a Key number H0120.
Negating individual items in INTER
Negating individual items in the INTER item
works in exactly the same way as in an
element column. You can negate a portion of
the INTER definition to limit the words that
match the criteria. When you negate items
in the INTER item, the INTER itself is still
positive; that is, it defines the words that can
appear between the two elements.
drag the NOT item
over a section to
negate an individual
item
To negate an individual item in the INTER item,
drag the NOT palette item over that portion of the INTER definition. A slash
appears over that portion.
This INTER item specifies that man without the Key number H0120 is the only
word allowed between the two elements, but it is not required. It allows man
with any other or no Key number.
Note: The first item in an INTER cannot be negative. To make the entire INTER
negative, drag the NOT item over the INTER title.
Searching the Bible
10-17
10
Graphical Searches
Example of INTER
The following example illustrates the use of the INTER connecting item:
You want to find some examples of man with beast.
Create two columns with man and beast.
Drag the WITHIN connecting item above the first and second columns and enter 2 in
the dialog box.
Drag the INTER connecting item below the WITHIN. Drag the WORD palette item into
the INTER item and enter and.
Make sure that your Construct window is linked to the Search window and click OK in
either window to perform the search. So far you have found only man and beast.
Now drag the NOT palette item over the INTER label and repeat the search.
The search now finds cases where man and beast are two words apart with any
intervening word except and.
10-18
AGREE
The AGREE connecting item is used to specify that certain details of two elements
must match. This item can also be used together with NOT to specify that the
details must not match.
When you drag the AGREE item into the connection area above the elements you wish
to constrain, the AGREE dialog box for English texts opens.
The AGREE Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to specify the type of
agreement between the two elements. To select a
detail in the dialog box, click anywhere on the name
of the detail or inside its checkbox. You can select
both details.
In non-tagged texts you can specify agreement in
Word, and in Key number texts also in Key number.
Lemmatized German Bibles use the KEY item and
agreement in Key to specify the lemma. Morphologically tagged original
texts offer many more options for agreement in the type of word and in the
grammatical tagging. See the Grammatical Supplement, Chapters G2 and G4.
The two elements connected by the arcs of the AGREE item must agree for
each detail checked in the dialog box. When you click OK to close the
dialog box, the selected details appear as text within the rectangle of
the AGREE item. If you double-click on an AGREE item already defined
in the connection area, the AGREE dialog box appears and shows the
current settings for that item.
Using NOT with AGREE
The NOT item can be used with the AGREE item to specify the details in which
the connected elements cannot agree. Placing the NOT item over an AGREE
item negates the detail specified in the item. If there is more than one detail
in the item, the linked elements will be excluded from the search results
only if they agree on both details. If the elements agree in word but not in
number, or vice-versa, they would be included in the search results. Separate
AGREE items are used to specify that two elements must not agree in word
and must not agree in Key number.
Searching the Bible
10-19
10
Graphical Searches
Example of AGREE
This example illustrates the use of AGREE:
You notice that the expressions “surely die” and “greatly multiply” often translate
intensive forms where the Hebrew verb occurs twice, and you decide to look for
other examples.
Drag the WORD item into the first column, and select greatly and surely.
Drag a KEY item into the second column, click OK and enter an asterisk (this requires
that this word have a Key number).
Drag AGREE into the connection area and click the Key Number checkbox.
Add a WITHIN constraint of 5 words, and click OK.
Make sure that your Construct window is linked to the Search window, click OK in
either the Search window or the Construct window to perform the search.
Connecting to a Negative Column
The WITHIN and AGREE connecting commands can be used with a negative element column
with certain limitations:
10-20
•
The negative column is defined like a positive column, with a NOT over the top
element item.
•
INTER cannot connect to a negative column
•
A negative column must be enclosed by a WITHIN item unless it is the first or last
column.
•
The negative column can be connected only to one adjacent positive column by
WITHIN and AGREE items.
•
Only a positive WITHIN can connect to a negative column.
•
Both AGREE and NOT AGREE can connect to a negative column.
Logic of AGREE with a Negative
Column
1
2
3
4
5
6
Although the logic may not be
completely consistent, Accordance
handles these cases in the following
way:
Each example finds surely or greatly
when it is:
1. followed by any other word
2. NOT followed by any word
3. followed by a word which agrees
in Key number
4. followed by a word which does
NOT agree in Key number
5. NOT followed by a word which
agrees in Key number
6. NOT followed a word which does
NOT agree (i.e is either followed
by no word, or by a word which
does agree).
Example of AGREE with Negative Columns
The following example illustrates AGREE with a negative column.
In the previous example, you now want to find surely or greatly when they are not
used to intensify a verb. Simply drag the NOT over the KEY with the asterisk and
repeat the search.
Searching the Bible
10-21
10
Graphical Searches
Example of Negative Column with Multiple Connecting Commands
This example illustrates the use of several connecting
items with a negative column.
It shows a search for I followed by multiply with
up to 9 intervening words. The negative column
eliminates from the results any verse in which
the intensive form (defined as a preceding word
which does not agree in word but does agree in Key
number) is used within 3 words of multiply.
Using Multiple Construct Windows
You can use multiple Construct windows in the same search by using the LINK command in the
argument entry box of the Search window, together with other valid search entry commands.
Thus the entry [LINK Simple construct.1] <OR> [LINK Simple construct.2] will find cases
where either construct is found, and the entry [LINK Simple construct.1] <AND> [LINK
Simple construct.2] will find cases where both constructs are found in the same field. The
search entry commands are described in detail in Chapter 8.
10-22
11
Getting Details
Chapter Contents:
The Details Workspace .................................. 11-2
Characteristics of Details Windows............... 11-2
Graphs and Charts......................................... 11-3
Hits Graph ..................................................... 11-4
Analysis Graph .............................................. 11-7
Analysis Bar Chart ......................................... 11-8
Analysis Pie Chart ....................................... 11-10
Table Bar Chart............................................ 11-11
Analysis ....................................................... 11-12
Concordance................................................ 11-17
Table ............................................................ 11-19
11
Getting Details
The Details Workspace
After you perform a search, the Details button on the Search window becomes active. Clicking
the button (or pressing ⌘-') opens a Details workspace in which you can see various kinds of
analysis of the search results: Graphs and Charts, Analysis, Concordance, and Table. These
windows offer different ways to view the results of your search
The Details workspace is somewhat
similar to the workspace for all other
types of windows which is described in
Chapter 22.
The workspace is a window in which
multiple contents are displayed as tabs.
The title of the workspace reflects the
Search window to which it belongs. The
four Add: buttons below the title allow
you to add a tab displaying a particular
type of analysis.
The default tabs that open when
you click Details can be set in the
Search window page of Preferences
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,). By
default, only Hits Graph is checked for new users, but users who upgrade from version 5 may
find that none of these are checked initially. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.)
The Tools window for Reference tools also offers Hits Graph and Table details. See Chapter 14
for the Details of Reference Tools.
Characteristics of Details Windows
In this chapter the description of each type of window applies also to the tab within the
workspace.
Linked to Search Window
Details workspaces and windows remain “linked” to the parent Search window and
relate to the entire search result. They can be opened only when the Search window
is displaying search results. They are automatically updated whenever the contents
of the Search window change, and they close when the Search window is closed.
Pressing ⌘-' in a Search window opens the Details workspace, and pressing ⌘-' in any
Details window brings to the front the Search window to which it belongs.
Details windows cannot be saved and reopened as independent files in Accordance.
However, when a Search window is saved, any open details windows are saved and
recalled with it.
11-2
Saving, Printing, and Copying
The text of an Analysis, Concordance, or Table window can be printed or saved as a
text file. A Graph or Chart window can be printed or saved in PICT format.
You can copy and paste text from Analysis, Concordance, and Table windows into
other Accordance windows or other programs, using the Edit menu commands.
When a Graph window is in front, selecting Copy (Edit menu or ⌘-C) places a PICT
image of the window in the clipboard so you can paste it into another program.
Amplifying from Details Windows
You can select a word in an Analysis, Concordance, or Table window, and amplify to
a text, tool, or Search All by selecting the item from the Resource palette (or
Amplify menu). The search is performed for the language of the selection. If you
select a Key number, you can amplify to a Keyed Bible text or a dictionary with the
same key numbers.
Right-click or control-click in a Details window opens a contextual menu with the
relevant options for that window.
New Tabs and Windows
A Details tab can be converted to an independent window
by selecting Detach Tab (Window menu or option-⌘T). It remains linked to its parent Search window. It can
be merged into a workspace with other details windows
belonging to the same Search window, by selecting Merge
Windows (Window menu or option-⌘-M).
Although each window automatically updates to show
new search results, you may wish to have more than
one window of the same type, with different display
characteristics, such as different analyses of the results.
Clicking one of the Add: buttons always adds a new tab to
the workspace.
Clicking the Details button when a Details workspace is
already open, brings that workspace to the front. It does
not open any new tabs or create another workspace. You
can create a new Details workspace by selecting Duplicate
(File menu), or by merging separate Details windows.
Other features of the Details workspace are similar to
the workspace for other windows. See Chapter 22-The
Workspace for details on the use of tabs and the workspace.
Digging Deeper
11-3
11
Getting Details
Graphs and Charts
The first Add button opens a pop-up menu with several kinds of
graphs and charts. Selecting one adds a new tab of that kind to the
Details workspace. A single click opens the last graph or chart selected
from the list, or the Hits Graph if none has been selected.
Hits Graph
The Hits Graph window displays a graph which shows the density of your hits throughout
the search range. This allows you to identify trends in your search results. To open a Graph
window click the Graph button on the Details workspace.
The Graph is displayed in the Graph window with the vertical axis representing the density of
hits and the horizontal axis representing the search range. For example, clicking Graph after
a search of the entire KJV for clauses
that contain words beginning with king,
displays this Graph:
This Graph shows the frequency of
occurrences in the search range. Each
vertical bar in the Graph represents
the number of hits per thousand words
at that point in the search range. Each
short heavy bar below the horizontal
axis represents a book or division. The
names of the books are shown only if
they can fit without overlapping other
book names.
Graphs of Non-adjacent
Ranges
If the search range is not continuous,
a vertical dotted line in the Graph
shows places where the range
skips a portion of the search text.
For example, a graph of the same
search in Proverbs and the Song of
Solomon looks like this:
Linking to the Results
Double-clicking anywhere inside the Graph frame scrolls the text panes to the
corresponding location in the search results.
11-4
Resizing the Window
If you resize the window, the graph is redrawn and more or less detail may be
included along the horizontal axis.
Superimposing Graphs
The Graph window allows you to superimpose up to seven graphs in the same window.
Each graph appears in a different color. The legend below the graph displays the
search argument for each color.
Clicking on a name in the graph legend, where the cursor becomes an X, removes that
name and plot from the graph.
The two buttons in the lower right corner let you choose which Graphs are displayed.
Clicking the Keep button tells Accordance to keep the current Graph next time you do
a search in the related Search window, and to superimpose the graph of the new
results on the current graph. After you click this button, it is dimmed to indicate
that this graph will be saved. The first time you click this button you will get a
reminder that the graph is kept only if the search text and range are not changed
for the subsequent search.
Pressing shift while clicking OK to
perform a new search also keeps
the previous graph.
The Clear button is dimmed unless
there are two or more Graphs
in the window. Clicking this
button clears the graphs in the
background, leaving only the
results of the current search.
This example shows the results
of searches for two different
names for God in the first three
chapters of Genesis.
Setting Hits Graph Display Options
When a Hits Graph window is the front window, select Set Graph Display… (Display or
contextual menu, or ⌘-T) to change the frequency of hits and to set the appearance and colors
of the graph.
The Words per hit: box lets you change the sample size of the plot. You can enter any
number between 100 and 10,000. An entry of 100 means that each bar represents
the number of hits in the 100 words surrounding that point in the search range.
To display the frequency of hits at each point in the search range, the graph uses
overlapping samples from the search range. Thus, you cannot count the number of
hits in an entire book or section from the graph. Rather, the graph should be used
to spot trends in usage through the search range. To display a count of hits in a
book or chapter of the search range, use the Table Bar Chart or Table items.
Digging Deeper
11-5
11
Getting Details
If you change the Words
per hit, it will affect
only the present and
subsequent graphs, not
any graphs you have
kept. If you click the
Keep button and then
change the Words per
hit, the same search
results are plotted again
in the next color and
with the new setting.
The Display buttons affect
the drawing of the
graph, and make most
difference when there
are fewer sample points:
•
Bars displays a
vertical bar at each
sample point
•
Lines draws a line
connecting the
sample points
•
Areas fills in the
shape under the line.
The Superimpose as buttons apply to multiple graphs:
•
Overlay uses the same baseline for each graph with the older appearing
behind newer graphs but still visible through the transparent colors
•
Stack creates a separate graph for each result, one above the other.
Show sum of hits adds another graph with the totals of the graphs currently
showing.
The Graph appearance section has two checkboxes:
•
Show grid adds a faint gray grid to the background
•
Use black background
does what it says, and is
particularly effective in
presentations.
The example shows the same graph
as before, with different settings:
areas, stack, Grid, and black
background.
11-6
The Graph colors pop-up menus allow you to customize the color in which each
graph is displayed. Up to seven different graphs (and the sum of the hits) can
be kept in the graph window at one time, and the color of each is regulated by a
numbered pop-up menu. To change the color of one of the graphs, simply choose a
new color from the corresponding pop-up menu.
The labels beside the colors refer to the current sequence of graphs. Therefore if you
have two graphs showing, and you clear the first (earliest) graph, the color of the
remaining graph will change to the color of the first pop-up menu setting.
Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the
changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Hits
Graph windows for this text.
Note: Since there are so many graph defaults which can be saved for each text,
Accordance does not save each detail of each type of graph. A setting which
applies to more than one type of graph is saved only once. So, if you set the black
background as the default, it will be used for every new graph for this text. If you
add the grid as a default it will also appear in the Analysis Graph which supports
this property. Similarly, color changes apply to each graph or chart, for the text.
Once open, each graph can be set independently, it is only the defaults which are
combined.
Analysis Graph
This graph is similar to the Hits
Graph as it displays the hits
across the search range.
It can display multiple
hits, not from additional
searches, but by splitting up
the hits of one search, and
displaying the top seven
results.
This example shows the results
of searches for abra* in the
book of Genesis, broken
down by Word.
Only the top seven results in the class are displayed.
The legend shows the color used for each result. Clicking on a name in the graph
legend, where the cursor becomes an X, removes that result from the graph.
Digging Deeper
11-7
11
Getting Details
Analysis Class Pop-up Menu
The pop-up menu in the lower right allows you to
select a different class to analyse.
If the text is not tagged, only Word is available, and
this graph is useful only for wildcard searches.
For Key number texts you can select Word or Key Number.
Morphologically tagged texts offer more options, similar to those in the
Analysis window (see below), except that here you can select only one
class. The options include LEX, INFLECT, TAG and the appropriate
classes of parsing information. This pop-up menu shows the classes
available for Greek texts.
Setting Analysis Graph Display Options
When an Analysis Graph
window is the front window,
select Set Graph Display…
(Display or contextual
menu, or ⌘-T) to change the
frequency of hits and to set
the appearance and colors of
the graph.
This dialog box is similar
to the Hits Graph
dialog box, with the
addition of the Analysis
class pop-up menu
which offers the same
options the menu on
the graph window
itself, depending on the
current search text.
Clicking OK applies these
settings to the front
window. Click Cancel to
discard all the changes.
Clicking Use as Default
makes these settings the
default for new Analysis
Graph windows for this
text.
11-8
Analysis Bar Chart
This chart displays the results of the
search with the total number in
each class as simple bars, without
the distribution across the range
of the search. The label on each
bar shows the word or form
found, and the total count.
The legend below the graph gives the
search argument.
This example shows the same search
for abra* in Genesis.
The Analysis class pop-up menu
in the lower right allows you
to select a different class to
analyse. It is identical to the
menu on the Analysis Graph
window.
Up to 128 bars can be displayed at
once, in up to 4 columns. This
example shows all words with
Key numbers in Genesis 1:1-5.
Setting Analysis Bar Chart Display Options
When an Analysis Bar Chart
window is the front window,
select Set Graph Display…
(Display or contextual menu, or
⌘-T) to set the appearance and
colors of the graph.
The Analysis class pop-up
menu is just like the menu
on the graph window
itself.
The Chart detail section
affects the contents of the
chart:
•
Show count on:
Left, Right, None
determines the position
of the numerical
label on each bar. The
number is suppressed
on the left if the bars
are too crowded.
Digging Deeper
11-9
11
Getting Details
The Chart colors section allows you to:
•
Use black background and
•
Use identical colors for each of the bars, for a simpler look, or
•
Customize the repeating colors for each seven bars using the color pop-up
menus. To change one of the colors, simply choose a new color from the
corresponding pop-up menu.
Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all
the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new
Analysis Bar Chart windows for this text.
Analysis Pie Chart
This chart displays the same information as the Bar Chart, but in the familiar “pie
chart” form.
Each segment is labeled with its name
and a count of the number. Only a
limited number of items in a class
can be shown.
The legend below the graph gives the
search argument.
This example shows the same search
for abra* in Genesis.
The Analysis class pop-up menu
in the lower right allows you to
select a different class to
analyse. It is identical to
the menu on the Analysis
Graph window.
Setting Analysis Pie
Chart Display Options
When an Analysis Pie Chart
window is the front window,
select Set Graph Display…
(Display or contextual menu, or
⌘-T) to set the appearance and
colors of the graph.
The Analysis class pop-up
menu is just like the menu
on the graph window
itself.
11-10
The Chart details affect the contents of the chart:
•
Show count on: Below, Right, None determines the position of the
numerical label relative to each name.
•
Count as percentage gives the hits as a percentage of the number of hits
displayed, instead of the actual number.
Note: If the number of items in the class is relatively small, they are all
displayed on the pie chart and included in the percentage count. However,
if there are many items in the class, such as inflected forms or words,
those words that make up about 1% or less of the total are included
neither in the chart nor in the percentage calculation, although together
they may form a significant percentage of the total hits.
The Chart colors section allows you to:
•
Use black background and
•
Customize the repeating colors for each seven bars.
Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all
the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new
Analysis Pie Chart windows for this text.
Table Bar Chart
This chart displays graphically the
information shown in the Table
details described below. It shows
all the hits organized by their
location.
This example shows the search for
abra* in the Pentateuch.
Each bar is labeled with the book or chapter and the count.
Up to 128 bars can be displayed at once, in up to 4 columns.
The legend below the graph gives the search argument.
The Display pop-up menu in the lower right allows you to select what
is counted in each book.
•
Average Hits displays the
hits per 1000 words
•
Total Hits displays the count
of hits themselves
•
Total Words displays the
number of words
•
Total Verses displays the
number of verses.
The second example shows a count
down of the chapter breakdown of
average hits in Genesis.
Digging Deeper
11-11
11
Getting Details
Setting Table Bar Chart Display Options
When a Table Bar Chart window
is the front window, select Set
Graph Display… (Display or
contextual menu, or ⌘-T) to set
the detail and color of the graph.
The Display pop-up menu is
just like the menu on the
graph window itself.
The Chart details affect the
contents of the chart:
•
Show count on:
Left, Right, None
determines the position
of the numerical
label on each bar. The
number is suppressed
on the left if the bars
are too crowded.
•
Sort by count sorts
the books or chapters
in the order of the
count, instead of the default Biblical order.
•
Show chapter detail specifies that you want to see the results for each
chapter of the search range.
The Chart colors section allows you to:
•
Use black background and
•
Set the color for all the bars in the Color pop-up menu.
Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the
changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Table
Bar Chart windows for this text.
Analysis
The Analysis window enables you to view a statistical and categorical breakdown of the
results of your search. Much more than simply giving a count of occurrences, this powerful
Accordance feature gives you the ability to categorize and examine the “hits” from your search.
To view the analysis of your search results, click the Analysis button on the Details
workspace.
The following Analysis window shows the search of the KJV for clauses with words
beginning with king.
11-12
number of search fields containing hits
number of verses displayed
total number of hits
total number of forms
breakdown of hits
The Analysis Window
The first line of the Analysis window displays the number of search fields that
contain the search argument. The search field is set using the search field pop-up
menu in the search entry section. In the search for king*, the search field was set
to Clause. There are 3173 clauses in the KJV that contain a word beginning with
king. The wording of this line changes to reflect the current setting in the search
field pop-up menu.
The second line of the Analysis window shows the total number of verses
displayed. This number matches the number following Verse # of at the top left
of the text panes in the Search window. In this example, 3028 verses are displayed.
This is smaller than the number of clauses because one verse may include several
“hit” clauses. This number may also be greater than the number of clauses because
many sentences (especially in the Greek New Testament) cross verse boundaries.
The next item in the Analysis window displays the search argument for each
expression, and the number of occurrences in the search results. This is the
number of “hits” in the current search. In this example, there are 3274 words
beginning with king. This number is greater than the number of clauses because
sometimes there is more than one matching word in a single clause.
The fourth line shows the number of forms found, such as capitalization or
punctuation even when there is no wildcard.
The font size buttons let you quickly adjust the display between small, medium and
large.
Digging Deeper
11-13
11
Getting Details
Categorizing and Analyzing the Hits
The bottom section of the window displays
information about the forms that matched
the search criteria. The above example shows
the count of each word found from a single
wildcard expression. In the search for a phrase
or construct, a dashed line separates the analysis
of each word. In the following example, there are
32 hits of the word give, 23 of glory, and 9 of
strength.
Note: If the same individual word meets the
search criteria more than once within
the same field, each hit is counted
separately. In this search in the King
James Version for give followed by
glory or strength within 10 words,
sometimes give is followed by both
glory and strength. Both of these
match the search argument and the
give is counted twice.
Setting the Analysis Display for Non-tagged Texts
If you are searching a non-tagged
text, choosing Set Analysis
Display… (Display or contextual
menu, or ⌘-T) brings up this dialog
box:
The Font size pop-up menu
controls the size of the text
in the Analysis window. The
options in this pop-up menu
are Small, Medium, and Large.
The Sort pop-up menu controls the order of the sort in the Analysis window.
•
Alphabetical sorts the words from A to Z.
•
Count down lists the word with the highest count first and moves
down to the one with the lowest.
•
Count up lists the words in increasing order, from the word with the
lowest count to the word with the highest.
The Count pop-up menu lets you choose the statistical method by which
each word is counted.
11-14
•
Number displays the total number of times each word appears in
the current search range (hits).
•
Frequency enables you to identify the words which appear most
frequently in the current search range. This number shows the
number of hits per 1000 words in the search range.
•
Uniqueness enables you to identify those words which are more or less
unique to the current search range. This number is computed by dividing
the frequency of hits in the search range by the frequency of verses
containing this word in the entire text.
•
Importance enables you to identify those words which are most important
in the current search range. This number is computed by multiplying the
number of hits in the search range by the uniqueness of each word defined
above.
•
None displays the words without any count.
The following examples show the Analysis window following a search for all words (asterisk) in
Genesis 2.
The first window shows the Number of each word, sorted alphabetically. Notice that
Adam occurs only 6 times in the chapter, much less than many other words.
In the second window the Count down option sorts the words with the most frequent
at the top.
In the third window the Frequency is shown. This number shows the number of
hits per 1000 words in the search range. This keeps the words in the same sort
order as the count, but gives a number which is useful for comparing with other
passages.
The next window displays the Uniqueness. This number is computed by dividing the
frequency of hits in the search range by the frequency of verses containing this
word in the entire text. Pison is shown with an asterisk as it occurs only in this
passage. The next three words occur once in this passage, and once elsewhere in
the KJV, so their relative “uniqueness” is very high. Adam appears in ninth place
which reflects the fact that this passage includes 6 of a total of 30 occurrences of
the word.
Digging Deeper
11-15
11
Getting Details
The last window shows the count by Importance. This number is computed by
multiplying the number of hits in the search range by the uniqueness of each word
(as defined above). Adam is now at the top of the list, with Garden in fourth place
(the chapter includes 5 out of 52 uses of the word), showing that these words
probably have particular significance in the passage.
Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all
the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new
Analysis windows for this text.
Analysis of Keyed Bible Texts
The Bible texts with Key numbers
such as Strong’s allow you to view
a breakdown of the different Key
numbers found by your search. This
is the default display for Keyed Bible
texts.
When you select Set Analysis
Display… (Display or
contextual menu, or ⌘-T) for a
Keyed text, this dialog box appears.
In addition to the options described above,
the Show Key Number checkbox lets you
display the analysis of all the Key numbers
found for each word in the results.
Checking the box displays an analysis of the
different Greek and Hebrew words translated
by this word.
The example shows a search for field. The
Key number and English transliteration are
displayed with the original dictionary form in
Greek or Hebrew.
Only the Alphabetical sort option can be used
when Key numbers are shown, but the
various count options are available.
When the search argument is a Key number
search, the analysis shows all the English
words which translate that original word.
The Key number could be shown under each
word, but in this case they will all be the
same.
You can select a Key number in the Analysis
window, and amplify to a Keyed Bible text, or
a dictionary that uses the same Key numbers,
and Accordance will search that module for
the Key number.
11-16
Analysis of Morphologically Tagged Texts
The Set Analysis Display dialog box for morphologically tagged texts offers many additional
options for sorting and displaying the results. These options are described in detail in Chapter
G5-Grammatical Amplify Windows.
Using the Word Lists
The Analysis window lets you create a list of words (hit words or all words) from the current
text and range. You can use this window to see the words sorted alphabetically or by their
frequency (or the other types of count). If you want to see just the list of words, you must use
Set Analysis Display… (Display or contextual menu, or ⌘-T), and remove both the count and
the Key number display, if present.
Hint: The plain list can now be copied and pasted, (or dragged and dropped) into the
argument entry box, the carriage returns are stripped, and replaced by commas.
Concordance
Clicking the Concordance button
opens the Concordance window which
analyses your entire search result
similarly to a printed concordance.
The window lists all the “hit”
lemmas (or words, that were
found in the search), followed by
the number of each hit.
Below each word is a list of the
verse references for each hit
throughout the Concordance
range, followed by an excerpt
of the text before and after each
hit. The highlight color and style
match the default highlight color
and style of the search text.
Note: The excerpt does not appear
with some Bible texts (older
Accordance modules).
Digging Deeper
11-17
11
Getting Details
Setting Concordance Display Options
Selecting Set Concordance Display (Display
or contextual menu, or ⌘-T) with the
Concordance window in front opens the
Set Concordance Display dialog box.
The Concord radio buttons let you choose to
display verses from the entire text, or just
within the current search range.
•
If you select Entire text for a
search within a limited range, the
Concordance shows all verses in the
entire text that have the hit words.
In this case, no counts of the hits are
shown.
•
Search range only includes only the
excerpts that occur within the range of
the search.
The Font size pop-up menu lets you select
Small, Medium, or Large.
The Excerpt size pop-up menu offers a
range of 1 to 7 words to be displayed
before and after the hit word. Note that
each punctuation is also counted as a word. The exerpt does not extend past the
beginning or end of the verse. (In the Qumran text the excerpts can extend past the
ends of lines.) If the word occurs twice in the same verse, two excerpts are shown.
The Display thresholds options set the limits for the display of text or references for
words that occur often.
•
The Text excerpts box sets the number of verses above which only
references are displayed, without the text excerpt.
•
The References only box sets the number of verses above which only
(common word) is displayed, without any references.
Special options are available for certain texts:
•
Ignore words in brackets box removes from the concordance any words
entirely in brackets, which are often editorial alternatives in certain texts. In
this case, no counts of the hits are shown.
•
Show part of speech (morphologically tagged texts) adds the part of
speech for each lemma.
•
Show lemma on right side, (Hebrew texts) displays the lemma or word to
the right of any other text on that line.
•
Limit context size (Qumran text) ends the excerpt if a period or hyphen
occurs within the specified number of words.
These examples show the same concordance with and without checking all four options.
11-18
Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes.
Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Concordance windows for
this text.
Table
The Table window enables you to view a table
that shows the number of hits and the number of
words per book or chapter in your search range. To
open a Table window click the Table button in the
Details workspace.
If you select this item while viewing the results
from the search for kings, a window similar to this
appears:
Setting Table Display Options
When a Table window is the front window, selecting the Set Table Display… (Display or
contextual menu, or ⌘-T) displays the Set Table Display dialog box shown on the next page:
The Sort by pop-up menu sets the order of the results.
•
Reference sorts by Bible book and chapter. A range of books or
chapters without hits is grouped together.
•
Average Hits sorts by the hit frequency per 1000 words. Books or
chapters with no hits are omitted from the list.
•
Total Hits sorts by the number of hits. Books or chapters with no
hits are omitted from the list.
Digging Deeper
11-19
11
Getting Details
•
Total Words sorts by the number of words in the book or chapter. All the
books or chapters are listed.
•
Total Verses sorts by the number of verses in the book or chapter. All the
books or chapters are listed.
The checkboxes define what is displayed.
•
Show chapter detail specifies that
you want to see the number of hits in
each chapter of the search range. When
sorting by Reference the total for each
book is displayed before the totals for
individual chapters. With other sort
criteria only the chapters are shown
when this box is checked.
•
The Table window always displays the
total number of hits in each section of
the search range. Show average hits
per 1000 words adds a second column of information that displays the
average number of hits. This is helpful when you want to compare usage
across books or chapters of different lengths.
•
Show total verse count adds the actual count of the verses in the books or
chapters of the search.
•
Show total word count adds the actual count of all words in the books or
chapters of the search.
When all four boxes are
checked, and the sort
is by Average Hits, the
resulting table looks like
this:
The Font size pop-up menu
allows you to change the
point size of the font in the
table display.
Note: The word count includes
all punctuation marks.
In Hebrew the count
includes all prefixes and
suffixes.
Hint: To get a count of words excluding punctuation for a specified range, search for
* and use the number of hits.
Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the
changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Table
windows for this text.
11-20
12
Amplify Features
Chapter Contents:
The Amplify Menu......................................... 12-2
Using Amplify Features ................................. 12-3
Special Features of Amplify Windows ........... 12-4
General Features of Amplify Windows .......... 12-4
Triple-click Amplify Shortcuts .................... 12-5
Amplify Details.............................................. 12-5
12
Amplify Features
The Amplify features enable you to explore and analyze your search results, or follow a train
of thought through all your Accordance modules. Simply selecting a word, phrase, or reference
and clicking a button lets you move seamlessly between text and tool modules and the special
features. Amplify features can be accessed from the Resource palette, the Amplify menu, or
the contextual menu. See Chapter 5-Floating Windows for details of setting the display of the
Resource palette to text or icon buttons.
The Amplify Menu
The menu items correspond to the buttons in the Resource
palette described in Chapter 5, with slight differences of
organization. Most items open a submenu listing the modules
or options available in this category. Selecting an item usually
searches that module for the selection that you have in the front
text pane.
Texts:
The first three items open submenus with the English, Greek,
or Hebrew texts available to your Accordance.
Text sets: groups of different texts which you can define
yourself.
Parallels searches the parallel for the reference of the Bible
verse in your selection in a Bible text pane.
Context displays the context of selected verses in the same
Bible text with the same parallel text panes.
Tools:
English Tools such as dictionaries.
Greek and Hebrew Tools such as lexicons or dictionaries.
Reference Tools such as commentaries or Bible notes.
General Tools such as writings.
Tool sets: groups of different tools which you can define yourself.
Background: These items search for a selected name in special windows.
Map displays the background of your choice (requires the Bible Atlas).
Timeline (requires the Bible Timeline).
My Stuff: These items search modules you create yourself: User Tools and User Notes.
User Notes finds the Notes on the verse with your selection in a Bible text pane.
Language: The submenu lets you select from these options:
Parsing displays the parsing details and gloss of selected words in a
text with Keys or grammatical tags.
Diagram opens a window where you can create a grammatical diagram
of the selected words.
Speak reads any selected words audibly.
Syntax opens a syntactical chart of the selected words which you can
edit and annotate.
12-2
Search:
Search searches for the selection in a duplicate of
the current Search or Tool window.
Search All searches all available modules, or a user
defined group of texts, tools, or user tools.
Favorites searches any modules that you have added
to this list.
Note: This chapter introduces you to the available
options in the Amplify features, but the specific
items are described in detail in the following
chapters.
Chapter 13-Amplifying your Selection covers the Search,
Context, and Speak items, and Chapter G5-Grammatical
Amplify Windows describes the Parsing, Diagram, and
Syntax windows.
Amplifying to the maps in the Atlas is described in
Chapter A4, and to the Timeline in Chapter T2.
See Chapter 14-Tools, Chapter 15- Search All Groups and
Tool Sets, Chapter 16-Parallels, Chapter 19-User Notes,
Chapter 20-User Tools for details of amplifying to these
modules.
Chapter 5-Floating Windows describes the Favorites
feature.
Using Amplify Features
To use an Amplify feature, simply select a word, phrase, or verse
reference in a text or tool pane (or in many of the Details, Amplify, or
report windows displaying text), then select the desired item from the
Resource palette or the Amplify menu.
The Contextual menu in any text pane
gives you an appropriate selection of
amplify items depending on the type of
text. See Chapter 24.
In general:
the Search or Search For item will search for the word (or Key number, root, or
lemma) in the same text or tool
Search In lets you search in any of your texts
Look Up amplifies to the first (or last selected) module in the category
Search All lets you select a search all group.
After you select an Amplify item, either a new window appears containing the information
you requested, or an existing window is updated and brought forward.
Digging Deeper
12-3
12
Amplify Features
Special Features of Amplify Windows
Most windows opened by amplifying are recyclable windows. They display the green
recycle symbol in the top right of the window. The window will be reused automatically if the
same Amplify item is selected again under the same conditions. A new recycling window opens
whenever the settings in the pop-up menus of the current window are not appropriate for the
new selection.
For example, if you select Context when the cursor is flashing (or text is selected) in a
pane displaying the KJV, a Text window opens which displays that verse in its context.
If you select a different verse in the KJV and select Context, the same Text window
will display your new verse. However, if you select a verse in a different Bible text
such as the ASV, and select Context, a new text window opens displaying the verse in
the ASV.
When a window is recycled it is bought to the front and becomes the active window,
but only if most of the window was previously hidden from view. If the window is
positioned so that part of it can be seen, the contents will update when the window
is recycled, but the original window remains the front window. This feature lets you
select and amplify repeated portions of the text, without having to click to bring the
window to the front each time.
Clicking on the recycle symbol, or selecting Recycle Contents from the Set submenu
(Window menu or ⌘-K) removes or replaces the recycle symbol in the top right
corner of the front window, and the check mark beside the menu item. This lets you
temporarily preserve the contents of a window while using the same Amplify item, or
to recycle a window that was opened as a new window.
Selecting Duplicate Window (File menu or ⌘-D) makes a copy of the front window,
except for the recycle symbol. This is another way to preserve the current contents of
an independent Amplify window. (See Chapter 23-Working With Windows.)
General Features of Amplify Windows
You can control the display of information in an active Amplify window by choosing Set
windowtype Display… (Display or contextual menu, or ⌘-T). The name of this menu item
changes to reflect the type of window that is currently in front. For example, if a Parsing
window is in front, the item reads Set Parsing Display…. This dialog box allows you to set
display options such as font sizes, parts of speech for parsing, and categories for analyzing
search statistics. The changes you make in this dialog box take effect when you click OK. If
a Search window is the front window, this item sets the display of the selected text pane as
described in Chapter 6.
The options you set using this dialog box apply only to the front window unless you click the
Use as Default button before you close the dialog box. The default settings usually apply
to new windows of the same type opened for the same text. The display options available for
each Amplify item are described in the chapter that explains how to use that item.
Because each of the Amplify items opens a window to display results, the contents of any
Amplify window can be copied to the clipboard, printed, or saved as a text or PICT file. (See
Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
12-4
Triple-click Amplify Shortcuts
A triple-click on a word or verse reference immediately opens the related resource as follows:
If you click in a:
you amplify to:
English word
the first English dictionary
Keyed word
the related Greek or Hebrew dictionary for that text
German word
with lemma
the related German dictionary
Greek word
the first Greek dictionary
Hebrew word
the first Hebrew dictionary
Verse reference in
a text pane
the first Reference tool
Name in the map
or timeline
the default English tool (double-click)
The triple-click can be modified:
by pressing the shift key to amplify to the tool last used in that menu (in a Key
number text, to the last English dictionary).
by pressing command key to open the window as an individual window rather than a
tab in the workspace.
Amplify Details
You do not need to study the following details in order to use the Amplify features to explore a
topic throughout your Accordance library.
When you amplify to a text or tool module, Search All, or Text or Tool Set, the principles
which govern the treatment of the selection or blinking insertion point as a search argument
are as follows:
Verse Reference in a Pane
If the selection is in a verse reference in a Bible text pane
amplifying to a Reference tool or Bible text opens that module to the same
verse.
amplifying to any other tool searches for that verse reference in the Scripture
field.
(If the selection is in a manuscript reference of a non-Biblical text like Qumran,
amplifying to a tool such as Qumran Index will find where that manuscript is
cited.)
Clicking on a hypertextable verse reference in a tool automatically opens a Text
window for that verse.
Selecting a reference in a tool (that is not in the hypertext style) to a Bible or nonBiblical text, and amplifying to that text, finds the reference if the words are not
found in the text.
Digging Deeper
12-5
12
Amplify Features
Text Content of a Pane
If the selection, is in the text content of a Bible or tool text pane, amplifying to any
text or tool module searches the appropriate field for that selection. In the tools
in general the fields with the same language as the selection are searched until a
“hit” is found, and all the “hits” in that field are displayed. Once “hits” are found,
no more fields are searched (for example, if the search argument is found in the
Entry field, the Contents are not searched).
In the same way you can select a word in a Report window (Analysis, Table,
Concordance, Parsing, or Timeline Data), and amplify to any text or tool, using
that language, or to the Map or Timeline. If you select a Key number you can
amplify to a Keyed Bible text or a Keyed dictionary.
Note: When tools are included in the Search All, all fields of the tool that are in the same
language are searched, and the results are summarized in the Search All window.
The Form that is Searched
For most texts and tools Accordance searches for the selected words and phrases in the same
form as in the selection, with certain exceptions for the grammatically tagged Greek and
Hebrew texts: See Chapter G5. However:
A selection in a Keyed Bible text will search for the Key numbers if:
you amplify to a Keyed dictionary of the correct language, or
you press the option key when amplifying to a Keyed Bible text.
A selection in a Keyed Bible text will search for the Greek or Hebrew word if you
hold down the option key and amplify to a text or tool containing those languages
Note: In general, you cannot amplify from a mixed selection which begins in a
verse reference and ends in the text, or vice-versa, nor from a selection which
includes more than one verse.
Amplifying from a Verse
When amplifying from a Bible text to the Context, a parallel text module or a user note file,
you can make your selection anywhere in the text pane – verse reference, text, or multiple
verses. Accordance always searches the new window for the references of the verses in your
selection.
12-6
13
Amplifying Your Selection
Chapter Contents:
Context .......................................................... 13-2
Parsing........................................................... 13-5
Syntax ............................................................ 13-7
Speak ............................................................. 13-9
Search .......................................................... 13-10
Favorites ...................................................... 13-12
13
Amplifying Your Selection
This chapter covers the items in the Resource
palette and Amplify menu which do not simply
open or amplify to a module which you have
added to Accordance. These are rather features
which give you convenient access to more
information about your selection.
They include the Context item, and the
Language and Search Amplify features included in the two lowermost
sections of the palette and menu. All these items amplify the words you have
selected in a text pane. If no words are selected, and the insertion point is
not in a text pane, these items cannot be selected. The Favorites item is also
described at the end of the chapter.
Most of these items can amplify any word selection, but the Parsing,
Diagram, and Syntax features apply mainly to the grammatically tagged
original language texts, and are further described in Chapter G5. However,
both the Parsing and the Syntax windows are very useful for Bible texts with
Strong’s or another numbering system that links the English words to the original. These texts
are described in Chapter 9-Keyed Bible texts.
Text Sets, Tool Sets, and Search All are described in Chapter 15.
Context
The Context item in the Resource palette (and Amplify and contextual menus) opens
a Text window in which you can view the surrounding context for verses in a Bible text
pane. The Text window is also used to display the content of verses when hypertexting from a
Tools window. (See Chapter 14-Tools.)
The Context feature shows the context for the selected verses in the text pane. First select
some verses in any Bible text pane by clicking and dragging the mouse. Then click the Context
button, press command-5 (⌘-5), or select Context from the Amplify menu or Look Up
submenu of the contextual menu.
A Text window appears with the same Bible text panes as the original window. The window
displays the entire text from which the selected verse comes. The selected verse is marked
with a bookmark and appears two verses down from the top of the pane. If only the blinking
insertion point is in a verse, the window marks that one verse. The Text window does not
automatically update if the original Search window changes.
If you select more than one verse and then select Context, each of the selected verses appears
as a marked verse in the Text window.
Displaying the Context of a Missing Verse
13-2
Sometimes a single verse is omitted from a translation, or combined with another verse. When
the verse is present in the search results but not in the display text, it is shown as two dashes.
You can display the context of verses adjacent to the missing verse by clicking anywhere in
the space for that verse, and selecting the Context item. The verse before the missing verse is
marked. See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.
Hint: In certain circumstances you may select Context for a missing verse, and get a
blank Text window. To get around this you can select Context for the equivalent
verse in the search text.
The Text Window
The title bar of the Text window displays the first and last verse references in the
original selection, and the text version. The title bar updates each time the window
is used, and thus the name of the window cannot be set by the user.
The Show all text Checkbox
In the top left of the window is a Show all text checkbox. This control toggles
the display of the window between a display of the entire text with the
“hits” marked with a bookmark, and a display of the “hit” verses only. This
checkbox also appears in the User Notes window.
When the box is checked, the entire Bible text is shown in the text pane, with
the first “hit” verse or entry near the top of the window, marked with a
bookmark. You can then use the scroll bar or text access buttons to view the
surrounding text, and you can view the next “hit” verse by clicking the Mark
buttons. When the box is unchecked, only the “hit” verses or entries are
shown in the text pane.
When you use the Context item, Accordance assumes that you wish to view
more than one verse and only recycles a Text window if it is showing all text.
If the Show all text box is not checked, a new Text window opens.
The Compare Texts Checkbox
Checking this box highlights the differences in the text between the first two
versions of any language displayed. See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.
Digging Deeper
13-3
13
Amplifying Your Selection
The Text order Pop-up Menu
The Text order pop-up menu lets you change the text from which the verses
are taken, so that verses can be viewed in the order of a different text. The
Context feature will only recycle the window if this text pop-up matches the
text in which the selection is made.
The Recycle Symbol
At the top right is the recycle symbol which indicates that the window will be
reused. (See Chapter 11-Amplify Features.)
The Text pane
The pane of the Text window is very similar to the text pane of the Search
window. You can add new panes by selecting a text from the pop-up menus
of the Add pane: buttons. You can also add Tool panes and User Notes
panes as described in Chapters 14 and 20.
You can change the text for each pane in the display text pop-up menus. The
font size buttons let you quickly enlarge or reduce the size of the text.
You can set the display of each pane by selecting Set Text Pane Display…
(Display or contextual menu, or ⌘-T). (See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.)
The close buttons and pane position buttons work in the same way as the
Search window.
Selecting Tie to from the Set submenu (Window menu) lets you tie the display
in this window to any other window whose contents are listed by verse
references. (See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.)
Hint: Using the Tie option with a Text window is a good way to display the
full context of verses in another window while quickly scrolling through
them.
The text in the pane can be selected and copied, marked with a bookmark or
a user note. You can also access all the Amplify functions from this text,
including the instant parsing in the Instant Details box. These features are
fully described in Chapters 5 and 11.
Hypertexting from a Tools window
If you open a Text window by hypertexting from a Tools window, the Show all text
box is not checked, and the text displayed is the one selected in the Text Settings
dialog box for tools. However, if any recyclable Text windows are open, they will
be used to display the hypertexted verses whatever the current settings in the
windows. The Set Tools Display dialog box and hypertexting from a Tools window
are fully described in Chapter 14.
You can therefore create and save a Text window with several panes. As long as you
select a text in the Text order pop-up menu which contains all the verses you wish
to view, you can hypertext to this window from any Tools window. For example,
a Text window with NRSV in the Text order pop-up menu, and additional panes
with GNT-T and BHS-W4 will let you see the full text of any verse in the Old or New
Testaments, or the Apocrypha, in English and the original languages.
13-4
Parsing
To see the parsing information for a selected word or words in a text pane displaying a
Keyed Bible text, choose Parsing from the Resource palette (or Language submenu of
the Amplify menu, or Look Up submenu of the contextual menu).
If no text is selected, Key number information is displayed only for the word that
contains the blinking insertion point. If no words in the search results are selected
and the insertion point is not in a word in the search results, the Parsing window
shows only the reference.
If the insertion point is not in a text pane of a Keyed or tagged text, the cursor
becomes an X over the Parsing button, and the Parsing item in the submenus is
dimmed and cannot be accessed.
The Parsing Window
The font size buttons let you quickly adjust the display between small, medium and
large.
The contents of the Parsing window are recycled or updated the next time you choose
Parsing from the same text. Recycling is described in Chapter 12.
The title bar of the window includes the name of the window and the text from which
the parsed words are derived. The name of a Parsing window cannot be changed,
nor can it be saved and recalled. However the contents of the window can be
printed and saved as described in Chapter 25.
Digging Deeper
13-5
13
Amplifying Your Selection
The Parsing Details
The first column of the Parsing window shows the English words from the search text.
Words without a Key number are shown on the same line as the next numbered word.
The second column shows the Key number of the last word.
The third column shows the dictionary form of the original word.
The last column shows the English transliteration of the dictionary form.
You can set the display of the Parsing window to show only some of these items as
described below.
If a word is tagged with more than one Key number, the second number information is
displayed on the next line after a hyphen.
Amplifying
You can select a word in a Parsing window, and amplify to a text, tool, or Search All.
The search is performed for the language of the selection. If your selection is a Key
number, you can amplify to a Keyed Bible text or a dictionary using the same Key
numbers, and Accordance will search that module for the Key number.
Setting the Parsing Display
The contents and display of the information in a
Parsing window are determined by selecting Set
Parsing Display… item (Display or contextual
menu, or ⌘-T) when a Parsing window is in front.
The Set Parsing Display dialog box appears:
The Font size: pop-up menu allows you to
control the size of the text in a Parsing
window. Because there is a mixture of fonts
in a Parsing window, the options available
are Small, Medium, and Large.
The Include: pop-up menu enables you to
choose which words in the selected text
should be included in the Parsing window.
All Words includes each word in the
selection
Hit Words Only displays only the words
within your selection that were found by the search (the words that are
highlighted in the text pane).
Key Numbers Only displays only the words to which a number was assigned.
Hint: If you attempt to parse a selection and do not see any results in the Parsing
window, check the parsing display. You may be limiting the parsing to words
that do not occur in the selected text. If so, select All words and click OK.
The Show checkboxes labeled Key number, English transliteration, and
Dictionary form are checked when you first open this window. Clicking on a box
or label removes that item from the display of each word in the Parsing window.
13-6
Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the
changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Parsing
windows for this text.
Syntax
The Syntax feature allows you to annotate each word of a selection from a Bible
text, according to syntactical function. The syntactical chart aids Biblical exegesis by
encouraging you to analyze each word’s function as well as its form.
To open a Syntax window, first select some words in the text pane (in any Search, Text,
Reference List or Parallel window). Then select Syntax from the Resource palette (or
Language submenu of the Amplify menu).
The Syntax Window
The Syntax window consists of a chart which is arranged like a spreadsheet.
The column headings show the intended use of each column. The next line displays
the verse reference for the beginning of your selection.
The first column lists each word in the selection, The text in this column cannot
be edited.
The next three columns show the Key number, dictionary form, and English
transliteration of the original word (in a Key number text).
The fifth column is intended for your comments on the Function of the word in
the sentence.
Any other Comments can be entered in the sixth column.
Digging Deeper
13-7
13
Amplifying Your Selection
If the selection is from a plain Bible text (no keys or other tags), all words in the verse
are included, and only the Word, Function, and Comments columns appear.
You can scroll the window by pressing the command and arrow keys, or using the
scroll bars.
Editing the Text
To replace the entire contents of a cell, select the cell and enter the text.
To add or edit the text in a cell (except in the first column), double-click in the cell to
open the text box. In the text box you can use the Edit menu to copy and paste, as
well as the Text palette (and Display menu) to set the font, size, style, and color.
The Style Only and Paste Style items in the Copy As submenu (Edit menu or
⌘-[ and ]) let you quickly transfer all the font characteristics from one selection to
another. To close the text box simply select another cell or press tab or return to
move to the next cell. (See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.)
Click on the title to select an entire column. To select a vertical or horizontal block
of cells, drag the cursor across the cells. The selected cells can be cleared of
content by pressing delete or clear. You can use the font items in the Display
menu and Font palette to set the font information for all selected cells. The font
characteristics (except for style) you set for a cell (not within a text box) become
the default font, size, and color for new text boxes.
You can select an entire line or several lines by dragging the cursor over all six
columns. Pressing delete or clear removes the lines.
Dragging selected lines to another window copies them to that window and inserts
them in the original word order. This allows you to merge all or part of two Syntax
windows.
To resize any column, drag the vertical dotted line (when the cursor changes to a two
headed arrow). The line heights are automatically resized as necessary whenever
you change the column width, type characteristics, or text contents.
Printing and Saving
Like all Accordance windows, you can directly print your chart.
Page margins are shown as blue lines, and can be set in Print Settings… (File menu
or option-⌘-P). The horizontal page margins automatically adjust to the cell
margins. Column lines can be adjusted to fit the vertical margin.
You can also save the chart as a text file to open in another program, or copy the
entire chart (or a selection) and paste it into another program. When you export the
chart, the columns will be separated with tabs so that the vertical alignment can be
recreated in a word processor or a spreadsheet.
The Save item (File menu or ⌘-S) saves the Syntax window for future use in
Accordance. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
13-8
Setting Defaults
The Syntax Window pane of the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) lets
you set the default font, size and color for the English text in new Syntax windows.
Any Greek or Hebrew text is sized and styled to match the English.
Speak
Most models of Macintosh computers include the Speech Manager extension which
enables the computer to read selected text. This capability is utilized by Accordance in
the Speak Amplify feature.
To hear the text read, select a portion of text in almost any text pane, and select Speak from
the Resource palette (or Language submenu of the Amplify menu, or Look Up submenu of
the contextual menu, or press ⌘-9).
The currently selected synthesized voice will read the selected text. Greek or Hebrew text
can also be read, although some minor pronunciation inaccuracies may be encountered. If
the selection is long, a reminder appears on the screen that the reading can be terminated by
clicking the mouse button anywhere.
Up to 150 verses of Bible text or 150 paragraphs in Tools windows can be read at one time.
If the Speech Manager is not installed, a dialog box appears with the appropriate message.
Setting the Voice
To change the character of the voice, select Speech from
the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application
or Edit menu or ⌘-,), and the following dialog box will
appear:
The list in the Voice pop-up menu will depend on the
voices available in the current system. You can select
any voice from the menu, but the Greek and Hebrew
pronunciation has been optimized for the standard voices
of Fred and Junior, and may be considerably less accurate
with other voices. Carlos is the best voice for the Spanish
Bibles.
The slide bar lets you set the speed of the voice, and the Try Voice button gives you a sample
of the speech.
Digging Deeper
13-9
13
Amplifying Your Selection
Search
The Search item in the Resource palette (and Amplify menu or contextual menu)
enables you quickly to search for any words you have selected in a pane of a Search or
Tools window (or any Text pane). First select one or more words or parts of words in
the pane. Then click the Search button, press command-4 (⌘-4), or select Search from the
Amplify menu, or Search Word from the right-click or contextual menu.
A new Search or Tools window with the same panes as the original window appears, searching
the same module, and with the selected words automatically entered in the argument entry
box. The search is performed and the results are displayed.
Selection in a Bible Text Pane
In this example the words
the heavens and the earth
were selected in the ASV
pane. The new search
window searches the ASV
for these words.
13-10
If the selection is in a
Keyed Bible text, holding
the option key down while
clicking Search places
the Key numbers from the
selection in the argument
entry box of the new or
recycled Search window,
and performs the search. If
there is more than one Key
number in the selection, the
numbers are separated by
<AND> so the search finds
verses containing all of the
numbers.
In this example the
words the heaven
and the earth were
selected in the KJVS
pane, and option was
pressed when Search
was selected. The
new search window
searches the KJVS for
[KEY H8064] <AND>
[KEY H0776].
The search text popup menu shows the
text from which the
words were selected.
The field and range
pop-up menus in More Options duplicate the settings in the previous window. If these
settings are inappropriate for the text, or the previous window was not a Search window, the
default settings Verse and [All text] are used respectively.
The green recycle symbol appears above the OK button. If a subsequent Search amplify from
the same text is performed, the window will be reused with its current range and field settings
and text panes. If the selection is made in a different text, another Search window opens.
The new Search window can also be used just like any other Search window, and the recycle
symbol can be removed by clicking on it or by selecting Recycle Contents from the Set
submenu (Window menu or ⌘-K).
Digging Deeper
13-11
13
Amplifying Your Selection
Search from a Tool
If the selection is in a tool pane or Tools window, a new Tools window opens with the results of
the search for that selection in the same tool. The field searched depends on the language of
the selection. See Chapter 14-Tools.
The Search All Pop-up Menu
A single click on the Search button on the Resource palette activates the Search as described
above. Clicking and holding this button opens the pop-up menu with other items which belong
to the Search All feature which is described in Chapter 15.
Favorites
This menu lets you add your favorite modules from those that you have available to
Accordance, and then open or amplify to them in the usual way. It is intended as a
short list where you can keep a copy of the items you access most frequently. Add To
Favorites adds the front text, tool, parallel, or user tool module to the list. You can use the
Arrange Modules window to add to and organize the favorites. Items from Texts, Parallels,
Tools, and User Tools can be dragged to the Favorites section to add them to that pop-up menu.
The items remain in their original position, and a copy is added to the Favorites.
13-12
Tools
14
Chapter Contents:
An Overview of Tools .................................... 14-2
The Tools Window ......................................... 14-3
The Text Display of a Tool ............................ 14-7
The Browser Pane .......................................... 14-8
Selecting a Range in a Tool ......................... 14-11
Hypertexting in Tools.................................. 14-12
General Features of Tools Windows ............ 14-17
Amplifying with Tools................................. 14-18
Searching in Tools ....................................... 14-22
Additional Search Options .......................... 14-26
Details for any Reference Tool.................... 14-28
The Tool Pane in a Bible Text Window ........ 14-29
Reference Tools for Non-Biblical Texts ....... 14-32
14
Tools
An Overview of Tools
Accordance gives you immediate access to the relevant information in a
wide variety of Bible reference works which are described as “tools” in this
manual. The available tools fall into five categories:
•
English dictionaries or topical resources indexed alphabetically
such as Easton’s Bible Dictionary or Nave’s Topical Bible.
•
Greek lexicons such as Greek Strong’s, BDAG, or Louw & Nida which
are indexed by Greek words.
•
Hebrew lexicons such as Hebrew Strong’s, HALOT, or Brown, Driver,
& Briggs which are indexed by Hebrew words.
•
Reference works indexed by verse reference including text notes
such as NET Notes, commentaries, apparatus modules, crossreferences or Outlines
•
General works or writings indexed neither alphabetically nor by
verse reference such as Journals, Hymns, or Church Fathers.
These tools are each available as separate Accordance modules which must
be added to Accordance before being viewed. (See Chapter 2-Setting Up.)
Tools in the same category appear together in the same pop-up menu on
the Resource palette. A separate Tools window must be opened for each
category, but it can switch between tools in the same category.
In Classic Mac OS, some large tools modules such as the PhotoGuide require increased memory
especially when opened with other tools, maps, or texts. If you reach the limits of the memory
allocated to Accordance, you can increase the memory allocation. (See Chapter 2-Setting Up.)
Each tool can easily be accessed from a selection in any Bible or tool text pane using the
Resource palette (or Amplify menu), and is also fully searchable in its own right.
This chapter assumes that you already know how to use the Search window which is introduced
in Chapter 4 and covered in full in Chapters 6-7. If you are not familiar with the Search window,
please review those chapters first.
General Structure of Tools
Each tool is divided into articles which can contain different types of text. The articles are
indexed primarily by the entries. For example, in a Greek lexicon the entry is the Greek word,
while in a commentary the entry is a verse reference. The entry is followed by the contents and
other special areas such as Scripture. (The special areas are discussed later in this chapter.)
Some articles do not start with an entry. These are often introductory articles to major sections.
Larger tools tend to be more complex, with titles and a hierarchy of sections, articles and
subarticles.
An article may be divided into paragraphs, each of which begins on a new line. In many tools
the entry and the entire article form one paragraph. In other tools the entry is on a separate
line and forms a separate paragraph.
These divisions within tools are important in the use of the various features of the Tools
window described in the following pages.
14-2
The Tools Window
Opening a Tools window
To open a window displaying all the contents of a specific tool, select
the tool from one of the Tool pop-up menus of the Resource
palette (see Chapter 5-Floating Windows). If this floating window
has been closed, you can reopen it from the Window menu. If no
tools modules have been added in that
category, a dialog box appears asking
you to select a tool to add.
The first single click on any button
opens the first module on the list.
Subsequent single clicks open the
last module selected from the list.
Holding the mouse button down over
the button opens the pop-up menu.
The choice of modules in this list is
displayed with a check mark beside
the prior selection, if any. Selecting
any item opens that module.
You can also open a new Tools window by
selecting the category from the New
submenu (File menu). The window
displays the first tool in that category.
Tools can also be opened by selecting
Open… (File menu or ⌘-O), or
double-clicking on the icon in the
Finder, or the name in the Arrange
Modules window.
The Tools Window
The Tools window is similar to the Search window and consists of the tools entry section in the
upper portion, and a text pane in the lower part. In many of these illustrations Easton’s Bible
Dictionary is used as an example of a tool.
The title bar shows the name of the tool.
The Tools Entry Section
The entry section includes the tool, field, and History pop-up menus, the argument entry
box, the OK button and the More Options section. The tie and recycle symbols may appear
above the OK button when appropriate. (See Chapters 12 and 22.)
The tool pop-up menu shows the current tool and allows you to select from any tool
in the same category available to Accordance. The criteria you enter into the entry
box are matched against the contents of the tool.
Consulting Study Aids
14-3
14
Tools
tool pop-up
menu
entry section
History
pop-up menu
field pop-up
menu
text pane
Note: When the tool pop-up menu is changed to another tool, all search results from
the previous tool are removed. If the entry box contains only an asterisk, the
entire contents of the new tool are displayed
Select Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option-⌘-A) to set the arrangement of the
modules in this and all other pop-up menus of this type. See Chapter 5-Floating
Windows for more details on the Arrange Modules window.
The field pop-up menu functions somewhat differently from the
field pop-up menu in the Search window. A “field” in a tool
is defined as a type of information, analogous to a field in a
database. The names and number of the fields depend on the
particular tool. For example, a simple dictionary may have only:
Entry for the indexed words which head each article, Contents
for the article itself, and Scripture for the scripture references.
When you search the tool, your search entry is applied to the
current field. For example, if your search entry is Job, you can
either search for entries including the word Job, or search the
Contents for articles including the word job or Job, or search
the Scripture for references to the book Job.
Fields in other tools may include Entry Number, Greek or Hebrew Content
(Greek or Hebrew words included in the contents), English Gloss (a short
definition), or the longer English Definition. Page numbers, if present in the
tool, are a separate field and are often shown in the text in a different color.
When you open a new Tools window, the field is set to the first field, an asterisk is
placed in the argument entry box, and the Show pop-up menu is set to All Text.
The entire tool is automatically displayed without bookmarks. These settings do
not apply when amplifying to the tool in the Resource palette (or Amplify menu),
as explained later in this chapter.
The argument entry box is very similar to that of the Search window. The search
arguments and commands which can be used in tools are described at the end of
this chapter.
14-4
Right-click or control-click in the entry box or the surround opens a contextual menu
with appropriate options for setting the search criteria.
The More options triangle opens a middle
section with the Search within every
and Extra Fields pop-up menus. These
additional search options are described
in detail below. If extra fields are selected, and the section is closed, a plus sign
appears beside More options as a reminder.
Note: The scripture references are treated as true references, so that the reference to
Dan. 3:12-30 will be found whether you search the Scripture field for Dn, Dan,
Dan 3, or Dan 3:20.
The Text Pane
The text pane is also similar to that in the Search window, except that you cannot add other
text panes in parallel. There is no text pop-up menu since the pane always displays the tool
that you are searching. The scroll bar functions in the same way as in the Search window.
Show pop-up menu
browser button
hypertext buttons
reference box
The top bar of the pane shows the number of hits, current and total number of paragraphs.
The browser button opens and closes the browser pane which is described later.
The font size buttons let you quickly and proportionally increase or decrease all the
current font display sizes in the pane.
The page number of the line at the top of the pane (available in some in tools)
appears when the entire text of the tool is displayed.
The Show pop-up menu lets you set the display of the window to display the “hit”
paragraphs (with search results) in different ways.
Selecting All Text displays the entire text of the tool, with a bookmark at the
beginning of each hit paragraph. The window displays the first bookmark
at the top of the pane. You can now scroll back to see the context of the
paragraphs, including any headings or introductory sections.
Consulting Study Aids
14-5
14
Tools
Selecting Articles displays the entire contents of all articles (or
subarticles) containing hits.
When Paragraphs is selected, only the paragraphs containing hits
are shown.
Choosing Add Titles shows the article title (or titles) with each hit
paragraph
The pop-up menu reverts to All Text whenever you hypertext within the tool as
explained below.
Note: In some tools the entry or title of an article forms a separate paragraph. In
these tools, if you search the Entry field, you will see only the title unless
you choose All Text or Articles.
Pressing command-semicolon (⌘-;) toggles the text pane display between the
items in the pop-up menu.
The text access buttons are similar to those in the Search window. The Article
buttons advance the text to the next article. The Mark buttons appear only if there
are bookmarks in the window, and move the text to the next bookmark. Pressing
the shift key while clicking the button advances the text by ten articles or marks.
The reference box displays the entry for the article at the top of the text pane. The
first field in the list of fields for that tool is the one displayed, whether a word or
phrase, numerical entry, or verse reference. If the article has no entry (such as the
introduction to a commentary), the box is blank. You can use the reference box to
enter the name of the entry which you wish to view, and the buttons to its right to
page through the list of entries. Clicking Go To advances the tool to the new entry.
The Prior and Next hypertext buttons only appear when you hypertext or jump within
the tool. They allow you to retrace your steps backwards and forwards between the
articles you have viewed. Certain actions activate these buttons and leave a trail
which can be retraced:
•
using the text access buttons to go to the next or prior Mark or Article
•
clicking on another entry in the browser
•
using the reference box to go to a new entry
•
hypertexting to another entry as described below.
As soon as you perform a retraceable step, the Prior button appears. Clicking
on the button moves the text back one step. The Next button then appears
and allows you to move one step forward. Pressing the control-command left
and right arrow key combinations performs the same actions.
Note: Simple scrolling through the tool does not allow you to retrace your steps.
The buttons disappear if you switch the Show pop-up menu from All Text, or
perform a new search.
To summarize the various relationships:
14-6
•
the Article access buttons advance the text by one article to the next entry
•
the current and total counts are of paragraphs
•
the paragraphs containing hits are bookmarked when the Show pop-up menu is
set to All Text.
The Text Display of a Tool
The text display is partly determined by the tool and partly dependent on the settings in the
Text Settings dialog box.
The Text Styles
Titles and headings are usually in Bold style, in a larger point size than the main text. Greek
and Hebrew words are shown respectively in Helena or Yehudit font in a size proportional to
the main text. Some tools also use the Rosetta transliteration font, or the MSS manuscript font.
Entries may be in Bold style. Words which were italicized in the printed text (often the primary
definitions, or abbreviations) are in Italics on the screen as well. References to the Bible or to
other entries in the same tool are distinguished by a hypertext style. The default hypertext
style is Blue Underline. The style of both the hypertext and the highlight or “hit” words can be
set by the user.
Setting the Text Display
You can customize how the
tool is displayed in the front
window, and set a separate
default display format for
each tool installed on your
system, as well as different
colors for the hypertext
and highlight styles of each
tool. This is very similar to
setting the text pane display
which is covered in Chapter
6. The current settings
for the display of the text
also apply when the text
is printed, as described in
Chapter 25.
To format the text display, bring the Tools window to the front and select Set Tool Display…
(Display or contextual menu, or ⌘-T). The Text Settings dialog box appears.
The title of the Text Settings dialog box includes the name of the tool in the front
window. Clicking the OK button in the dialog box applies these settings only to
this window. To make these the default settings for all subsequent displays of this
tool, click the Use as default button.
The top left portion of the dialog box labeled Contents allows you to set the format
for the display of the main text. You can choose from any font available on your
system, along with a range of sizes and colors. All titles, superscripts, and Greek
or Hebrew text will be resized proportionally to match the main text.
The Hide word highlighting checkbox hides any highlights that you have applied to
words in this tool.
Consulting Study Aids
14-7
14
Tools
The Search highlighting section in the lower left sets the display of “hit” words in
the text. This is identical to the Text Settings dialog box described in Chapter 6.
Note: The “hits” are shown in the current highlight style for that tool, although this
may be masked by the internal style of that field in the text. For example, if the
highlight style is boldface, the hits will not be obvious in the entries which are
already boldfaced.
The Hypertext section on the right allows you to format the display of verse
references and other “hypertextable” links in the text.
The Color and Style pop-up menus work in the usual way and set the
appearance of the links.
The Text and Alternate Text pop-up menus let you set the Bible text used in a
new Text window whenever you hypertext from a scripture reference in this
tool. These pop-up menus display all your Bible texts. For example, you could
set the GNT-T text for hypertexting from BDAG, and KJVS from Easton. The
Alternate Text will be used both for Instant Details and for the Text window,
if the verse is not found in the first text, so it is useful to select a text which
covers books that are not included in the first text, such as the Apocrypha.
The Picture pop-up menu controls the display of the “thumbnail” images which
appear whenever there is a link to a picture, chart, or map image. This popup menu is described below in the section on Hypertexting.
Setting the Default Display for All Tools
Choosing Tool Display from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit
menu or ⌘-,) lets you set the default display for all tools currently available to Accordance.
The window offers the same options as the Text Settings dialog box for individual tools. If you
make any changes in this window and click OK, all the settings will become the default for all
your current tools. You can then set individual default displays for different tools in the Text
Settings dialog box. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.)
The Browser Pane
The browser pane displays
the sections, articles and subarticles in the tool. It allows
you to see the context of the
paragraph currently viewed,
and to navigate easily to any
other article. It can be opened
by clicking the triangle or label
in the top left corner of the text
pane.
14-8
In a dictionary the
primary sections are
alphabetic, so the first
level of the browser
shows the letters of the
alphabet. The second
level shows the first
word of each article.
In a commentary or
Bible notes, the primary
sections are the books of
the Bible, and the second
level usually shows the
chapters in each book.
The third level is a list
of the articles in each
chapter.
In this general tool the primary
sections are the works included
in the database, and the
second level shows chapters or
subsections, with further levels
for paragraphs as needed.
This example shows a more complex structure in a commentary:
Consulting Study Aids
14-9
14
Tools
Features of the Browser
To open and close the browser pane,
click on the arrow at the top left of the
text pane. You may get a message that
Accordance is building the browser index.
Click Stop if you wish to cancel the
browser. You will also get a message if the
Tools window is too narrow for the browser.
Initially the browser displays the first level with the primary sections. A side-facing
arrow beside the name indicates that there are subsections. Clicking on an arrow
opens that section. Some tools may have several levels of subsections. The final
level is usually the list of entries, but a few tools have very large articles which are
divided into sections. These divisions may also appear in the browser.
Holding the option key down while opening the browser or any section, scrolls the
browser and opens all levels to show the current paragraph.
Close a section or subsection by clicking on the down-facing arrow or in the left
margin of the browser pane, where the cursor changes to an X.
You can scroll the browser pane independently of the text pane. The mouse scroll
wheel also scrolls the browser or the tool pane, depending on the postion of the
cursor.
The width of the browser pane depends on the position of the cursor. If text in the
browser extends beyond the right edge of the pane, when the cursor is over the
pane it widens to show the longer entries and more of the hierarchy. When the
cursor leaves the browser, the pane reverts to its previous size.
To narrow or widen the browser pane, drag the section divider to the right of the
scroll bar where the cursor changes to a two-headed arrow. If you approach the
section divider from the text pane, so that the browser is in its narrow state, you
will reset the narrow width. However, if you move the section divider when the
browser is already wide, you will reset the wide state of the browser. The amount
that the browser widens under the cursor is fixed, so you cannot independently
reset both the narrow and wide positions. These changes apply as long as the
window is open.
Note: The Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu
or ⌘-,) has an option to suppress the autosizing of the tools browser, as well as
to set the font size. See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.
As you scroll in the main window pane, the browser pane also scrolls and highlights
the line relating to the paragraph at the top of the tools window. This enables you
to see the context of this paragraph.
Clicking on a title in the browser (where the cursor changes to a magnifying glass)
scrolls the main tool pane to that section (and automatically toggles the Show popup menu to All Text).
Right-click or control-click in the browser pane opens a contextual menu with options
for expanding the levels and working with ranges.
Note: Older versions of tools may need to be updated in order to best use the
browser.
14-10
Certain tools have multilingual hierarchies, so
that for example, the section
headings may be in English
while the word entries are
in Greek. The reference box
in the lower right of the
window can also display
either language. The small “L”
button appears to the left of
the reference box and lets you
switch the language of the
heading currently showing.
In this example, this lets you
select all the text, enter a
Greek word, and click OK to
go to the entry for that word.
Selecting a Range in a Tool
You can select, search, and display just a part of a tool, by selecting a range in the browser.
This feature lets you export the text of specific articles in the tool, and limit your searches to
specific sections or articles. The latter is especially useful in collections of works such as the
Journals, Church Fathers, or the works of Whitefield.
The option key lets you define and remove the ranges in the tool browser, and the color red is
used to identify the range.
The following actions and results apply to this feature:
•
Pressing the option key
when the cursor is over
a title in the browser
turns the cursor to a
hollow red arrow.
•
Clicking on a title with
the red arrow selects
that section as the
current search range,
and places a red bar
in the margin of the
browser.
Consulting Study Aids
14-11
14
Tools
•
The browser label is underlined in red to remind you that there
is a range selected. If you close the browser the underline reminds
you that your searches of the tool are limited to the specified
range.
•
The OK button is undimmed so that you can repeat the search
using the new range.
•
If you open the selected section the red bar will extend to the end
of the section.
•
To select a different title, click the red arrow on that title.
•
To remove all selections, move the red arrow to the margin, and it
will change to a red X. Click the red X and the range is removed.
•
If a subtitle is selected, it is marked with a full red bar, and the
title of its section is marked with a faded red bar. This bar remains
as a reminder even if the section is closed and the actual range is
not visible.
•
To add an additional title, hold down the shift as well as the option
key. The selections do not need to be contiguous: as long as you
hold down both the shift and option keys when you click, you can
add titles and subtitles from any part of the tool.
•
To remove one of the titles from the selection and leave the others,
click again on the title while pressing shift-option.
•
To display all the text in the selected range so that you can save
it as a text file, perform a search for * in any field and select
Articles in the Show pop-up menu.
•
The selected range is saved and recalled if the window is saved.
Hypertexting in Tools
When reference works are formatted for use in Accordance, certain hypertext links are included
in the text. There are three kinds of hypertext links: internal, scripture, and display.
All links are distinguished by the hypertext
style and color, which is blue underline by
default, but can be set by the user for each tool.
When the cursor is over a hypertext section, it
changes to a magnifying glass, as shown.
To select the text of a hypertext item without
hypertexting, start your selection in the space
before the item and finish in the space after it.
14-12
Scripture Hypertexting
Scripture hypertexting lets you see the
full text of the scripture reference. You
can simply place the cursor over the
reference and see the first verse in the
Instant Details box.
Note: This feature does not work with earlier versions of some Bibles.
The Text Window
A single click of the mouse within a scripture reference opens a new Text window
displaying the text of the selected reference. The Bible text used is the Text set in
the text settings dialog box for this tool. If the verse is not found in that text, the
Alternate Text is used.
If a recyclable Text window is already open, the contents of that window will be
updated to show the verses in the current settings of that window. If the Text order
is the default text or the alternate text, and the verse is not found, the window will
switch to the other text. If the Text order text is a another text, only the contents of
the panes will update. (See Chapter 13 for a description of the Text window.)
To view all the references in one paragraph, press the command key while clicking
on a reference.
To view the full text of more than one reference,
click the mouse inside the first reference and
drag to the last reference before releasing the
mouse. If the selection both begins and ends
within scripture references contained in the
same paragraph, all the selected references
will be displayed in the Text window. If either the beginning or end of a selection
does not fall on a scripture reference, no hypertexting will occur.
Hint: If the final verse reference consists of only a single digit, end the selection
just before the digit to include that reference. If you end the selection after the
digit, it will be outside the hypertext region and the hypertext will not work.
Note: Selecting a reference in a tool (that is not already a Scripture link) to a Bible or
non-Biblical text, and amplifying to that text finds the reference. This allows
you to hypertext from references to Josephus, Mishna or Qumran, for example.
Note: Reference tools from a non-Biblical corpus such as Qumran or Josephus use
the above scripture hypertexting within the contents of the tool. In addition,
the entry reference for each article supports the Instant Details and the
hypertexting to a Text window, using the first text (in Arrange Modules) of the
corpus to which it belongs.
Consulting Study Aids
14-13
14
Tools
Internal Hypertexting
Hypertext links can also refer to other parts of the same tool. These links allow you to follow
leads within the tool, and then retrace your steps.
Different tools include different types of text link. The example below shows the more complex
structure of the Louw & Nida Greek lexicon.
scripture reference
gloss
footnote reference
entry number
Greek entry
cross reference
Clicking on a link moves the text to another part of the text, converts the Show popup menu to All Text and makes the Prior button visible. Clicking on the Prior
button returns the window to the previous position.
The cross references refer to other entries, like the “Azariah” in the illustrations from
Easton. They appear in the same style as the other hypertext items. Clicking once
in the reference makes the text move to the entry indicated in the cross reference.
In Louw & Nida the entry number is also a cross reference. Clicking on it moves
the text to the beginning of the “domain” or section. Click on the Prior button to
return to the entry.
The footnote references consist of a simple number, superscripted in the
hypertext style. To see the content of the footnote, click once on the reference. To
return to the same place in the text, either click on the number of the footnote or
on the Prior button.
Some tools include a table of abbreviations to which abbreviated words are linked.
Similarly, a bibliographic reference can take you to the full bibliography. Section
headings in some tools are also hypertextable to the main heading.
Most of these hypertext links are also
displayed in the Instant Details
box. (See Chapter 5-Floating
Windows.). For example, holding
the cursor over the entry number
in the Louw and Nida entry shown above, displays the domain name.
14-14
Display Links
Another type of hypertext link opens a Display window so that you can view
items which cannot be displayed in the text pane. These include pictures,
maps, and tables. Some modules include many images, such as the Bible
Lands PhotoGuide which illustrates this section.
When an image of a picture or
map is included in the database,
the cursor changes to show the
word PICT when it is over the
“thumbnail” or the reference to the
image.
Clicking on the reference or the
thumbnail opens a Display window
which allows you to scroll and
magnify the image.
The Display Window
The Display window for images
includes the annotation of the
picture. The window displays the
recycle symbol and will be reused
for another image from the same
tool. Pressing command as you
click on the thumbnail opens the
image in a new, non-recyclable
window.
The following features let you
navigate this window:
•
Click the In and Out
buttons to increase or
decrease the magnification,
or press command + or -.
•
To zoom in on a specific
point click and drag the
mouse across an area to
select it and double-click in
the selection. Alternatively
you can hold down the shift
and command keys and
click in the picture.
•
Press the option key and
click Out to see the entire
picture.
Consulting Study Aids
14-15
14
Tools
•
To scroll the window, click the scroll bars or drag the sliders, use the mouse
scroll wheels, or press the command and arrow keys.
•
Press the command key and use the grab hand to scroll the window by
dragging.
•
Drag the horizontal divider to widen or narrow the text area.
•
To copy or save the entire image at full size, select Copy Picture (Edit or
contextual menu, or ⌘-C), or Save As PICT File (File menu).
•
To select part or all of the picture at the size displayed, choose Select All
(Edit menu or ⌘-A) to select the visible image, or drag the mouse to select
a portion. You can now select Copy Picture Selection (Edit or contextual
menu, or ⌘-C), or Save Selection As PICT File (File menu). See Chapter 2Printing and Saving.
•
Choose a white or black background for the windows in the Appearance
page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,).
Hint: Some drawn images have a transparent background and only appear
correctly over a white background.
Thumbnail Sizes
The Picture pop-up menu in the Text Settings dialog box sets the
display of the thumbnail images. Select Set Tool Display… (Display or
contextual menu, or ⌘-T) to open this dialog box.
The default setting is Small unless QuickTime is not installed, when
the default is None. You can choose to increase the size of the
thumbnails to Medium or Large, or to replace them with a small
Icon.
The larger thumbnails allow easier
identification of the picture itself, but
they also add large white spaces to the
text which does not wrap around the
image.
The icon allows faster scrolling of the
window, and does not introduce
additional spacing in the text.
If there is not enough memory to display
the thumbnails, the space is filled by
the icon.
Neither the thumbnails nor the icon
are included when the text is printed or copied to another
window.
The illustrations show the actual sizes of the different thumbnails.
14-16
Older Table Links
Some tools include tables in the text. In older tools, the text of the table is included in the
contents of the tool so that it is searchable, but only small tables can be displayed properly
within the width of the text pane because of the way the text wraps. Clicking on the title of the
table opens a Display window which scrolls horizontally to display all the columns. (In newer
tool modules the text wraps within the columns so the table window is not needed.)
If you copy the table, or save it as text, the columns are separated by tabs so that they are
preserved in a word processor. Although you can print the table, Accordance does not currently
support the printing of multiple pages across this window. Printing with the horizontal page
orientation, and a smaller font size, will print most wide tables correctly.
General Features of Tools Windows
The text in a Tools window can be selected and copied, and the paragraphs can be marked with
a bookmark as described in Chapter 6.
Most of the window features described in Chapter 23 apply to the Tools window. This includes
duplicating a window, and the use of the Window menu to tile and stack the Tools windows
with all other open windows. You can also tie the scrolling of the Tools window to another
window if both windows are indexed by verse reference. Therefore you can tie any Search,
Reference List, User Notes, or Text windows to a Reference Tools window.
Hint: Using the Tie option with a Tools window is a good way to display a commentary,
outline, or cross reference for verses in a Search window while scrolling through
them. You can also tie two reference tools together to view their contents in
parallel.
Tools windows can be saved and printed just like most other windows. the open or closed state
of the browser is saved with the window. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
When you open a Tools window, the title shows the name of the current tool. The name of the
window updates whenever you change the tool to another tool in the same category. However,
if you change the name of the Tools window by selecting Name… from the Set submenu
(Window menu or shift-⌘-N), the new name will no longer update when you change the tool.
Consulting Study Aids
14-17
14
Tools
Amplifying with Tools
The five categories of tools which can be viewed in the Tools window, correspond to the first
five buttons in the Tools section of the Resource palette – English Tools, Greek Tools,
Hebrew Tools, Reference Tools, and General Tools. The items in the second section of
the Amplify menu show the same categories. The pop-up menus and submenus list the tools
available in each category, and allow you to select a different tool. (See Chapter 5-Floating
Windows and 12-Amplify Features.)
Until you add to Accordance a tool belonging to a particular category,
the category is dimmed on the Amplify menu. After two or more tools in
a category are added, another item appears at the bottom of the pop-up
menu or submenu allowing you to select all the tools in that category.
You can change the order of the tools in each pop-up menu as described
above for the tool pop-up menu.
To use a tool as an Amplify feature, simply select a word or leave the cursor flashing in the text
pane of a Bible text or a tool window, and then select the tool from the Resource palette or
Amplify menu. The actions of the buttons are described in Chapter 5-Floating Windows.
Amplify Shortcuts
Triple-clicking on a word in any text pane results in an automatic amplify to the first tool in
the appropriate category.
If the cursor is in a verse reference in a Bible text pane, the first reference tool or
commentary is opened and searched.
If an English, Greek, or Hebrew word is triple-clicked, Accordance searches the first
lexicon or dictionary of the same language.
If the word is in a Keyed Bible text, Accordance amplifies to the related dictionary.
If the word is not found in the tool, the triple-click is ignored.
Pressing the shift key while triple-clicking amplifies to the first tool set (see Chapter
15), and pressing the control key while triple-clicking amplifies to the last tool
selected from the same pop-up menu.
Selecting any word or phrase in a tool and clicking Search on the Resource palette (or
Amplify menu, or ⌘-4) or selecting Search Word in the contextual menu, searches for the
selection in the same tool.
The Look Up submenu of the right or control-click contextual menu lets you quickly amplify to
the top (or last selected) dictionary of the same language, or Reference tool on your list.
Note: It is not necessary to be familiar with the following details. You can move
seamlessly between all your Accordance modules simply by clicking in or selecting
the word, phrase, or verse reference of interest, and selecting the new module
from the Resource palette or Amplify menu.
14-18
Tools Window Settings
When a Tools window is opened as an Amplify feature, Accordance sets the window based on
the current selection, independent of the default settings.
The tool pop-up menu is always set to the tool you have selected.
The Show pop-up menu may be set to All Text or Articles, depending on the tool.
When All Text is showing, the text pane scrolls to display the first “hit” paragraph.
Changes in the Show pop-up menu setting do not affect the recycling. Thus if you
open Easton, the setting is All Text, but you can switch to Paragraphs and the
window will still recycle.
The argument entry box contains either the verse references or the words you
selected. The field pop-up menu setting depends on the selection in the text pane
which you are amplifying, as described below.
Fields Searched
The principles which govern amplifying from one text or tool to another are described in
Chapter 12-Amplify Features.
If the selection, or cursor, is in a verse reference in a Bible text pane
• amplifying to a Reference tool opens that module to the same verse. If
the selected verse is not found in the reference tool, the previous article is
displayed if it is in the same chapter. If more than one entry is found for the
reference, and the tool is set to show All Text, the window scrolls to the
last entry, as this is usually the actual commentary on the verse. If an article
is not found close to the reference, the Scripture field is searched.
• amplifying to any other tool searches for that verse reference in the
Scripture field.
If the selection, or cursor, is in the text content of a Bible or tool text pane,
amplifying to any tool searches the appropriate field for that selection.
Accordance first searches the primary field for that language in that tool. If the
word is not found, any other fields of that language are searched and the field is
set accordingly. Once “hits” are found, no more fields are searched (for example, if
the search argument is found in the Entry field, the Contents are not searched).
A new Tools window opens to display the results unless there is a window already
open displaying the same tool, searching the same field, and showing the green
recycle symbol. If the word is not found at all, a dialog window opens with that
message.
In the example on the next page, if you amplify to Easton from Genesis 1:4 with
the word light selected (or with the cursor flashing in the word light), the window
displays the articles containing the word light in the Entry. However, if you select
the word divided, Accordance finds no entries containing this word, so it displays
all articles containing the word divided in the Contents.
Consulting Study Aids
14-19
14
Tools
In the example, note that Accordance has
opened another window in order to search
the contents:
Note: If the insertion point is
flashing in a word, Accordance
searches for the entire word. If
part of a word is selected, only
that part is used in the search.
The Greek and Hebrew Tools
The Greek and Hebrew tools, as well as other scholarly tools, use different languages in
the different fields. Accordance searches only the fields which use the language of the text
selection. If you amplify from a Greek or Hebrew word in any text or tool, or in an Analysis,
Concordance, or Parsing window, or press the option key when amplifying from a Keyed Bible
text, you will search the tool for the
Greek or Hebrew word. Amplifying
from the original language texts is
described in Chapter G5.
This example shows that four entries
for the Hebrew word
(light) were
found in the Hebrew Strong’s. (The
search ignores accents and vowel
points.) The field pop-up menu is
open to show the different fields.
rwøa
Note: When hypertexting from an
Aramaic lemma with a suffix
_0 to a tool with Aramaic fields
(such as HALOT), the Aramaic
fields are searched.
14-20
In dictionaries which support Key numbers
you can directly search for these numbers
by amplifying from a selection in a Keyed
Bible text, or from the Key number in an
Analysis or Parsing window. If there is more
than one Key number in the selection in a
Bible text, they are placed in parentheses
separated by commas, so that all the entries
are found. The match will only be exact if
the same Key number scheme is used (see
Chapter 9-Keyed Bible Texts).
This example shows the Hebrew word
translated “light” in Gen. 1:3.
Searching the Definitions
You can also look up English words in a
Greek or Hebrew dictionary. If you amplify from an English selection (without Key numbers) to
an original language lexicon, you will search the English Gloss for related articles. If one or
more of the words are not found in the gloss, the English Content or English Translation
are searched.
For example, amplifying to NAS Hebrew from light finds 15 “hits” with light in the English
Gloss, whereas amplifying from lights finds 2 “hits” with lights somewhere in the English
Translation. In the case of the NAS Dictionaries, the English Translation consists of the words
used in the NASB to translate this entry
Note: In some lexicons the
distinction between the English
Gloss and the English Content is
not always clear cut.
Consulting Study Aids
14-21
14
Tools
Window Recycling
When opened by amplifying from a selection, Tools windows display the green recycle
symbol in the top right of the window. The window will be reused automatically if
the same tool is selected again under the same conditions. A new recycling window opens
whenever the settings in the pop-up menus of the current window are not appropriate for the
new selection.
In the previous example you can see that when the field pop-up menu setting changed, a new
window was opened for the same tool. You can have several windows open with the same tool
but different fields, and the correct window will update each time.
Refer to Chapter 12 for a complete description of window recycling.
Searching in Tools
Searching the tool is as easy as searching the Bible text. You can simply type or copy a word or
phrase in the argument entry box, choose the field you want to search, and click OK.
Selecting Enter Words… (Search menu or ⌘-J) brings up the Select Words dialog
box with the vocabulary list for the currently selected field in the tool. so you can
select the words you want to search. The Select Words dialog box is not used in
Scripture fields. Your entry is checked for validity against the list of words in the
current field.
Many of the symbols and commands used in the Search window can also be used
in the argument entry box of the Tools window, with an additional [MERGE]
command. There are slight differences which are outlined below. Entering an
asterisk (*) displays the entire tool. (See Chapter 8-Search Symbols and Commands.)
Hint: To highlight every word in a particular field, use this entry: ?*.
Punctuation is not accepted in the argument entry box, but unlike the Search window,
it is not ignored in the search. If you paste a phrase into the Tools window,
punctuation must be deleted from the argument.
Hint: You can use an asterisk alone to stand for one or more punctuation marks
in a phrase. For example, to search for e.g. you can enter e * g. This is done
automatically when you amplify.
Language of the Argument
The language of the argument entry box varies with the language of the current field (Greek,
Hebrew, or English). In Greek or Hebrew you should use the lexical form to search the Entry
field. The Greek or Hebrew Contents often include inflected forms. Accents, breathing marks
and vowel points are ignored in the search. Accordance also takes related Greek forms into
account. For example, if you search for ei•pon (say) you will also get the entry for le÷gw (say).
Limiting Searches to a Range
You can use the browser as described earlier to define a range within the tool. All subsequent
searches are limited to that range until the selection in the browser is removed.
14-22
Symbols and Commands
The basic symbols and commands function in the same way as in
the Search window. The others are dimmed in the menus.
The Connecting Commands
The connecting commands such as <AND>, <NOT>, <XOR>
apply to an entire article or paragraph as determined by the Set
within every pop-up menu in the More options section. For
example, in the Scripture field you can find articles which refer
to Gen. 1 <AND> Isaiah.
Linking to Other Windows
Three different “multiple window” commands allow you to link
the search entry section of a Tools window to another window
– LINK, CONTENTS, and MERGE. You can enter these commands
from the Enter Command submenu (Search menu) or the key
commands shift-⌘-L, C, or M.
If there are appropriate windows open, a dialog box appears
showing the names of all these windows. Select the name
of the window that you want to link to, and click OK.
[Command windowname] is added to the argument entry
box at the insertion point. If only one appropriate window is
open, the name of that window is automatically inserted in
the command.
If there are no other windows open, a question mark is
automatically inserted with the command in the argument
entry box. This question mark is selected so that you can
immediately enter a new window name.
You can now complete the search argument. When you click OK
in either window, the search is performed in that window and in all the windows
that are linked to it by the multiple window command.
LINK
You can use the LINK command to link the search arguments of two Tools windows.
Accordance checks the field settings of both windows to see whether the language is the same.
If a window is set to the Scripture field, linking is only allowed with another window set to the
Scripture field. The LINK command itself imports just the argument from the linked window.
When you update the argument in the linked window and click OK, the search is repeated in
both windows. For example, you can use LINK to search two different Greek lexicons for the
same lexical form, or two fields of the same language in the same tool. You can add other
expressions to the search argument to further define the search. The next page shows the
results of a search for Joshua in the Entry and the Content fields of Nave’s.
Consulting Study Aids
14-23
14
Tools
CONTENTS
The CONTENTS command can be used to link a Reference tool such as a commentary to the
verse list in a Search window. The Tools window then bookmarks or displays only the articles
relating to the verses showing in the Search window. If you add another search criterion in the
Tools window, the search is performed in the current field, but only in the articles with entries
matching the verses in the Search window.
This feature lets you continuously display only the commentary articles on the search results
in the Bible text. It also lets you perform a search in only a limited part of the tool – for
example, display only Genesis in the Search window and link and search the Tools window to
find Cain only in the commentary on Genesis.
In the example below, the Search window shows only the 27 verses containing Adam. The
commentary search for Cain has 16 hits in the articles on those 27 verses (actually 13 for Cain
and 3 for verse references) whereas a search simply for Cain finds 30 hits in this tool.
14-24
MERGE
The MERGE command is unique to the Tools window, and has two different functions – to
import both the contents and the search argument from a Bible text, and to allow searching of
two fields in the same tool. In each case you are merging the search results from one window
to another.
MERGE from the Bible to a Reference Tool
The first use of MERGE is an extension of the CONTENTS command for
Reference tools. You can use MERGE to link a Reference tool to a Search
window with a search argument. Accordance will find all the articles in the
commentary which apply to the verses in the Search window, and will also
search those articles for the hit words found in the Search window. You can
also add additional search arguments to the MERGE command.
The main application of this command is when additional search criteria can
be used in the Search window, and then applied to a tool such as the MT/
LXX parallel database, as
described in Chapter G6Searching the MT/LXX. An
example in a more basic
tool could be to search
the KJV for Adam and
set Henry’s Commentary
to merge with the Search
window. The Tools window
shows articles on the verses
in the Search window, but
only if they also contain
Adam. If you change the
argument in the Search
window to Moses, the Tools
window will also update
and search for the new
argument.
MERGE in the Same Tool
The MERGE command can also be used to link to another window searching a
different field of the same tool. This is similar to the Extra Fields option
described below, but allows you to see the results of individual searches
before they are combined. For example, search the Scripture field of
Nave’s for the book of Joshua, Open another Nave’s window and search its
Content for Jerusalem. Now add a MERGE from the second to the first
Tools window and click OK. The search finds articles with both a scripture
reference to Joshua, and the word Jerusalem in the contents, and is shown
on the next page.
Consulting Study Aids
14-25
14
Tools
This use of the command is different from the LINK command because it does
not import the search argument, but rather the lists of hits and articles
found in the first window. The window containing the MERGE command must
be searching a different field of the same tool, and should have an additional
search argument.
Additional Search Options
Clicking the More options triangle opens
a section with two pop-up menus.
The Search within every pop-up menu
lets you choose Article (default) or
Paragraph. This lets you define the context of searches with <AND>, [FIELD],
or other search relationships in a similar manner to the pop-up menu on the
Search window. For example, Adam <NOT> Eve finds Adam when Eve is not
mentioned in the same paragraph or article, depending on the setting.
Extra Fields
The Extra Fields pop-up menu allows you to add up to four more search fields.
When the section is opened, one field is automatically added. Each new field adds
two pop-up menus and an argument entry box. You can use this feature to search,
for example, for a Greek word, and an English word or phrase in the same article,
or to limit your search to a specific article.
The first pop-up menu lets you choose the relationship between this field and
the preceding fields. The options are AND, OR and NOT.
The field pop-up menu offers the same choices as the main field pop-up
menu, i.e. all the fields defined in this tool.
14-26
The search argument is entered in
the adjacent text box using all the
relevant options in the Search
menu. The example shows the same
search as the MERGE command on
the preceding page: Joshua in the
Scripture field and Jerusalem in the
Contents.
Choosing fewer or more search fields
removes or adds to the end of the set.
The arguments in these fields are not
saved in the History, but are recalled
if the window is saved.
Extra fields without search criteria are
ignored.
If you close the More options
section while you have extra
search fields defined, a plus
sign appears beside the More
options label as a reminder.
This example shows a search of the
Greek-English lexicon for paragraphs
with words starting with agap*
(love) in the Entry or Greek Contents,
English content beginning with
lov*, and Scripture references to the
epistles of John.
Right-click or control-click in the
surround of the entry box opena the
contextual menu with the options
of Search Within and Extra Fields.
Order of the Fields
Each search field is evaluated in order. Thus:
A and B or C not D is equivalent to (A and B not D) or (C not D)
A or B not C and D is equivalent to (A and D not C) or (B and D not C)
A and B not C or D is equivalent to (A and B not C) or D
A or B and C or D is equivalent to (A and C) or (B and C) or D.
Consulting Study Aids
14-27
14
Tools
Details for any Reference Tool
The Details button appears only on
windows with Reference tools. Clicking
the button open a Details workspace
which offers Hits Graph and Table tabs
similar to those available in the Search
window. This feature is especially useful
in research Reference tools such as the
MT/LXX, Qumran Index, or an Apparatus.
This Hits Graph window shows a graph
of the MT/LXX with a search for
and poiew in the same paragraph within
the Torah, and then the same search
superimposed with NOT. The Table
window below shows the second search
with all the details showing, confirming
that
is frequently not translated
by poiew in Ex. 36 and 37, where it is in
fact often left untranslated.
hco
hco
Note: Some commentaries have very
complex structures, as shown in
the Browser. In this case the Details
windows may not function correctly.
The usual Hits Graph and Table settings can
be accessed from the Display menu (⌘-T)
and saved as the default for each tool. The
only differences are that the Graph display
has Verses per hit (allows 5 to 2000) and the
Table display has hits per 100 verses and
does not have the option of total word count.
There is no separate option in the
Preferences to set which details appear
when the Details button is clicked on a
Reference tool: the Hits Graph and Table
appear if they are selected in the Search Window preferences. See Chapter 11-Getting Details,
and Appendix A-Setting Preferences..
14-28
The Tool Pane in a Bible Text Window
The Add pane: Reference Tool button on the
Search, Text, and Reference List windows lets
you add any Reference tool in a new pane in the
window. This lets you view the margin notes which
accompany many translations, or any commentary, in the same window as the Bible text.
Each new pane is first added in a horizontal pane at the bottom of the window. Pressing option
while adding the pane adds it directly to the upper row.
Clicking the pane position button with the two arrows switches the pane betwen the
two rows. Pressing the option key while clicking the button switches the pane to left of
the other row (instead of the right)
Hint: A narrow vertical pane is ideal for margin notes, whereas a full commentary is
often better displayed in a wide horizontal pane.
Consulting Study Aids
14-29
14
Tools
Scrolling the panes
Each pane displays the entire tool rather than the entries for selected verses.
The access buttons and reference box at the bottom of the window always move
the Bible text panes. The scroll bar (and page up and page down keys) scroll the
selected pane so that you can view the entire text of a commentary by clicking in
its pane before scrolling.
All the panes behave like tied windows: they scroll together so that the verses at the
top of the panes are aligned as far as possible. If the exact verse showing at the
top of the pane which has been scrolled is not present in another pane, that pane
scrolls to the nearest verse. However, if no verses from that book are present, the
pane does not scroll at all.
The text of the tools shown in these panes is identical to the text in the Tools window.
The internal and scripture hypertext links are all supported.
Clicking a scripture link in the pane of a Search window opens a Text window with
only the Bible text panes from the original window, as well as a pane showing
the default text for the tool (if necessary). Clicking a reference in a pane of a Text
window recycles the same window to show the new verse.
Clicking an internal link jumps the same pane to the new position, and the Bible
panes also follow if it is an entry with a verse reference rather than, for example,
an index of abbreviations.
The Prior and Next buttons appear and allow you to return to the verse you were
viewing, whenever you:
•
use the reference box to go to a new entry
•
click on an internal hyperlink in the tool pane
•
recycle a text window by clicking a scripture reference in a tool pane
•
click a Mark up or down button.
The buttons diappear when:
•
you perform a new Search
•
you un-click Show All text in the Text window
•
when you select a different text in the Text order pop-up menu
You can select words in the pane and amplify from them. If you amplify to Search, a
new Tools window opens with the same tool.
However, you cannot search the tools inside the Search window, nor can you open a
Browser pane or choose which parts of the tool are displayed.
Hint: Add your favorite reference tools and Bible texts to a Text window showing all
text. This window will update whenever you choose Context, or click on a verse
reference in a tool. You can even click on a Scripture link in one of the tools
showing in the window, and it will update to display that verse in each pane.
14-30
Adjusting and Closing Panes
You can adjust the width of the panes and the height of the second row of panes by dragging
the heavy divider lines. If the divider is dragged all the way across the pane, the pane closes.
Close Pane (File menu or ⌘-Y) closes the selected pane, as does clicking the close button in
the top left. The last pane in the lower row can be closed by dragging the divider to the bottom
of the window.
Printing Parallel Panes
When you print a window with parallel panes you have many options which enable you to
print all the panes in a synchronized manner. These options are shown when you select Print
Settings… (File menu or option-⌘-P), and are described in Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.
Although the tool pane displays all the tool, when printing tool panes Accordance includes
only the entries that match each Bible verse being printed, and not the intervening entries.
Consulting Study Aids
14-31
14
Tools
Reference Tools for Non-Biblical Texts
Certain tools are indexed by the references of non-Biblical texts such as Qumran, Josephus,
Apostolic Fathers, Mishna, Inscriptions, or Pseudepigrapha. These can be tied to a Search
window for synchronized scrolling, or added as a pane in the Search or Text window. When the
search text is a non-Biblical module, only tools that belong to the same corpus can be added in
parallel panes from the Add pane: Reference Tool pop-up menu.
Hypertext Links
The index reference in these tools is linked to the corpus to which the tool belongs. Other cross
references are linked to the Bible texts. Thus, for example, if you click in the Qumran Index
on the entry reference, a Text window opens with the first text you have of that corpus, i.e.
QUMRAN or QUMENG. If you click a Scripture reference, the default Bible text opens in a Text
window. If you click a “Related manuscript” internal reference, you hypertext within the tool.
The same texts appear in the Instant Details when the cursor is over a linked reference.
The Text and Alternate Text pop-up menus in the Text Settings dialog box (Set Tool
Display… (Display or contextual menu, or ⌘-T)) only set the Bible texts for references from
these tools. The text used in the primary entries is always the first text of the relevant corpus.
For example, if QUMENG is above QUMRAN in the Arrange Modules dialog, the instant Details
will show the QUMENG and the QUMENG will open in a Text window unless QUMRAN is already
open. See Chapter 5 for details of the Arrange Modules window.
14-32
15
Search All Groups,
Text and Tool Sets
Chapter Contents:
The Search All Window.................................. 15-2
Creating and Editing Groups of Modules ...... 15-4
Amplifying to the Search All Window ........... 15-5
Creating and Editing Text and Tool Sets ....... 15-5
Amplifying to a Text or Tool Set ................... 15-6
Differences between Sets and Groups .......... 15-6
15
Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets
The Search All Window
The Search All window lets you search all of your
available Accordance text, tool, and user tool
modules (or a user-defined group of modules) at
the same time. To open a new Search All window select
[All] from the Search button of the Resource palette or
Search All from the New submenu (File menu or ⌘-F).
Like other Accordance windows, the Search All window
consists of a search entry section and a browser text pane
to display results.
This window can be saved and recalled with the current
search argument.
The Search Entry Section
The search entry section of the Search All window includes
three pop-up menus: Language, Group, and History.
The Language pop-up menu shows the language of the
search, and lets you select English, Greek, or Hebrew, or
Scripture references which are always searched separately.
The Group pop-up menu has four permanent items:
•
[All] requires the search to include all Bible text, tool, and user tool
modules currently available to Accordance.
•
[All Bibles] limits the search to all the Bible texts
•
[All Tools] limits the search to all the tools (not user tools)
•
Define Group… lets you define a group of modules to search.
The menu also shows any groups which have already been defined.
The History pop-up menu is the same as the Search window.
The argument entry box is similar to the Tools windows.
Simply enter a word or phrase and use the search commands and symbols from the
Search or contextual menu as necessary.
If you select the Greek or Hebrew language, the appropriate font and direction are
used automatically, and you can select from the Tags submenu.
The Enter Words (Lexical or Inflected Forms) dialog boxes use the words from the
first module of that language, unless a different module is selected from the popup menu in the dialog box (see Chapter 8-Doing Searches).
The scope of the connecting commands <AND>, <NOT>, and <XOR> is within one verse
in Bible texts, and one article in tools. Thus Adam <AND> Eve finds Bible verses
and tools articles containing both words. You can use the <WITHIN> command to
define a closer relationship, or directly search for the phrase Adam and Eve.
Any search argument which does not apply to a particular module will be ignored in
that module.
15-2
Hint: You can define a more complex search in a Construct or Search window, and use
the [LINK] command to use it in the Search All window.
Performing a Search
Clicking the OK button performs the search in the
selected module group. A dialog box informs you
which module is currently being searched, and a
progress dialog box appears if the search takes more
than a few seconds.
Accordance searches Bible texts of the appropriate language for the search argument.
(All languages other than Greek and Hebrew are treated as “English”.) When searching
grammatically tagged texts the lexical forms are searched unless the words are enclosed in
quotation marks.
In each tools module, Accordance searches each field of the appropriate language. The results
for each field are displayed separately in the browser.
When Scripture is selected in the language pop-up menu, Accordance searches only the
Scripture references in each module. Use the same criteria to enter scripture references as in
the Verse reference mode of the Search window, or for the Scripture field of the Tools window.
A dialog box informs you if no “hits” are found in any module in the group, and any previous
results in the browser pane are cleared.
If the search is canceled the results are displayed up to that point.
The Browser Text Pane
The results of the search appear in the browser pane below the search entry section. This
browser is similar to the tools browser described in Chapter 14.
The the font size of the browser can be set in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,).
The first level shows the list of text and tool modules in which “hits” were found, the field of
the tool, and a count of the hits. Clicking on the side-facing arrow beside a module opens the
list of articles (in tools) or books (in Bible texts) containing the hits. Clicking on the downfacing arrow or in the left margin (where the cursor becomes an X) closes that section of the
browser.
Note: For tools, the relative importance of the number of hits depends upon which field
is searched. (For example, searching article Titles will often give a much smaller
number than when the Contents are searched.)
To see the hits in the module, click on the module name (where the cursor becomes a
magnifying glass). This opens a recyclable Search or Tools window, performs the search again
in the same field, and scrolls the window to display the first “hit”. Clicking on a book, chapter,
or article name opens, searches, and scrolls the window to display that part of the results.
Note: If you perform a linked search using the argument from a Search or Construct
window, and then close that window, you will be unable to open modules to
display the results, as the search argument is no longer available.
Consulting Study Aids
15-3
15
Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets
Creating and Editing Groups of Modules
You can define your own group of modules for the Search All, and these groups will appear in
the group and Search pop-up menus. First select Define Group… (Search menu or ⌘-R) with
the Search All window in front, or from the Search pop-up menu in the Resource palette or
the group pop-up menu in the Search All window. The resulting Define Groups dialog box is
somewhat similar to the Define Ranges dialog box described in Chapter 7. If you have not yet
defined a group, [New name] appears on the list. Otherwise, the first or the currently selected
group is selected in the list and its name and item list appear in the boxes.
The four scrolling
lists at the bottom
of the window show
(from left to right)
all the Bible texts,
tools, and user
tools you currently
have available to
Accordance (in
alphabetical order),
and the item list
of modules you
have selected for
this group. To add
a module to the
selected group,
select its name in
one of the left-hand
lists, and click on the
Text », Tool », or
My Tool » button (or
double-click on the module name).
Use the lower Delete, Up, and Down buttons to remove modules and change the order of
the items in the Group Items list.
The New button adds [New name] to the list. Enter a name for the group in place of
[New name].
Clicking on the upper New, Up, Down, or the OK button, or on another name in the list,
adds the new group to the scrolling list of groups.
Clicking the upper Delete button removes the selected group. The upper Up and Down
buttons move the selected group name up and down the list. The groups will appear
on the Search and group pop-up menus in the order that they appear on this list.
Clicking the Cancel button closes the window without saving ANY changes to the groups.
Clicking OK closes the window and saves ALL changes.
Note: If a user tool has the same name as a Bible or tool on one of the other lists, the
Search All will not find it correctly. User tools are described in Chapter 20.
15-4
Amplifying to the Search All Window
You can select verse references or text in any Bible text pane, or text in any tool pane, and
amplify to the Search All window. This feature lets you search your entire set of Accordance
modules for a specific word, phrase, or verse reference, with a single click of the mouse.
Simply choose the group you want to search from the Search pop-up menu in the Resource
palette or Search All submenu (Amplify menu or contextual menu).
In most cases your selection will appear in the argument entry box in the same form as in the
original text or tool. If the selection, or cursor, is in:
• a verse reference in a Bible text pane, all texts and tools will be searched for that
reference.
• the text content of a Bible or tool text pane, the appropriate fields of each module
are searched for that selection.
• a Keyed Bible text pane, and you press the option key, the texts and tools are
searched for the original word or words.
Accordance searches each module in the selected group, and opens the Search All window only
if it finds “hits”. A dialog box informs you if no “hits” are found.
Creating and Editing Text and Tool Sets
The Text and Tool Set features allow you to define sets of modules, and
open a set or amplify to it directly. For example, you can group related tools
together, or create a set of favorite Bibles that you
consult for a particular type of study. The sets you
define appear in the Text Set or the Tool Set pop-up
menus of the Resource palette and Amplify menu.
To define your own set of texts first select Define
Text Set… from the Text Set pop-up menu in the
Resource palette.
To define your own set of tools, select Define Tool
Set… (Search menu or ⌘-R) with a Tools window
in front, or from the Tool Set pop-up menu in the
Resource palette.
The resulting Define … Sets dialog box is very
similar to the Define Groups dialog box described
earlier except that only the one kind of module is
available to add to a set. If you have not yet defined
a set, [New … set] appears on the list. Otherwise, the
first set is selected in the list and its name and item
list appear in the boxes.
Consulting Study Aids
15-5
15
Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets
The two scrolling lists at the bottom of the window show all the texts or tools you have
available to Accordance (in alphabetical order), and the list of modules you have selected for
this set. The buttons and lists work in the same way as in the Define Groups dialog box.
Check the Open with automatic tiling checkbox if you want the windows in the set to be tiled
when you first open them. This option also automatically ties the scrolling of the Bibles, or of
any Reference tools in the set. Both apply only if the modules are not opened in a Workspace.
(See Chapter 23 for details of tiling and tying.)
Amplifying to a Text or Tool Set
You can select verse references or text in any Bible text pane, or text in any tool pane, and
amplify to a defined set in the pop-up menus in the Resource palette or Amplify menu.
Accordance opens a new window for each module in which the selection is found and performs
the search in each window. If the Open with automatic tiling checkbox is checked for that
set, the windows are tiled and tied as appropriate. If the front window is a Workspace, new tabs
are opened, but not tied or tiled. Pressing the command key when amplifying to the set opens
separate windows in front of the workspace.
When tied together, the first Bible or Reference tool in the list scrolls to show the first “hit”,
and the others scroll to show the nearest verses to that hit. However, if the selection is a verse
reference and the tool is a reference tool, the window scrolls to the last “hit” as this is usually
the actual comment on that verse.
Differences between Sets and Groups
Text and Tool sets and Search All groups are both similar to the “All” (such as All English)
item at the bottom of each tool and text pop-up menu in the Resource palette and Amplify
menu, but each feature is also distinctive.
The All… includes all the tools or texts in its category. It can only be accessed by amplifying
from a selection.
Text and Tool sets are user definable, and can include texts of any language or tools from any
category. They also allow automatic tiling of the windows and tying of Bibles and Reference
tools. Sets can be opened as new windows from the Resource palette as well as by amplifying.
The Search All group can include Bible texts, tools, and user tools. For tools it searches all the
fields of the language at once. It opens a specialized window displaying a summary list of all
the modules which contain search results, rather than immediately opening the modules. This
gives an overview of the results, and lets you choose which modules to open and inspect. The
Search All window also lets you define your search directly, include some search commands, or
link to a more complex search.
15-6
Parallels
16
Chapter Contents:
Parallel Text Modules .................................... 16-2
The Parallel Window...................................... 16-2
The Parallel Text Panes ................................. 16-6
General Window Features.............................. 16-8
Amplifying to a Parallel Window................... 16-9
16
Parallels
Parallel Text Modules
The parallel text modules available for Accordance consist of sets of Bible verses that
are parallel in content to each other. Each module lets you compare passages which
are parallel or similar in different books or parts of the same book. Currently available
modules include the Old Testament, Old Testament Quotations in the New Testament, Epistles,
and three different parallel treatments of the Gospels.
Each module must be added to Accordance before it can be viewed. (See Chapter 2-Getting
Started.)
This chapter assumes that you already know how to use the Search window which is introduced
in Chapter 4 and covered in full in Chapters 6-7. The Parallel window is also similar to the Tools
window described in Chapter 14.
General Structure of Parallel Modules
Each module consists of a list of pericopes consisting of passages of one or more verses,
which have been identified as parallels within the context of the module. Each pericope has a
title number, a title, and a list of references to the passages. In this chapter the parallel text
modules will be referred to as parallels for the sake of brevity.
You can search for a title number, search the titles for specific words, or enter a verse
reference. Any of these searches will result in a list of pericope titles which meet the criteria.
You can view the details of each pericope in parallel panes by selecting them from the list.
The Parallel Window
To open a new Parallel window, select the name from the Parallel popup menu of the Resource palette. You can also select Parallel from the
New submenu (File menu) or double-click on the icon of a parallel in
the Finder, or the name in the Arrange Modules window.
If you have not added any parallels, you will get a dialog box asking you
to select the first parallel to add.
The Parallel window is similar to the Search
window, and consists of an upper portion
containing the entry section and the pericope
title list, and a lower portion containing
text panes. In these illustrations the Old
Testament parallel is used as an example.
The Entry Section
The entry section includes the parallel, field, display text, and History pop-up menus, two
checkboxes, the argument entry box and the OK button. The recycle symbol appears above
the OK button when appropriate as described in Chapters 7 and 12.
16-2
display text
pop-up menu
parallel pop-up menu
field pop-up menu
pericope title list
History pop-up menu
scroll bar for
pericope title list
checkboxes for tie
scrolling and add text
selected title
argument entry box
close pane button
new pane
button
passage pop-up menu
scroll bar for
text panes
font size
buttons
panes with parallel
passages
The parallel pop-up menu shows the current parallel and allows you
to select from any parallel available to Accordance. The criteria you
enter into the entry box are matched against the contents of the
parallel.
Note: When the parallel pop-up menu is changed to another parallel,
the titles and passages from the previous parallel are removed.
You can delete a parallel or change the order of the parallels in this
pop-up menu in the Arrange Modules window (Edit menu) described in
Chapter 5.
The field pop-up menu is similar to the Tools window pop-up menu of the
same name. The “fields” which you can search in a parallel are the Title
Number, Title, and References. When you search the parallel, your search entry is
applied to the current field. For example, if your search entry is Job, you can either
search for Titles including the word “Job”, or search the References for the book
“Job.”
The display text pop-up menu sets the text version in which all the parallel passages in
this window are displayed. You can choose from any text available to Accordance.
Consulting Study Aids
16-3
16
Parallels
Each pane uses the same text except in the case of the Old Testament Quotes in the New
Testament parallel. When you select this parallel, a second text pop-up menu appears
to the right of the first, labeled NT Text. This sets the text of the New Testament
passages, while the first pop-up sets the text of the Old Testament passages. (You may
need to make the window wider and move the vertical section divider in order to view
the NT text pop-up menu.)
The Tie Scrolling and Add Text checkboxes are described below.
The History pop-up menu is the same as the Search window.
The argument entry box is similar to that of the Search window. The Search and contextual
menus offer the usual options. All the symbols can be used in the Parallel window, but only the
simple connecting commands <AND>, <OR>, <NOT>, and <XOR>, and the [LINK] command are
valid in this window. Word proximity and phrase searches are not supported, since they are
rarely needed in these modules. Entering an asterisk (*) will display all the pericope titles.
The Fields
In the Title Number and Title fields, each word entered is checked for validity against the list
of words in the field, and if the word is not found, the Select words dialog box appears. (See
Chapter 7-Doing Searches.)
Note: The Title numbers are treated as words. The connecting commands are therefore
not helpful in this field, but the wild card symbols are more useful. For example
the entry 2?(0-5) finds the Title numbers 20-25.
The References field lets you enter references just like the Verse reference mode of the Search
window described
in Chapter 7. In
addition you can
use the simple
connecting
commands
to define the
relationships
between passages
in a set. For
example, Ps.
<AND> Is. in
the References
field finds six
sets of parallel
passages which
have verses from
both the books
of Psalms and
Isaiah.
16-4
The LINK Command
You can use the [LINK] command to link the search arguments of two Parallel windows.
Accordance only allows a link when the windows are set to the same field. Therefore, you can
use [LINK] to search two parallels for the same word or verse reference, or two windows with
the same parallel but displaying the results in different versions. For example, here are the
results of a search for parallel passages to Exodus 20 within the Old and New Testaments:
The Pericope Title List
The pericope title list appears in the top right corner of the Parallel window.
This list shows the titles of the pericopes found by the current search criteria. One
title is always selected with a colored background.
When you click once to select another title, the contents of the text panes update to
show the new pericope.
The scroll bar for the pericope title list lets you scroll up and down the list. The
mouse scroll wheel scrolls the list or the selected pane, depending on the postion
of the cursor.
Pressing the up and down arrow keys moves the selection one title at a time.
The order of the titles is determined by the canonical order of the first passage for
each pericope. Therefore if you select parallels to Isaiah, the first pericope is a
parallel to Exodus, followed by a parallel to Deuteronomy, irrespective of the order
within Isaiah.
Consulting Study Aids
16-5
16
Parallels
Adjusting the Window Size
You can enlarge the entire window by dragging the grow box at the bottom right of
the window.
You can adjust the size of the pericope title list by dragging the two heavy section
dividers below and to the right of the entry section. Over an adjustable line the
cursor changes to a two-headed arrow.
The Parallel Text Panes
The parallel text panes are somewhat different from the text panes in the Search window.
Each pane displays a different passage from the selected pericope.
All the panes in a row use the text version (or versions) set in the display text pop-up
menus.
The number of panes present when you open the window depends on the default
settings as described later in this chapter.
The selected pane is indicated by a solid blue line around the text. To select another
pane click once on that pane.
The passage pop-up menus display the reference for the first verse in each passage. The menu
lets you select a different passage from the pericope to display in that pane. The menu for each
pane retains its setting when you view a new pericope.
For example, if
you set the first
pane to display
the third passage
in the list of
references, it
will continue
to display the
third passage,
if present,
when you select
another pericope.
Some pericopes
have only two
passages, some
have many more.
This illustration
shows the
passages in the
second pericope found for Exodus 20.
The order of the passages in the menu is generally the canonical order of the books in English,
except in the Old Testament parallel. In the Gospels parallel all passages are included, so verses
which are unique to one gospel are present in the module but have no parallels.
16-6
Adding a Text Pane
The new pane button appears to the upper right of the text panes whenever there are
more passages in the pericope than there are text panes in the window. Clicking the
new pane button adds another pane to the window, unless the resulting panes would
be too narrow.
You can add as many text panes as the width of the window will allow. To add another pane
click the new pane button if present. The pane will display the next passage from the
pericope. To close the selected pane, select Close Pane (File menu or ⌘-Y).
Scrolling
In other windows with parallel panes, the scrolling of all the panes is synchronized, and it can
only be suspended temporarily. In the Parallel window the Tie Scrolling checkbox determines
whether or not the panes scroll together, since the passages are parallel by topic but not by
verse. The default setting in Preferences is that the box is not checked (see below).
When the Tie Scrolling box is checked, the scrolling of the panes is synchronized so that each
pane moves the same number of verses at a time. When the box is unchecked, only the selected
pane scrolls. To scroll another pane, first click in it to select it.
Holding down the control key or the right mouse button while scrolling temporarily reverses
the current setting of the checkbox. Thus, if the box is checked, control-scrolling is not
synchronized, and if the box is unchecked, control-scrolling is synchronized.
There are no text access buttons or reference box at the bottom of the window.
The Text in Each Pane
The text in each pane is just like the Bible text in a Search or Text window. It can be selected
for copying or for any of the Amplify features described in Chapter 11. Bookmarks and user
notes can also be added.
The font size buttons let you quickly change the display size in each pane. If there are two
rows, both panes in a column are adjusted together. Pressing the option key while adjusting the
font size changes it in all the panes. (See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.) They are hidden if the
pane width is too narrow.
You can customize how the text is displayed in each pane, and set the default display format
for new panes with that text, by selecting Set Text Pane Display… (Display, contextual menu,
or ⌘-T). This is identical to setting the text pane display for a Search window which is covered
in full in Chapter 6.
Consulting Study Aids
16-7
16
Parallels
Adding Another Translation
The Add Text checkbox adds a horizontal pane to each text pane, and a second display text
pop-up menu which applies to the lower set of panes. This lets you view the same verses in
another version. If the OT in NT parallel is selected, a fourth text pop-up menu appears below
the NT Text, to allow an alternative version for the New Testament passages.
General Window Features
The window can be printed with all the panes in columns or interleaved, depending on the
current Print Settings (File menu or option-⌘-P).
Most of the window features described in Chapters 23 and 25 apply also to the Parallel window.
This includes saving and printing, duplicating a window, and the use of the Window menu to
tile and stack the Parallel windows with all other open windows. However, you cannot tie the
scrolling of the Parallel window to another window.
When you open a new Parallel window, the title shows the name of the parallel, such as Old
Testament. The name of the window updates whenever you change the parallel you are
displaying in that window. However, if you change the name of the Parallel window by selecting
Name… from the Set submenu (Window menu or option-⌘-N), the new name will no longer
update when you change parallels.
Setting Defaults for Parallel Windows
16-8
To set the defaults for a new Parallel window when opened from the New submenu (File menu)
or the Resource palette, select Parallel window from list in the Preferences dialog box
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,).
Note: There is an important difference between the function of this page and the other
window default pages in the Preferences dialog box. For the Parallel windows
only, you can separately set the defaults for each parallel available to Accordance.
Most of these settings will apply however the parallel is opened, whether from the
Resource palette or Amplify menu, or from the File menu.
The Parallel pop-up menu sets which parallel will be opened when you choose
Parallel from the New submenu (File menu), and determines to which parallel the
settings below will apply.
The Field pop-up menu sets which field will be searched (except when the window is
opened by amplifying from a selection).
The Text pop-up menus set the Bible text to be displayed (the NT text item is dimmed
unless you select the OT in the NT parallel).
The Number of panes box lets you enter the number of text panes in the window.
The Tie scrolling checkbox links the scrolling of all the panes.
To set the defaults for each parallel, first select the parallel in the Parallel pop-up menu,
then set its display in the other dialog items. Then select another parallel and set its display
likewise. When you have set the display for each parallel, set the Parallel pop-up menu to the
parallel you want in a new window, and click OK. The different settings for each parallel will be
used any time you open it.
Consulting Study Aids
16-9
16
Parallels
Amplifying to a Parallel
Each parallel module that is added appears on the Parallel pop-up menu
on the Resource palette. After two or more parallels are installed,
another item appears at the bottom of the pop-up menu allowing you to
select All Parallel. The items in the Parallels submenu of the Amplify
menu match the items in the pop-up menu. (See Chapter 11-Amplify
Features.)
To use a parallel as an Amplify feature, select some text or leave the
cursor flashing in a Bible text pane (text or reference gives the same
result), and select the parallel from the Resource palette or Amplify
menu.
The Look Up submenu of the right or control-click contextual menu lets you quickly amplify to
the top (or last selected) parallel on your list.
When a parallel window is opened as an Amplify feature, the parallel pop-up menu is always
set to the parallel you have selected. The field pop-up menu is set to References. The display
text pop-up menu, the Tie scrolling checkbox, and number of panes are based on the default
settings. The argument entry box contains the references of the verses you selected. A dialog
box informs you if none of the selected verses is found in the parallel.
When opened by amplifying, Parallel windows display the green recycle symbol
above the OK button. The window will be reused automatically if the same parallel is
selected again. (See Chapter 11-Amplify Features.)
The example shows a search for Jerusalem in the KJV text, followed by an amplify to the Old
Testament parallel for 2Sam. 5:6.
16-10
17
Color Highlighting
Chapter Contents:
Highlight Styles ............................................. 17-2
Deleting a Style ............................................. 17-4
The Highlight Palette..................................... 17-4
Adding Highlights to Words and Verses........ 17-4
Multiple Highlight Files ................................. 17-7
Searching for Styles....................................... 17-8
17
Color Highlighting
Color highlighting lets you mark the background of words or verses in a variety of patterns
and colors, and store the marks for future reference. This allows you to mark texts and tools in
many ways, such as to indicate themes, or grammatical uses.
Highlighting can be applied and viewed in any pane with text from the Bible or another corpus,
as well as to tools.
When applied to a verse, the highlight style can be viewed in any translation. The individual
word highlighting is specific to the text or version or the tool. Both kinds of marking are saved
and can be recalled at any time.
You can also search for the specific highlight styles in any module.
Highlight Styles
Accordance lets you define the styles that you will use to
highlight the text, by setting the color, intensity, shape, and
pattern. The number of possible combinations is almost
unlimited. Each style can be given a name indicating its
meaning.
Multiple files can be created to store different sets of
highlight styles and different highlight markups.
The Define Highlight Styles Dialog Box
Before you can use the highlight feature you must create
some styles, or just use the default Important style.
Select Define Highlight Styles… (Display menu
or ⌘-E) to open the Define Highlight Styles dialog
box.
This dialog box is similar to the Define Ranges dialog
box described in Chapter 7, and others which follow
the same design.
The Highlight File pop-up menu lets you select
the file of highlights, or create a new one.
A default style appears in the scrolling list on the
upper left of the dialog box. The details of the
currently selected style appear in the pop-up
menus in the Style box below.
The New button adds [New style name] to the
list, below the selected name. Enter a name
for the style in place of [New style name].
The name should reflect the meaning that this
style will have for you.
Clicking on the New, Up, Down, or the OK
button, or on another name in the list, adds
the new style to the scrolling list of styles.
17-2
The Up and Down buttons move the selected style name
up and down the list. The styles will appear on the
Highlight palette in the order that they appear on this
list.
Clicking the Cancel button closes the window without
saving ANY changes to the groups. Clicking OK closes
the window and saves ALL changes.
To define the characteristics of the new style, set each of the
four pop-up menus in the dialog box.
The Color pop-up menu lets you choose from the standard
range of colors.
The Intensity pop-up menu offers a range of color density
from Normal to Very Light. In general, the higher
intensities are best applied to thin lines, and the lower
intensities work best with thick lines.
The Shape pop-up menu lets you select the shape of the
line that is drawn through the text. The first three
shapes are the full width of the text and either solid,
or hollow with a thick or thin border that draws a box
around the selection. The other shapes are varieties
of strike-through lines of different widths and offsets,
in the middle, above or below the text. the white box
indicates where the line will be drawn relative to the
text.
The Pattern pop-up menu offers a solid line and a series
of horizontal patterns. When applied to a thin line the
patterns create a dotted line. With a thick line they appear as stripes.
The Sample Text item demonstrates how the highlighting will look.
Hints: If you highlight with a full width solid line you will be unable to see a
selection in the highlighted text, even with a very light density. Any other
combination of shape and pattern allows you to see your selections with
the highlight.
If you highlight with the thickest strike-through you will be able to see
your selections, but continuously highlighted text will have horizontal
white lines between the lines.
Use a fine horizontal pattern with the full width solid shape to see your
selections within the highlighting, but with an appearance of solid color.
The various offsets of the lines allow you to apply overlapping underline styles.
Doing Your Own Thing
17-3
17
Color Highlighting
Deleting a Style
Clicking the Delete button removes the
currently selected style. A dialog box will
warn you that if the style is used by any
module, all text highlighting in that style will
also be deleted. Click Cancel to preserve the
style and its highlighting. The style is not
actually deleted until you also click OK in the
Define Highlight Styles dialog box.
The Highlight Palette
This palette displays the highlight styles which you have
defined so that you can apply them to selected text. Open
the palette by selecting Highlight Palette (Window menu).
A check (✓) indicates that the palette is open. Like the other
floating windows, this palette remains on screen floating
above all Accordance windows, until you close it.
The pop-up menu lets you select a different set of
Highlights. The rest of the palette shows the name of each style highlighted in its own style.
The gray square at the lower right lets you resize the palette to show the styles in as many
vertical columns as you choose. The first styles on the list are always shown, but if the palette
is too small to show all the styles, the last ones will be hidden.
The Clear button removes the styles from your selection in the text.
Adding Highlights to Words and
Verses
Highlighting Words
Simply select the words (or parts of words)
you want to highlight and click on
the style in the Highlight palette, or
select the name of the style from the
Highlight submenu of the contextual
menu. The chosen style appears in your
selection and in any other text panes
displaying the same version and verse.
To highlight another selection with the style
you last used, press ⌘-8.
17-4
Styles can be overlapped, but solid colors will hide the highlighting that was applied
behind them.
To remove a highlight, click any part of the highlighted area and click the Clear
button, or Clear Highlights from the contextual menu. The entire area of
highlighting is removed.
The highlighting is automatically saved and recalled whenever that module is opened.
Highlighting Hits
When you have hit words
showing in the text
pane, pressing the shift
key while clicking on a
style will highlight every
hit word in the text. A
warning dialog allows
you to cancel this step.
You can also select the name of the style from the Highlight Hits submenu of the
contextual menu.
Hint: This feature allows you to highlight an entire text with the result of any search:
a grammatical tag, a key number, rare words, etc.
To remove the highlighting from all current hits, press the shift key and click the
Clear button.
Doing Your Own Thing
17-5
17
Color Highlighting
Highlighting Tools
Word highlighting can be applied to tools (but not User Tools) in the same way as
to Bible text. However, whenever the tool is updated, the highlighting may be
displaced and appear on different words. It is therefore probably unwise to invest
a lot of effort in highlighting any tool module.
Highlighting Verses
To highlight an entire verse, click in the verse reference and then select a style in the
Highlight palette or contextual menu. The highlighting now applies to the entire
verse, and to the same verse in any translation or version.
The verse highlighting includes the entire text of the verse, as well as the reference,
unless there is word highlighting in that verse. In that case, the verse highlighting
appears only in the reference.
If you add word highlighting to a highlighted verse, the verse highlighting disappears
from the text of the verse.
To remove a verse highlight, click anywhere in the verse reference and click the Clear
button, or select Clear Highlight from the contextual menu.
Verse highlighting applies only to texts, not to tools.
The verse highlighting is automatically saved and recalled for any Bible text, or text of
the same corpus.
Mixed Selections
If you select both the reference and some of the text in a single verse, and select a
style, you will get a dialog box telling you that you cannot highlight anything in a
mixed selection.
However, if you select text and references from more than one verse, the highlighting
is applied to all the verses included in the selection.
If you select text and references from more than one highlighted verse and click
Clear, both word and verse highlighting is removed from the selected verses.
Displaying the Highlighting
The Set Text Pane Display… (Display or contextual menu or ⌘-T)
lets you turn on and off both the verse and word highlighting for
the selected text pane, or as a default for that version.
The Set Tool Display… dialog box has a similar option to Hide
word highlighting.
In the Text and Tool Display pages of the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or
⌘-,) you can set the same options as defaults for all your texts and tools.
Both the verse and word highlighting turn on automatically if you add any highlighting
to a word or verse, or if you search for a highlighting style.
17-6
Exporting the Highlighting
The visible highlighting will automatically be printed with the text. Use the Set Text
Pane Display to hide the highlighting if you do not wish to print it.
The highlights cannot be exported from Accordance, except by taking a snapshot
of the window (screenshot) which creates a PICT file. The Keyboard shortcuts
page in Mac Help: Shortcuts and tips explains how to do this using a combination
of keystrokes. The picture of the window can then be incorporated in another
document.
Your highlight files can be shared with other Accordance users as explained below.
Multiple Highlight Files
Accordance allows you to create multiple sets of highlighting which are stored in separate
Highlight files.
In Mac OS X these files are in your user /Documents/Accordance Files/Highlights.
In Classic OS they will be in the Accordance folder/Modules/Shared Highlights.
Each file has its own set of defined styles, and its own set of words and verses to which a style
has been applied.
Creating and Adding Files
To create a new file, select New Highlight File… from the
pop-up menu in either the Highlight palette or the Define
Highlight Styles dialog box. Enter a name for the new file in
the dialog box and press OK. A new blank file is created in
the correct folder.
If you place a Highlight file from another user
or another computer in this folder, or if you
duplicate or rename a file in the folder, the new
file will automatically appear on the list when
you launch Accordance.
Hint: This feature lets you save different sets of
highlights, and to share highlights with
other users.
Note: Highlight files for version 7+ have a .hlt suffix. They are not compatible with
earlier versions of Accordance. However, you can rename a Highlight Settings
file from an earlier version, and add the suffix, and Accordance will load it
correctly.
When you load a Highlight file from another source, any highlighting which has
been applied to texts or tools will be available to your copy of Accordance. Verse
highlighting will appear on all Bibles (or texts of the same corpus), but word
highlighting on texts or tools will only appear on the module of the same name.
Doing Your Own Thing
17-7
17
Color Highlighting
Switching Between Highlight Files
Changing the file on the pop-up menu in the Define Highlight Styles dialog box
changes the list of styles in the dialog box. If you make any changes to the styles
and then switch to another file you will be asked whether you want to save your
changes. When you click OK the file currently selected will appear on the Highlight
palette.
You can also change the file on the pop-up menu directly in the Highlight palette. This
changes both the styles displayed on the palette, and the styles which appear on
the texts and tools.
Searching for Styles
The [STYLE] command allows you to search for the words or verses
you have highlighted in a specific style.
Selecting Style from the Enter Command submenu (Search or
contextual menu or shift-⌘-S) places [STYLE ?] in the argument
entry box with the question mark selected. Enter the first letters of
the style you want to find, or an asterisk (*) to find all the styles.
Add any other search criteria and select the range for your search.
All verses (paragraphs in tools) highlighted with this style, or
with highlighted words in this style, are found, but the search
highlighting applies only to any words in the search argument.
This example shows a search for the Important style with the
word earth in the same verse, in the book of Genesis.
17-8
18
Reference Lists
Chapter Contents:
Opening a Reference List Window................. 18-2
The Reference List Window ........................... 18-2
Adding and Deleting Verses .......................... 18-4
Searching the Contents ................................. 18-4
18
Reference Lists
The Reference List window lets you accumulate verses of interest as you come across them.
The list of verses can be viewed in any version, amplified, saved, or printed just like the results
in a Search window. You can also search the set of verses in the list using the [CONTENTS]
command in the Search window as described below.
This chapter assumes that you already know how to use the Search window and the text panes
which are introduced in Chapter 4 and described in detail in Chapters 6 and 7. If you are not
familiar with the Search window, please review Chapter 4 first.
Opening a Reference List Window
Select Reference List from the New submenu (File menu) to open a new Reference List
window. To open a previously saved Reference List window, select Open… (File menu or ⌘-O)
and choose the window name
from the list in the dialog box.
You can also open a new
Reference List window by
selecting or marking text in a
text pane, and choosing New
Reference List Window
from the submenu of either
the Add Selection To or
the Add Marked Verses To
items (Selection or contextual
menu). Any open Reference List
windows will also appear in this
submenu.
The Reference List Window
The Reference List window consists of an upper description box and the text panes below.
The description box is identical to the description box for the Construct window which is
described in Chapter 10. It allows you to enter notes for future reference about the verses
which you collect in the window. The Text palette (and Display menu) can be used to set the
font and styles of your comments.
The Top Bar
The Number of Verses
The large numerals 45 in the top left of the middle bar indicate the total
number of verses in the list.
18-2
Verse 1 of 41 indicates the number of the verse currently at the top of the
pane, and the number of verses showing in the window. Some verses are
present in the list but not displayed because they are not included in the
text in the Text order pop-up menu.
Compare Texts
The function of this checkbox is identical to that described in Chapter 6-Viewing
the Text. It highlights differences between the first two texts of each language.
The Text Order Pop-up Menu
The Text order pop-up menu sets the Bible text used to determine the book
and verse order of your verses. For example, if you select JPS, the books
will appear in the order of the Hebrew Bible, and no verses for the New
Testament will be displayed.
The Text Panes
The text panes are identical to the Search window text panes described in Chapter 6. You
can add as many panes as the width of the window allows, and set the text in each pane in its
display text pop-up menu. You can also add Tool panes and User Notes panes as described in
Chapters 14 and 19.
The font size buttons, scroll bar, text access buttons, Prior and Next buttons, and
reference box function in the same way as in the Search window.
The text in each pane is just like the Bible text in a Search or Text window. It can be selected for
copying or for any of the Amplify features described in Chapter 12. Bookmarks and user notes
can also be added. (See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.)
You can customize how the text is displayed in each pane by selecting Set Text Pane
Display… (Display or contextual menu or ⌘-T).
Doing Your Own Thing
18-3
18
Reference Lists
General Window Features
Most of the window features described in Chapter 18 also apply to the Reference List
window. This includes duplicating a window, and the use of the Window menu
to tile and stack the windows. You can also tie the scrolling of the Reference
List window to another window indexed by verse references, such as a Search,
User Notes, Text window, or a Tools window indexed by reference, such as a
commentary.
When you open a new Reference List window, it is given a default name such as
Reference List. You can set a new window name by selecting Name… from the Set
submenu (Window menu or option-⌘-N).
Saving and Printing
You can save and print a Reference List window as described in Chapter 23.
Note: Unlike the user notes and tools which are saved as Accordance modules, the
reference list is only saved as a window. You must save the window if you wish
to keep and reopen the list in Accordance.
Hint: Using the Reference List window is a convenient way to collect non-adjacent
verses from a Search window for printing or export as a text file.
Adding and Deleting Verses
There are two ways to add verses to your reference list. You can either select verses in a Bible
text pane, and select the name of the reference list from the Add Selection To submenu
(Selection or contextual menu). Alternately, you can bookmark verses in a Bible text pane, and
select the name of the reference list from the Add Marked Verses To submenu (Selection
menu). Both of these submenus show the names of any open Reference List windows as well as
the item New Reference List Window.
To delete verses from your reference list, either select or mark the verses you wish to delete,
and select Delete Selected Verses or Delete Marked Verses (Selection menu).
Searching the Contents
Although you cannot directly search in the Reference List window, you can search its contents
by using the [CONTENTS] command in a Search window as described in Chapter 6. You can add
other commands, or a link to a Construct window. For example, the search argument:
[CONTENTS Reference List] <NOT> Isaac finds the verses on the list that do not contain
Isaac, and the entry [CONTENTS Reference List] <AND> [LINK Simple Construct] finds all
the verses in the reference list containing the search defined in the Construct window.
Hint: This is a convenient way to create and search a set of verses.
18-4
User Notes
19
Chapter Contents:
Creating a User Notes File............................. 19-2
The Edit Window ........................................... 19-3
The User Notes Window ................................ 19-8
The User Notes Pane in a Bible Text Window 19-11
Setting Defaults for User Notes................... 19-12
Amplifying to User Notes............................ 19-13
Duplicating or Renaming User Notes .......... 19-14
Merging User Notes Files............................. 19-14
19
User Notes
Accordance lets you create your own user notes files which are linked to
the verse references of any version you view. You can use any font and
style in the notes including Greek and Hebrew, and add hypertextable
Scripture references. The notes file forms an Accordance module which
can be opened, searched, and accessed from the Resource palette (or
Amplify or contextual menu) like any other Accordance module, but which can
also be edited by the user.
This chapter assumes that you already know how to use the Search window which is introduced
in Chapter 4 and covered in detail in Chapters 6-7. If you are not familiar with the Search
window, please review chapter 4 first. The
word processing capabilities are described
in Chapter 24-Working with Windows.
Creating a User Notes File
There are various ways in which you can
create a new user notes file:
• Select New User Notes… from the
User Files submenu (File menu), or
New Notes File… from the My Notes
pop-up menu in the Resource palette.
• If you have no user notes already saved, you can also create a new
file if you select Edit User Note (Selection or contextual menu, or
⌘-U)
A warning appears to remind you that this will create a new user notes
file. The intention of this warning is to remind you that you do NOT
need to go through this procedure just to add or save individual notes
to a notes file you have already
created.
You must create at least one
user notes file before you can
add notes to a verse as shown
below. You may create or install
as many files as you wish. If
you decide not to save a new
set of notes, click Cancel.
If you click OK, the standard
Macintosh dialog box lets you
save the notes with any name.
In Mac OS X these files are in your user /
Documents/Accordance Files/User Notes.
In Classic OS they will be in the Accordance folder/
Modules/Shared User Notes.
19-2
A further dialog reminds you
that you are creating a notes
file for the text in the front
window. Notes on a Bible text
can be used with any Bible, but
if the text is from a non-Biblical
corpus the notes will apply only
to texts of that corpus.
You can add a previously
created notes file to the pop-up menus by selecting Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option
⌘-A), and clicking the Add Module button, or by double-clicking on the icon. This may be
necessary if the user notes were removed in the Arrange Modules window, were not found by
Accordance, or were transferred from another computer.
Note: If you upgrade from an earlier version of Accordance, all your user notes files will
be moved to the Accordance folder/Modules/Shared User Notes folder. In Mac OS
X the files are then copied to your user /Documents/Accordance Files/User Notes.
These latter files are the ones that Accordance will access and update when you
edit them.
The Edit Window
User notes are added or edited in the Edit window, which
can be opened either from a Bible text pane or from a User
Notes window. The window displays the contents of the
note on a single verse.
Creating a New Note
There are three ways to add a new note to a verse:
1. A new Edit window for a new verse can be opened
from a Bible text pane by clicking in the verse for
which you want to make a note, then selecting Edit
User Note (Selection or contextual menu, or ⌘-U).
If you have saved or installed only one notes file, or
if one User Notes window is already open, the Edit
window appears directly.
If you have more than one notes file available or
open, a dialog box opens allowing you to choose
which file you want to edit.
Note: By default this dialog box opens only once in a
session, so that it automatically adds new notes
to the same file. You can change this setting in the
User Notes page of the Preferences dialog, as
described later in this chapter.
Doing your own Thing
19-3
19
User Notes
If you have not saved any user notes files, the Save dialog box will let you create a
new file, as described above.
If your selection includes more than one verse, the window opens for the first verse.
If an Edit window is already open for this set of notes, it will change to display the
new note.
2. A new Edit window will also open if you amplify to a notes file in which there is
currently no note saved for your selected verse or verses. Amplifying to user notes
is described later in this chapter.
3. To add a note to the next verse: press option as you click the up or down access
button at the bottom left of the Edit window. This saves the current note and adds a
note to the previous or next verse, which makes it easy to annotate a series of verses.
If you then enter no text and go on to the next verse, the empty note is not saved.
The new Edit window opens with the verse
reference in the window, and the cursor flashing
on the line below. This lets you quickly add a note
under the verse reference.
The Edit window always opens in a detached
window. You can resize and place it wherever it is
convenient to you, and Accordance will recall its
size and position when it is reopened for any user notes file.
Note: By default only one Edit window can be open for each notes file. You can change
this setting in the User Notes page of the Preferences, as described below.
Reopening the Edit Window
The text in the User Notes window cannot be edited directly. User notes can only be
added or edited in the Edit window. The Edit window can be reopened either from a
Bible text pane or from a User Notes window or pane.
To reopen an Edit window for a note you have already saved, click in the verse in the
Bible text, or in the text of the note itself, and select Edit User Note (Selection or
contextual menu, or ⌘-U).
Accordance will also automatically open the Edit window if you attempt to type in the
User Notes window or User Notes pane. The selection point will be placed correctly
so that you can continue to type modifications or additions to the note.
The Title of the Window
The title of the Edit window (e.g “My Notes” (Gen. 1:9) Edit) shows the verse
reference to which the note belong, and the title of the notes file.
Entering Text
You can enter text in the Edit window by typing or by copying and pasting. The Text
palette (and contextual and Display menu) enable you to set the font, size, style
and color of the notes. (See Chapter 22-Working with Windows.)
19-4
The Font, Size, and Color submenus allow you
to select from any font available on your
system along with a range of font sizes and
colors. The check mark indicates the current
selection. The Style submenu and buttons let
you select from the standard styles, and support the standard keyboard shortcuts.
The Superscript/Subscript options raise or lower the selection relative to the
baseline of the text.
The Style only and Paste Style items in the Copy as submenu (Edit or contextual
menu, or ⌘-[ or ]) let you copy the font, size, style, and color of any selected text,
and paste these characteristics onto the selection in the Edit window.
Scripture Links
The Scripture Link button sets the color and style of the selection to blue underline
so that it forms a hypertextable link in the notes. Clicking the button again resets
the style to plain black.
Enter a verse reference or string of references using standard Accordance notation,
select the reference so that the Scripture Link button becomes active, and click
it. You can also select Add Scripture Link from the contextual menu or press ⌘L to create the link. You can add links to a non-Biblical corpus in the same way. A
string of references appears as a single link in the Notes, unless the book name is
added to each reference, and it is linked separately. There is no validation of the
reference until you click on the link in the User Notes window, as described below.
For new users, the reference at the top of the Edit window is automatically set to blue
underline. You can change this setting as described below.
Both the Scripture reference that appears when you open a new Edit window, and any
additional references you define, are saved as part of the Content of the notes.
Find and Replace
Selecting Find/Replace (Search
or contextual menu or ⌘-F) opens a
dialog box that lets you find a word
or phrase and replace it within the
text showing in the Edit window
The dialog box is similar to those
used in other applications. You enter
or paste the text you wish to find on
the left, and the text to replace it on
the right (leave it blank to delete the
found text).
Use the checkboxes to limit the find to whole words and Latin characters and make it
case sensitive.
The buttons perform these actions:
Find highlights the next occurrence.
Doing your own Thing
19-5
19
User Notes
Replace, Find replaces the highlighted text and finds the next occurrence.
Replace replaces the highlighted text.
Replace All replaces every occurrence throughout the text displayed in the
current Edit window.
The Status section reminds you of the document being searched.
To undo the replace, click on the Edit window and select Undo (Edit menu or ⌘-Z).
The dialog box remains open for repeated use until you close it. Click the access
buttons in the Edit window to go to the next section of the module and repeat the
Find/Replace as necessary.
Spell Checking
Selecting Spelling (Search or contextual
menu or ⌘-:) opens a dialog box that lets
you correct any mispelled words within
the text in the Edit window. This feature is
only available in Mac OS 10.4 and above.
The dialog box is similar to those used
in other applications for spell checking.
It finds the first unknown word in the
English text (Latin characters) showing in
the Edit window, and offers a selection of
possible replacements. The word found
is highlighted in the text entry box, and
the suggested replacements appear in the
scrolling box above.
A single click on a suggested spelling places the new word in the text box.
A double-click on a word in the list replaces the word in the text of the Edit window
and moves on to the next word.
The buttons perform these actions:
Guess is active after editing the selected word, and produces a new list of suggestions.
Find Next finds the next unknown word in the text.
Skip ignores the spelling of this word, during the current session only.
Correct All corrects every occurrence in the text in the current Edit window.
Correct replaces the selected word in the text with the word in the text entry
box text, and moves on to the next misspelled word.
Learn permanently saves the selected word as a correct new word.
The Status section reminds you of the document being searched, and when the search
is complete.
To undo the replace, click on the Edit window and select Undo (Edit menu or ⌘-Z).
The dialog box remains open for repeated use until you close it. Click the access
buttons in the Edit window to go to the next section of the module and repeat the
spell check as necessary.
19-6
Saving Changes
Selecting Save (Edit menu or ⌘-S), or clicking the Update button adds any changes
you have made to your notes file without closing the Edit window. Any open User
Notes windows are updated and the present search is repeated.
If you close the window without updating, you will be asked whether or not you want
to update the notes.
The Access Buttons
The access buttons at the lower left (or pressing command and the up and down
arrow keys) advance the text to the next or prior saved user note. Only one note
is displayed at a time. When you click the up or down access buttons, the current
user note is updated with any changes you have made, and the next note is
displayed. If that note is already open in another Edit window, Accordance will ask
your permission to update and close the other window.
Pressing option as you click the up or down access button (or press the keys) creates a
note for the next verse, if there is no note on that verse in this notes file.
Edit Window Defaults
You can set the default font and styles for both the reference and the rest of the notes in the
Edit Windows page of the Preferences dialog, as described later in this chapter. You may
prefer to do this before you add any notes. The new defaults will be used whenever you open
an Edit window for a new note.
The Verse Reference
When you open the Edit window for a new verse,
the verse reference appears in the window, and
the cursor is flashing on the line below. This
convenient feature lets you quickly add a note
under the verse reference. However, when you
update the note, the verse reference is saved as
part of the contents of your notes. Note that this
is NOT the reference which indexes the note and
links it to the Bible text.
Therefore you can edit or delete this verse
reference as you desire. In this example, the
reference for Gen. 1:3 has been expanded to
cover verses 3-5, and the references for verses
4-5 have been deleted. This does not affect
searching in the Reference field, as the search
still found and bookmarked the note which
refers to Gen. 1:4.
Doing your own Thing
19-7
19
User Notes
The Edit window is always linked to the specific verse reference and user notes file displayed
in the title. To add or edit a note for another verse, you can use the access buttons to page to
that verse, or find the verse in the text of the bible or your notes, and select Edit User Note
(Selection menu or ⌘-U).
The Red Dot in the Bible Text Pane
A red dot appears in the margin of a verse
in any selected Bible text pane to indicate
that a note has been added. Double-clicking
on the red dot opens all user notes for that
verse.
Deleting a Note
To delete an entire user note, select
and delete all its contents including the
reference in the Edit window. When you
update the notes, the red dot for that verse
will disappear from the text pane margin.
If you delete an entire note, and the search
criteria of an open User Notes window is the
reference of the deleted note, you will get a
message that the note is not found
The User Notes Window
A demonstration user notes file titled Sample notes can be found in
the Accordance folder or the Demo files folder on the CD-ROM, and can
be used to try out this window.
To open a User Notes window, select the name of the file from the My
Notes pop-up menu in the Resource palette, or open it from the New
submenu (File menu) or the Finder like any other module.
The User Notes window is similar to the Search window, and consists
of an entry section in the upper part and a lower text pane.
The Entry Section
The entry section includes pop-up menus for the user notes, the field, and the History, as
well as the argument entry box and OK button. The recycle and tie symbols appear above
the OK button when appropriate, as described in Chapters 7 and 11.
The user notes pop-up menu shows the current notes file and allows you to select
from any notes file saved or installed on Accordance. Any criteria you enter into
the entry box are matched against the contents of the notes file.
19-8
You can remove a notes file or change the order of the user notes in this pop-up
menu in the Arrange Modules window (Edit menu) described in Chapter 7.
Note: If you move or change the name of a user notes file in the Finder, when
you launch Accordance it will ask where the file is. If you click Cancel in
this dialog box, Accordance will remove the file from the menus. To see
the notes in the menus again, you will need to open or add them.
The field pop-up menu
is similar to the
Tools window popup menu of the same
name. The “fields”
which you can
search in user notes
are the Reference
and Content. When
you search the user
notes, your search
entry is applied to
the current field.
For example, if your
search entry is Job,
you can either search
the Content for
notes including the
word “job” or “Job”, or search the Reference for the book “Job”.
The Reference field contains the actual verse references to which the notes are
attached. The Content includes all the visible text in the text pane including any
verse references.
The History pop-up menu is the same as the Search window.
The argument entry box is similar to that of the Search window. However, none of
the commands such as <AND>, <OR> etc., nor the wild-cards, are accepted in this
window. Accordance performs only a simple character search on the Content, so
that it searches only for the exact characters entered in the argument entry box.
If you paste Greek or Hebrew words into the entry box, they will appear in English
characters. Performing a search with these characters will find the same word
in the notes including any accents, vowel points, and ending forms. Thus if you
pasted Greek or Hebrew words from the Bible text into your notes, you will find
them only if the accents, vowel points, or ending forms are also used in the search,
but if you have unaccented words in your notes, you must search with unaccented
characters.
The Reference field lets you enter verse references in the same manner as the
Verse reference searches described in Chapter 7. Entering an asterisk (*) will
display the entire notes file. No “hits” are highlighted when you search this field,
but any notes found for the references are displayed.
Doing your own Thing
19-9
19
User Notes
The Text Pane
The text pane is similar to the Tools window in that you cannot add other text panes in
parallel. You can, however, tie two User Notes windows together to view their contents in
parallel. There is no text pop-up menu since the pane displays the same user notes that you
are searching. The number of hits, the current and total number of verses, and the scroll bar
function in the same way as the Search window.
The Show all text check box is the same as that used in the Text window. When the
Show all text box is not checked, only the verses containing “hits” are shown in
the text pane. If you check the box, the entire text of the notes is displayed, with
a bookmark at the beginning of each “hit” verse. The window displays the first
bookmark at the top of the pane.
The Notes order pop-up menu sets the Bible text used to determine the book and
verse order of your notes. For example, if you select a Hebrew Bible, such as BHSW4, the books will appear in the order of the Hebrew Bible, and no notes for the
New Testament will be displayed.
When you open a new User Notes window from the File menu, the default setting
is determined in the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,). However,
whenever you open the Edit or User Notes windows from another window, the
Notes order pop-up menu is set to the same text as the pop-up menu which
controls the verse order in that window.
All text in blue underline style is a Scripture hypertext link which works like
Scripture references in tools. The Instant Details box displays the first verse in
the reference, from the text currently showing in the Notes order pop-up menu.
Clicking on the link opens a text window displaying all the verses in the same text
(unless a Text window is already open).
Since the link is not validated when the note is saved (unlike user tools), an error
message appears if Accordance cannot find the reference in the current text or in
an open Text window. If there is a mistake in the reference, you can return to the
Edit window to correct it.
You can create hypertext links to another corpus, such as to Qumran texts in notes
on the Bible. In order to see the reference, open a Text window and set the Notes
order pop-up menu to the desired text, then click the reference.
The text access buttons and the reference box are similar to those of the Search
window as described in Chapter 6.
The Set windowname Display… item is dimmed in the Display menu, since you
cannot vary the display of the notes in this window. In the Edit window you can,
use the Display menu or Text palette to change the font, size, style and color of
the notes. You can also set default styles for the user notes in the Edit Windows
page of the Preferences dialog, as described below.
19-10
General Window Features
Most of the window features described in Chapters 23 and 25 apply also to the User Notes
window. This includes duplicating a window, and the use of the Window menu to tile and stack
the User Notes windows with all other open windows.
You can also tie the scrolling of the User Notes window to another window indexed
by verse references, such as a Search, Reference list, Text window, or a Tools
window indexed by reference, such as a commentary.
You can open a notes file from the Finder by double-clicking on its file icon, or by
selecting it when you choose Open… (File menu or ⌘-O). In either case the notes
open with the field pop-up menu set to Reference, the Notes order pop-up
menu set to the default text, an asterisk in the argument entry box, and all the
notes appearing in the window.
When you open a new User Notes window, it is given the name of the notes file, such
as Own Notes. The name of the window updates whenever you change the notes
file you are displaying in that window. However, if you change the name of the
User Notes window by selecting Name… from the Set submenu (Window menu or
option-⌘-N), the new name will no longer update when you change user notes files.
You can save and print User Notes windows as described in Chapter 23.
Note: When you close a User Notes window you will be asked if you want to save the
window. The contents of any new notes have already been saved when you added
them to the notes. Therefore there is no need to save the window to preserve the
notes. Saving the window only saves the current set-up of the window itself.
The User Notes Pane in a Bible Text Window
Just like the Tool pane described at the end of
Chapter 14-Tools, you can add a pane displaying
your user notes to a Search, Text or Reference List
window. Select the user notes file from the Add
pane: My Notes button on the Search window (or
Reference List or Text window).
The notes open in a lower pane which can be switched to the upper row by clicking the
position button beside the pop-up menu. Pressing option while adding the pane adds it
directly to the upper row.
This pane allows you to see and print your notes in parallel with the Bible text. You can also
edit the notes by opening the Edit window directly from the User Notes pane.
Note: If the search text is not a Biblical text, such as Qumran, the Add pane: My Notes
pop-up menu shows only the notes that belong to the same corpus.
Doing your own Thing
19-11
19
User Notes
Setting Defaults for User Notes
User Notes Window Defaults
You can set various default items for the User Notes
window. To do this, select User Notes Window from
the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application
or Edit menu or ⌘-,)
The Default settings apply when you choose User
Notes Window from the New submenu (File
menu). They do not affect the User Notes window
when you open it from the Resource palette (or
Amplify menu).
The Notes pop-up menu determines which notes
file will be opened.
The Text pop-up menu sets the Bible text used to determine the book and verse order
of your notes.
The Highlighting section sets the display of “hit” words, after a search in the User Notes
window. The settings apply to all User Notes windows.
The style and color pop-up menus control the style and color display of these “hit”
words. These pop-up menus are similar to those in the Text Display dialog box
described in Chapter 6.
Note: When you search the Reference field of user notes, no “hits” are highlighted,
since only the contents are displayed but not the references by which the notes
are indexed.
The Edit User Notes section controls the opening of the Edit window.
Reopen last Notes file selected in dialog affects the dialog box which opens to
allow the selection of the user notes file to be edited, when you have more than
one notes file available or open. If the box is checked, the dialog box appears
only once in a session, unless the text in the front window is from a different
corpus. This enables you to continue working in the same set of notes. If the box is
unchecked, the dialog box opens each time.
Allow multiple Edit windows opens a new Edit window for each verse in your
selection (up to a maximum of 10), unless a window for that verse is already
open. If unchecked, only one Edit window is opened for each set of Notes, and it
is recycled when you attempt to edit another verse. Any edited notes are saved
before its contents are replaced with the next note to be edited.
Use default fonts in font menu limits the font menu and submenu to the Accordance
fonts plus the two default fonts selected in the Edit Windows page. This avoids
scrolling through a long font list and standardizes the appearance of the notes.
Edit Window Defaults
Selecting Edit windows from the list in the Preferences dialog box lets you set defaults which
apply to all new Edit windows you open, for any notes file.
19-12
These defaults help you set a uniform appearance for
your user notes, but they do not change the display
of notes which have already been saved. You can also
choose the font, size and style as you enter or edit your
notes, as described above.
The section labeled User Notes Text allows you to set
the default font and size for the text of your notes in
the second line of a new Edit window.
The section labeled User Notes Reference allows you
to set the default font, size, color, and style for the
verse reference which first appears in a new Edit
window. You can choose from any font available
on your system, along with a range of sizes and
the standard styles and colors. If you select Blue
and Underline, the verse references will become
hypertextable Scripture links. The word “Sample”
displays the currently selected styles.
The User Tool Edit pop-up menu is described in the next chapter on user tools.
The Use “smart” quotation marks checkbox lets you turn off the smart quotes which
automatically replace plain quotation marks in the Edit windows of user notes and
user tools, and the description boxes of Construct and Verse Reference windows.
Amplifying to User Notes
Before you create or install a user notes file, the My Notes pop-up
menu on the Resource palette shows only the item New Notes File.
After two or more notes files are saved, All User Notes and Merge…
appear as well, allowing you to select all the user notes (and merge
two sets of notes).
To amplify to a user note, simply select a word or leave the cursor
flashing in a Bible verse marked with a red dot, and select the user
notes from the Resource palette or Amplify menu. Alternately, you
can double-click on the red dot to open all user notes for that verse.
When a User Notes window is opened in this way, the user notes pop-up menu is always set
to the notes file you have selected. The field pop-up menu is set to Reference. The Notes
order pop-up menu is set to the Bible text from which you amplified, and the argument entry
box contains the verse references you selected.
The window displays the recycle symbol above the OK button. The window will be
reused automatically if the same user notes are selected again from the same Bible
text. (See Chapter 12-Amplify Features.)
If none of the selected verses is found in the user notes, a new Edit window opens for
the first verse or each verse, depending on your Preferences settings.
Note: You cannot amplify from a selection in a User Notes window, though you can make
Scripture references hypertextable.
Doing your own Thing
19-13
19
User Notes
Duplicating or Renaming User Notes
To change the name of a user notes file, you should first use Arrange Modules (Edit menu or
option-⌘-A) to remove the original name from the pop-up menus. Otherwise, when you launch
Accordance it will attempt to find the original file. If you then cancel the Where is? dialog box,
the name of the original file will be deleted from the pop-up menus.
Then simply edit the file name on the desktop (Finder) in and add it to Accordance. In Mac OS
X these file is in your user /Documents/Accordance Files/User Notes. In Classic OS it is in the
Accordance folder/Modules/Shared User Notes.
Similarly, you can duplicate a notes file on the desktop, edit the name and add it to Accordance
in the usual way. You can also add notes that you have transferred from another computer.
Merging User Notes Files
Accordance lets you merge one
existing user notes file with
another. Select Merge… from
the My Notes pop-up menu of
the Resource palette, or Merge
User Notes… from the User Files
submenu (File menu). The Merge
dialog box lets you select the notes
file to be merged from the Merge:
scrolling list on the left, and the
notes file into which it will be
merged from the Into: right hand list.
The notes of the file you select on the left will be merged with the notes on the right. The
combined file will keep the name of the Into: (right hand) file. You can edit this name as
described above. If each file has a note on the same verse, the note from the Merge: file
appears after the note from the Into: file. The notes file that was merged is deleted from the
pop-up menu list, but the file itself is NOT deleted from your hard drive, so you have the
choice of deleting it, keeping it, or adding it back to Accordance.
Hint: If you are not sure that you want to merge the two files, you may wish first to
make a copy of the original Into: notes file by duplicating it on the desktop.
Hint: If a notes file seems to be corrupt, you can try merging it into a new blank file.
If the resulting notes file would be too large for the available memory to handle (in Classic OS
7-9), the merge is canceled. You can increase the memory allocated to Accordance to overcome
this limit.
19-14
User Tools
20
Chapter Contents:
The User Tool Window .................................. 20-2
Creating a Blank User Tool ............................ 20-3
Duplicating or Renaming a User Tool ........... 20-4
The Edit Window ........................................... 20-4
Amplifying to User Tools ............................. 20-7
Importing to a User Tool ............................... 20-8
Merging User Tools...................................... 20-10
20
User Tools
User tools are modules which the user can both create and edit. This
Accordance feature lets you make modules for your personal use. These
may be composed as you go along, so that the tool is actually written
in Accordance. For example, you can take notes in class and edit them
later. Or you can import files which have been created in other software
programs.
Unlike the user notes, user tools are not directly linked to the Bible text, verse by verse. The
user tool functions like a General tool in Accordance.
Creating a user tool
There are two ways to create a user tool, both of which are described in detail below:
1. You can create a new blank user tool, and then copy and paste text into it, or
compose the text directly in the tool.
2. You can also create a new user tool by importing the text from a pre-existing file.
Currently Accordance allows you to import plain text files, HTML formatted files,
or the files of the Thesaurus Linguae Graecae (TLG).
Once created, the user tool can be edited and enhanced with colors and styles, Greek
and Hebrew, titles, and hypertextable Scripture links. It contains several fields which
can be searched in the same way as regular tools. The titles also appear in the browser.
The user tool can be opened from the Resource palette, or File or Amplify menu,
like any other Accordance module.
The User Tool Window
A demonstration user tool titled Sample tool can be found in the
Accordance folder or the Demo files folder on the CD-ROM, and can
be used to try out this window.
To open a User Tool window, select the name of the file from the My
Tools pop-up menu in the Resource palette, or open it from the
New submenu (File menu) or the Finder like any other module.
The User Tool window is almost identical to the Tools window
described in Chapter 14-The Tools Window.
The field pop-up menu is similar to the Tools window pop-up
menu of the same name, but it displays the same items in each
user tool. The “fields” which you can search in user tools are
the Titles, Content, Scripture, Greek, Hebrew, and Rosetta
(transliteration). A field which is not used in the current tool is
dimmed in the pop-up menu.
The argument entry box is similar to that of the Tools window, and all the
search commands used in other tools can also be used in user tools. Select
Enter Words… (Search menu or ⌘-J) to access the vocabulary list for the
current field.
20-2
If you select the
Greek, Hebrew,
or Rosetta fields,
your search will
be entered in the
correct font and
direction.
The Scripture field
lets you enter
verse references
and connecting
commands in the
same manner as
the Tools window.
The browser pane is
similar to the Tools
window. Spaces
may appear where
there are blank
titles. You can
select ranges in the
browser by option-clicking on the titles.
The Set Tool Display… item (Display menu or ⌘-T) lets you set the Roman font, base
font size and color, hypertext and highlight color and style, and the text for scripture
hypertext. This dialog is similar to the one for Tools described in Chapter 14.
Most of the window features described in Chapters 23 and 25 apply also to the User Tool
window. This includes duplicating a window, the use of the Window menu to tile
and stack the User Tool windows with all other open windows, renaming, saving and
printing the window.
Note: When you close a User Tool window you will be asked if you want to save the
window. Any changes you made to the tool in the Edit window have already been
saved. Therefore there is no need to save the window unless you want to save the
current set-up of the window itself.
Creating a Blank User Tool
To create a new blank user tool, select New User Tool… from the
User Files submenu (File menu) or the My Tools button of the
Resource palette.
The standard Macintosh dialog box lets you save the user tool with any name you choose.
In Mac OS X these files are in your user /Documents/Accordance Files/User Tools.
In Classic OS they will be in the Accordance folder/Modules/Shared User Tools.
If you do not wish to save a new user tool, click Cancel.
A new User Tool window opens with the blank tool.
Doing your own Thing
20-3
20
User Tools
Duplicating or Renaming a User Tool
To change the name of a user tool you can simply edit the name on the desktop (Finder) and
then add it to Accordance. You can use Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option-⌘-A) to remove
the former name from the pop-up menus. Similarly, you can duplicate a user tool on the
desktop, edit the name and add it to Accordance in the usual way. You can also add tools that
you have transferred from another computer.
The Edit Window
Like the user notes, a user tool is composed or
edited in the Edit window. You can open the Edit
window by selecting Edit User Tool (Selection or
contextual menu, or ⌘-U) when a user tool is the
front window. Accordance will also automatically
open the Edit window if you attempt to type in
the User Tool pane. The selection point will be
placed correctly so that you can continue to type
modifications or additions to the text.
There are some important differences between
the Edit window for user notes and this one for
user tools, as described below:
Font and Styles
In user notes (covered in Chapter 19) the fonts, styles, sizes, and colors of the text
are set in the Edit window and cannot be modified in the User Notes window. But
the display for user tools can be changed in the Set Tool Display… (Display or
contextual menu, or ⌘-T). Therefore, certain standard display settings are used in the
Edit window, and the text does not appear in this window exactly as it does in the User
Tool window.
You can enter text in the Edit window by typing or
by copying and pasting. The Text palette (and
contextual and Display menu) enable you to
set the font, size, style and color of the notes.
The Font submenu lets you choose between the default Roman font, and
Helena, Yehudit, or Rosetta. In the Edit window, Roman text is displayed
in Arial font in OS X, and in Geneva in Classic. Changing the font in
effect changes the field to which the text belongs, see below. The display
font in the User Tool window itself can be set as explained above.
Note: The user tool is not intended to be used for texts which are written
mainly in Hebrew. The Hebrew field is intended for insertions in a mainly
English text. Titles must be in English. Spaces should be used to separate the
English and Hebrew text to minimize problems with the mixed directions. See
Chapter 23-Working with Windows.
20-4
The Size submenu lets you select a font size relative to
the default. In the Edit window the default font size
is 12 point. If you select a smaller or larger size for
some text, it will scale in the User Tool window in
proportion to the current base font size.
For example: if you set a title in the Edit window to
18 point, and you have the text display for the user
tool set to 12 point, this title will be 18 point, but if
you enlarge the text display to 18 point, the title will
be 27 point.
The Style submenu lets you select from the standard
styles. At the bottom of this submenu is a
Superscript/Subscript option which lets you raise
or lower the selection relative to the baseline of the
text. Styled text retains its styles even when the
words are highlighted in the User Tool window.
The Color submenu allows you to select from a range of colors. If you select a color
other than black, this color will be displayed even if you set the Text color in the
User Tool window to another color, but the color of any “hit” words will be replaced
by the highlight color.
The Alignment submenu is active only in this window, and lets you select left, center
or right justification for the text.
The Style Only and Paste Style items in the Copy As submenu (Edit or contextual
menu, or ⌘-[ or ]) let you copy the font, size, style, and color of selected text in
any window, and paste these characteristics onto the selection in the Edit window.
However, changes from Arial to another Roman font are lost when the tool is
updated.
Note: If you paste text in Sylvanus or Peshitta font it will be displayed in that font, but
treated as part of the Contents field.
Saving Changes
Selecting Save (Edit menu or ⌘-S), or clicking
the Update button (or pressing enter) adds your
changes to the tool without closing the Edit
window. A progress bar shows the time remaining
to update the text. Any open User Tool windows
are updated at the same time. If you close the Edit
window without updating, you will be asked whether or not you want to update the tool.
The access buttons in the bottom left corner of the Edit window (or pressing command and
the up and down arrow keys) let you scroll this window through all the articles in the tool.
Therefore, only one Edit window for each user tool can be opened at a time. Unlike the User
Notes, more than one article may be displayed in the window. If you reach the end of the
currently displayed text by scrolling, you can click the access button to go to the next article. If
you have made any changes to the currently displayed articles, Accordance will automatically
update the tool before advancing to the next article.
Doing your own Thing
20-5
20
User Tools
Find and Replace, and Spell Checking
Selecting Find/Replace (Search or contextual menu, or ⌘-F) opens a dialog box that lets you
find a word or phrase and replace it within the text displayed in the Edit window.
Selecting Spelling (Search or contextual menu, or ⌘-:) opens the spell checking dialog box.
Both these dialog boxes are identical to those described in Chapter 19-User Notes.
Defining the Different Fields
All the text in the user tool belongs to one of the following fields: Titles, Content, Scripture,
Greek, Hebrew, or Rosetta.
Content includes the majority of the text — everything not specifically designated to another
field. The Content is broken up into articles, and each article is preceded by a title line.
Titles
The first line of the Edit window is always a title line. This is indicated
by the red T in the left margin. When the cursor is over the margin, it
changes to a red T. Clicking the cursor in the margin adds or removes a
T from the first line of the adjacent paragraph.
Pressing the option key while clicking in the margin creates a subtitle
indicated by a numeral. The first level of subtitles are marked with a 1,
option-clicking again raises the level, and shift-option-clicking lowers
it. Option-clicking on another
line below a subtitle starts
with the same level as the
previous subtitle. The cursor
changes to T+ or T- when the
option and shift-option keys
are pressed.
The title is limited to 128
characters. Use a carriage
return to end the title and
return to the Content, or to
start a second title if the title
is too long. Changing the
field to Scripture, or using
another font, also ends the
text of the title. A dialog box
informs you if the title is too
long, when you attempt to
update the tool.
The title can be left blank, in which case a blank line will appear in the browser.
(Accordance will add an option-space as a placeholder.) The blank title can be used
to break up sections of text which are too long for one article, but do not need an
additional heading.
20-6
Greek, Hebrew, and Rosetta
Any text in Greek, Hebrew, or Rosetta is automatically assigned to the correct field.
Accents and vowel points are ignored in the search, and do not appear on the lists
of words in the Select Words dialog box.
If you paste text from another software program containing Hebrew text in the Yehudit
font, the Hebrew portions are reversed so that they appear correctly in the text.
(Outside Accordance Yehudit is a left-to-right font.)
Scripture Links
The Scripture Link button Link (or ⌘-L) converts selected text to a hypertext Scripture
field as shown in blue underline style. Clicking the button again removes the link.
Any standard notation used in Accordance for entering references is accepted, and
a string of references will appear correctly as separate links. If the reference is not
acceptable, an error dialog box will specify the error during the update process.
The display of Scripture links in the User Tool window, and the Bible text which
opens when clicking the link (if a Text window is not already open), can be set in
the Set Tools Display… (Display or contextual menu or ⌘-T).
Display Limits in the Edit Window
Each article in a user tool is limited by the “Block size”, and this is also the display
limit in the Edit window. When you open the Edit window without a selection in the
text pane of the User Tool window, the Edit window displays the first article of the
tool, and as many subsequent articles as will fit within the limit. Only one Edit window
for each user tool can be opened at a time. If you reach the end of the currently
displayed text by scrolling, you can click the access button to go to the next article.
Pressing shift while clicking replaces all the text in the window with the next block.
You can set the “block” size for editing the text by choosing Edit
windows from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application
or Edit menu or ⌘-,). The Block pop-up menu lets you select a
smaller “block” which will update the tool faster but more often, a
medium, or a larger size which needs updating less often but takes
longer to edit and refresh the Edit window.
Amplifying to User Tools
Before you create or install a user tool, the My Tools button on
the Resource palette shows only the items New User Tool… and
Import…. After two or more tools are saved, All User Tools and
Merge… appear as well, allowing you to select all the user tools
(and merge two sets of tools). (See Chapter 11-Amplify Features.)
Amplifying to a user tool is exactly like amplifying to any general
tool, as described in Chapter 14-The Tools Window. User tools are
included in the Search All and can be incorporated into Search All
Groups.
Doing your own Thing
20-7
20
User Tools
Importing to a User Tool
The Import feature lets you convert text from another document into a user tool, and thus
make it fully compatible and interactive with your other Accordance modules. Currently
Accordance imports only three types of files: HTML formatted files, plain ASCII text files, and
Thesaurus Linguae Graecae (TLG) files. Importing the TLG files is described in the Grammatical
Supplement, Chapter G-7.
WARNING: This feature is intended for personal, teaching, or academic use. It is
definitely NOT intended to help you bypass copyright and other restrictions that
may apply to e-texts to which you have access.
Of course, you may convert your own work into a user tool, and you may do whatever you wish
with that module. You may also convert e-texts which you own in another format. For example,
if you own texts on a CD-ROM, and can export them as text files, you may convert them to a
user tool for your own use. You may not give the module to another person who does not own
the CD-ROM, nor borrow a CD-ROM to extract its text for your permanent use.
If you download from the Internet a text which was labeled as free for download, you should
still abide by any posted conditions and terms of use. Many public domain works have been etexted and are widely circulated. While the contents may be public domain, the party which did
the work of preparing the e-text may have rights regarding its distribution and use, whether
private or commercial.
File Types
The text you import must be in the form of a plain ASCII text file or an HTML file.
Any Simple Text file, or a text file saved by Accordance is acceptable. HTML texts can
be downloaded from the Internet. Files in any word processing format must first be
saved as a text file or an HTML file before they can be converted. All font and style
information will be lost when importing from plain text. (If you wish to preserve the
font and style information, you can save the text as HTML, or copy and paste the text
into the Edit window in sections.)
Importing a File
After the e-text is prepared, select Import User Tool…
from the User Files submenu (File menu) or Import…
from the My Tools button of the Resource palette.
The dialog box lets you choose the type of file you
are importing (currently HTML, Text File, or TLG) and
whether to add the file to the end of an existing user
tool or create a new tool. If you want to add the text to
an existing tool, you can then select the current tool
from the scrolling list. Subsequent dialog boxes let you
navigate to and select the file you are importing, and if it
is to be a new tool, choose a name for it.
Accordance then imports the file and opens a User Tool
window to display it.
20-8
Very Large Files
In OS 7-9, if the text file is very large, a
warning dialog tells you that it may be split
into more than one user tool, each one
containing about 800K of text. Each file
is given the same name with a numerical
suffix. If you do not want to split the text,
you can quit Accordance and increase the
memory allocation for the program until
the warning message no longer appears.
The increased memory requirement is
temporary, and covers only the import
process. Accordance will afterwards be able
to open the resulting large tool with the usual memory allocation.
The Resulting Tool
If you choose to import into an existing user tool, the imported text is added at the
end of the user tool you select. If the resulting tool would be too large for one file, the
new text is saved as a new user tool, with a name based on the original text file.
The name you gave the file is saved as the first title. If imported from an ASCII text
file, the entire text is saved as Content with a blank title line at intervals to divide the
text into articles if necessary.
You can now edit the text in the following ways:
•
Define titles and individually set their size and style
•
Remove blank titles where they are no longer needed
•
Define Scripture links
•
Change words or phrases to Greek or Hebrew
•
Add styles or colors to the text, or vary its size
You can use the access buttons in the Edit window to display the entire text, block by
block, in order to edit and assign the text to specific fields.
HTML import
User tools imported from HTML files include the following information:
•
text styles such as bold and italic are retained.
•
headings are converted to titles and subtitles with appropriate font size and
styles to distinguish them from the Contents.
•
any valid scripture references are automatically defined in blue underline
style and hyperlinked. The scripture references do not need to be marked
as such in the HTML file. As long as they conform to the general Accordance
guidelines for references, Accordance will identify them in the text.
Doing your own Thing
20-9
20
User Tools
The following HTML tags are supported during import:
Tags
Resulting Appearance in Edit and User Tool Windows
Headings:
<title> and <h1>
marked with T, centered, bold, 18 p
<h2>
marked with 1, centered, bold, 14 pt
<h3>
marked with 2, centered, bold
<h4> to <h9>
marked with 3-9, centered, italic
<h10> and up
centered
Paragraphs:
<br> and <p>
carriage return (carriage returns and shift-returns are lost)
Styles:
<size 18>
18 pt
<em>, <strong>, or <b>
bold
<i>
italic
<u>
underline
Lists:
<ul> and <ol> followed by <li>
indent
Spaces:
tabs, spaces, and command-space
space (except at beginning of a line)
Alignment:
<div align=left> or right, or center
aligned
Superscript:
<sup>
raised
Merging User Tools
Accordance lets you merge two
existing tools together. Select
Merge User Tool… from the
User Files submenu (File menu)
or Merge… from the My Tools
button of the Resource palette.
The Merge dialog box lets you
select the tool to be merged from
the Merge: scrolling list on the left,
and the tool into which it will be merged from the Into: right hand list.
The text of the tool you select on the left will appear at the end of the tool on the right. The
combined tool will keep the name of the Into: (right hand) tool. You can edit this name as
described above. The name of the tool that was merged into it is deleted from the pop-up
menu list, but the file itself is NOT deleted from your hard drive, so you have the choice of
deleting it, keeping it, or adding it back to Accordance.
Hint: If you are not sure that you want to merge the two files, you may wish first to
make a copy of the Into: tool by duplicating it on the desktop.
In OS 7-9, if the resulting tool would be too large for the available memory to handle (in OS 79), the merge is canceled. Chapter 2 describes the allocation of memory to Accordance.
20-10
21
Importing Bibles
Chapter Contents:
Preparing the Text ......................................... 21-2
Importing the Bible ....................................... 21-4
Using the Bible .............................................. 21-5
21
Importing Bibles
User Bibles are texts which you import into Accordance and which become true Bible modules.
The text may be a public domain text, or one which you own in another format, or it may be a
private translation or version to which you have access.
Preparing the Text
Requirements for the text to be imported are:
The Basic Format
The text must be Biblical, only books from the OT, NT, and some standard books from
the Apocrypha are accepted. Additions to Daniel and Esther, and the books of Tobit
and Sirach have such irregular versification that they cannot easily be imported.
The text must be a plain text file (.txt) in Roman script and use only standard
characters such as those in Times New Roman.
The file must be saved with Mac Roman encoding, not Unicode, Windows, or any
other encoding. The full name of the encoding is Western (Mac OS Roman).
The format of each verse is a valid Bible reference (as used in most English Bibles)
followed by a space followed by the contents of the verse. Each verse is ended by a
return character, except for the last verse.
The book name (any standard Accordance abbreviation) only needs to appear on the
first verse of the book, but can be repeated.
The chapter number only needs to appear on the first verse of the chapter, but can
be repeated. A colon must separate chapter and verse.
Thus both of the following are acceptable:
Gen. 1:1 ¶ In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth.
Gen. 1:2 And the earth was without form, and void; and darkness was upon the
face of the deep. And the Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters.
Gen. 1:3 ¶ And God said, Let there be light: and there was light.
Gen. 1:4 And God saw the light, that it was good: and God divided the light from
the darkness.
Gen. 2:1 ¶ Thus the heavens and the earth were finished, and all the host of them.
Gen. 2:2 And on the seventh day God ended his work which he had made; and he
rested on the seventh day from all his work which he had made.
Genesis 1:1 ¶ In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth.
2 And the earth was without form, and void; and darkness was upon the face of the
deep. And the Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters.
3 ¶ And God said, Let there be light: and there was light.
4 And God saw the light, that it was good: and God divided the light from the
darkness.
2:1 ¶ Thus the heavens and the earth were finished, and all the host of them.
2 And on the seventh day God ended his work which he had made; and he rested
on the seventh day from all his work which he had made.
21-2
Missing or Out of Order Sections
Books can be in any order and number. That is, Bibles with incomplete, missing or outof-order books can be imported.
Chapters within a book must be consecutive, but need not be complete. If a chapter
is missing the user should create a chapter X verse 1 and leave it blank, for each
skipped chapter, with the chapter number in place of X.
Verses within a chapter can be skipped but must not be out of order, so verses 2,4,5,8
are acceptable, but not 2,4,3,5,8. Extra verses are not accepted. The KJV is the
standard for the number of chapters in each book, and verses per chapter. The RSV
is the standard for Apocryphal books.
If necessary, renumber the verses and put the original number in parentheses for
reference, so the previous example could look like:
2
3
4
5
text of verse 2
(4) text of verse 4
(3) text of verse 3
text of verse 5
Other Text Markups
Certain additional characters can be used to add paragraphs, line breaks, styles and
colors to the text.
You can use any text editor software to convert styled text to plain text with these
codes.
Paragraph marks are denoted by use of the paragraph marker (¶) with a single space
on each side. If paragraphs are used, a paragraph marker must appear after the
reference of the first verse of the first book, otherwise Accordance will assume that
there are no paragraphs in the text. The marker should also appear at reasonable
intervals throughout the text.
The markup codes shown below are acceptable within the text.
Each code must end within the verse, and be restarted on the next verse if needed.
Start
End
bold
<b>
</b>
italic
<i>
</i>
underline
<u>
</u>
small caps
<c>
</c>
subscript

superscript

color (use one of the
Accordance colors)
<color=red>
</color>
new line within a verse <br>
The superscript and subscript styles will also reduce the font size of the enclosed text.
If a markup style does not end within the verse, an error message will appear during
import. If codes are incorrectly entered, they will appear in the body of the text.
You can use the character search (for example .<) to find any visible codes.
Doing your own Thing
21-3
21
Importing Bibles
Importing the Bible
Select Import Bible Text from the User
Files submenu (File menu).
The standard Macintosh navigation dialog
lets you navigate to the location of the
file to be imported and select the file.
A warning dialog reminds you of possible
copyright issues.
The next dialog box lets you enter a name
for the Bible (the default is the same as
the file name).
Note: The name of the module
cannot be identical to
any Accordance Bibles
currently installed. When
importing the text, a
new text can replace
a user Bible of the
same name, but not a
regular Accordance Bible
module.
If a module of this name is on the pop-up menus,
Accordance either reminds you that you must
choose a different name from Accordance Bibles, or
offers you the opportunity to replace your earlier
user Bible with this new one.
If the user Bible is open in a window. Accordance
offers to close the window
If a module of this name is on the pop-up menus but Accordance cannot find it, you will
be asked to locate it in the standard navigation dialog.
If you have deleted the file from the hard drive, you must use Arrange Modules (Edit
menu or option-⌘-A) to remove it from the menus before you can reimport it
The module is saved by default in the Accordance folder/Modules/Shared User Bibles.
A progress dialog box informs you of the
conversion process. A full Bible can take
several minutes.
If errors are encountered in the text that prevent
importing, an error message will appear, and
the import will be canceled.
21-4
At the end of the import process, a dialog box
appears which lets you add the full name of
the text, and any comments, such as editor,
copyright, etc. These comments will appear
in the About The Text dialog (Accordance
or Apple menu). Accordance recalls these
comments for subsequent imports during the
current session.
A new Search window opens displaying your new
Bible, and its name appears on the pop-up
menus.
WARNING: Accordance installers cannot
differentiate between Accordance Bibles
and your imported user Bibles, so if your
Bible has the same name as a Bible that
is on one of the CD-ROMs such as the
Bible Unlock, it will be replaced if a newer
module is on the CD-ROM. To avoid this,
try to use a unique name, and be sure to back up your Bible by copying the file to
another location.
Using the Bible
The Bible can be used in all the ways that Accordance Bibles are used.
Verses should align correctly with Accordance Bibles viewed in parallel.
All search functions are supported, except for searching within a clause field, and this
option is dimmed in the Search Window popup.
The text of the Bible cannot be edited in Accordance. You can edit your original text file
and reimport it.
Word highlighting may be displaced if an edited version of the text is reimported.
Doing your own Thing
21-5
21
21-6
Importing Bibles
22
The Workspace
and Slide Show
Contents:
The Workspace and Tabs............................... 22-2
The Slide Show .............................................. 22-5
22
The Workspace and Slide Show
The Workspace and Tabs
The workspace is a convenient way to organize some or all of your open windows, to improve
your access to their contents, and to reduce the clutter on the screen.
The workspace is essentially a blank window in which multiple windows appear in tabs. A new
item added to the workspace creates a new tab in front of the previous tabs, but all the tab
labels are visible and accessible. Click on any label to bring the tab to the front.
The Details workspace described in Chapter 11 is very similar to the workspace described in
this chapter.
Opening a Workspace
If the first setting in the General page of your
Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit
menu or ⌘-,) is checked, a workspace with
an initial Search window tab opens when you
launch Accordance.
You can open an empty workspace at any time
by selecting New Workspace (File menu).
22-2
Adding New Tabs
While a workspace is the front window, opening or amplifying
to almost any item automatically creates a new tab in the
workspace, except that open recyclable tabs or windows
are reused whenever appropriate. Only Search window
Details always open in their own special workspace, while
3D Map and Edit windows, and some dialog boxes, open
as independent windows.
If you open a window with a minimum width greater than the
current workspace, it will also open as a separate window.
Pressing the command key while opening or amplifying
forces an independent window to open even when a
workspace is the front window.
When an independent window is in front, any new item opens
as a window, even if there is workspace in the back. Thus,
if you amplify from a window, Accordance will open a
new window unless a suitable recyclable window or tab is
already open.
The Confine hypertext to the same workspace option
in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) reuses only tabs in
the same workspace, and opens a new tab even if another window is available
elsewhere.
Cycling through Tabs
You can cycle through the open tabs in a workspace by pressing control-tab to bring to the
front the tab to the right of the current tab. Pressing shift-control-tab brings the tab to the left
of the current tab to the front.
Closing Workspaces and Tabs
The entire workspace can be closed by clicking on the red button or close box in the top left
corner. A tab is closed by clicking on the X close button on the tab. When a workspace is in
front, selecting Close (File menu) closes the entire workspace, while selecting Close Tab
below it closes just the front tab. The key shortcut command–W (⌘-W) closes the front tab
if a workspace is in front, unless there are no tabs, otherwise it applies to the front window.
Pressing option when clicking on an X close button closes all the other tabs.
Duplicating Workspaces and Tabs
Similarly, when a workspace is in front, selecting Duplicate (File menu) makes a copy of the
entire workspace, while selecting Duplicate Tab below it duplicates just the front tab. The key
shortcut command-D (⌘-D) duplicates the front tab if a workspace is in front, unless there are
no tabs, otherwise it applies to the front window.
General Features
22-3
22
The Workspace and Slide Show
The Tab Contextual Menu
The menu which opens when you right
or control-click on a tab lets you Close,
Duplicate, or Detach the tab and use the
items in the Set submenu.
Moving Tabs in and out of a Workspace
To separate a tab from the workspace, select Detach Tab
(Window menu or option-⌘-T). The contents of the front tab now
appear in a window with the same name. To convert a window
into a tab, select Merge Windows (Window menu or option⌘-M). If one of the two front windows is a workspace, the other
window will become a tab within it. If both are just windows,
a new workspace opens with the two tabs. If you merge two
workspaces, the resulting workspace includes all the tabs from
each workspace. Repeating the Merge Windows lets you convert
all your open windows into tabs in a single workspace.
The Details workspace and windows are distinct from the regular
workspace and windows, they remain linked to their parent
Search (or Tool) window, and they cannot be merged with other
windows, except for other Details from the same parent window.
Rearranging Tabs
To rearrange the tabs within a
workspace, drag a tab to a new
location between two other tabs. A
vertical bar indicates the new location
of the tab. Holding down the option
key while dragging duplicates the tab.
Dragging a Tab to Another Workspace
You can also drag a tab to the tabs area of another
workspace. Holding down the option key while dragging
duplicates the tab in the new workspace. The search
automatically is repeated in the new location except for
the Search All window.
22-4
Tab and Window Names
Each window and tab is named for the current module being searched, and the name
updates when you change the search text. Duplicate tabs and windows are assigned
a number as well, so that each name is unique. You can set names for most tabs
and windows in the Set submenu of the Window menu (option-⌘-N), and the new
name becomes the default name when you save the window. However, if you save a
workspace as a file, the name you give it in the Save dialog immediately becomes
the title of the workspace.
Overflow Tabs
The tab labels resize when you
grow or narrow the window,
but once they reach the
minimum width, additional
labels overflow to the right or left of the labels area. Arrow buttons appear at each
end indicating that additional tabs are present, and let you scroll the labels area to
display the hidden tabs.
Window Commands that Apply to the Workspace
The Hide item and Arrange submenu items (Tile and Stack) in the Window menu
apply to the workspace, as well as to windows.
The Save command (File menu or ⌘-S) saves the entire workspace with all its tabs,
if it is in front. The name you enter for the saved file becomes the title of the
workspace. You cannot save individual tabs – they must first be detached and
saved as separate windows.
The Slide Show
The Slide show allows speakers and teachers to display Accordance windows using the full
screen, without taking up space for unnecessary controls. It is not intended to substitute
for specialized presentation software such as KeyNote or PowerPoint, but rather to make
Accordance windows conveniently accessible for projection.
The windows can be prepared ahead of time in the usual way, but they must all be placed as
tabs in workspaces or a Details workspaces.
Switching to and from the Slide Show
To convert to the Slide show, when a workspace is in front, select Slide Show
(Window menu or option-⌘-S).
General Features
22-5
22
The Workspace and Slide Show
There are several ways to revert to regular view:
•
click the central button on the control panel shown later in this chapter
•
press escape
•
press option-⌘-S, or
•
press command-⌘-. (period)
The Slide Show View
The front tab in the front workspace now fills the screen. All Accordance floating
windows are hidden except for the Instant Details box and the new Slide control
panel.
Each window displays the results or contents of the window, and only those controls
that are needed to navigate within the contents. The desktop, dock, and all other
windows are hidden. The top portion of Accordance windows, the entry section and
pop-up menus are also hidden.
The Slide show can be used on a projector or on any monitor screen.
If there are dual (non-mirror) monitors the Slide show will open in the monitor where
the “majority” of the front workspace is placed. The control panel can be moved to
either monitor.
Note: In OS 7 to 9 the menu bar at the top of the screen is still visible, but inactive.
22-6
Navigating within a Window
The following features are enabled to allow you to display the contents of the window:
You can use the scroll bars to scroll the window, as well as control-click on the up
and down scroll arrows to untie the panes, and command-click to initiate autoscrolling.
Pressing command with the arrow keys scrolls the text.
Pressing shift-tab selects the next pane.
You can change the size of the font or zoom a Map, Timeline or Picture window using
⌘-+ (plus) and ⌘-- (minus).
The following features are visible and active:
The pop-up menus for each pane, the pane position and the Font size buttons.
The text access buttons to jump to the next verse, chapter, or book, or entry in the
case of tools, the mark and prior buttons if present
The Animate button in the 2D Map window.
The Class pop-up menu in the Analysis Graph, Bar Chart, and Pie Chart Details
windows.
Almost all other functions are disabled in the Slide show.
General Features
22-7
22
The Workspace and Slide Show
The Control Panel
When you enter the Slide show, a small control panel
appears to facilitate navigation between open tabs.
Clicking the center square button reverts to normal display.
Move the panel by dragging on the left bar, it retains its position when closed and
reopened.
To close and reopen the slide control panel, click on its close button or press option-⌘0 (zero) to close it. Reopen it by pressing option-⌘-0.
It will always appear when you return to the Slide show.
The first time you close the control panel you will be reminded how to reopen it, or
exit the Slide show,
Navigating between Windows
To go to the next or prior tab in the workspace:
Click the inner triangle buttons,
Press the left or right arrow keys, or
Click anywhere in the window pane to advance to the next tab.
To go to the first or last tab in the workspace:
Click the outer buttons, or
Press the up or down arrow keys.
The pop-up menu on the slide control panel displays
the title of the tab currently being displayed.
Clicking on the button opens a menu which shows
the titles of all tabs in the current workspace, and
then, separated by lines, the titles of tabs in every
other open workspace.
To switch to a specific tab in the same or another
workspace, simply select any other title to switch
the display to that tab in that workspace.
Press ⌘-' (quote) when a Search window with results is displayed, to switch to the
Details workspace for that window (if it is already open).
Press ⌘-' when a Details workspace is displayed, to change back to its parent Search
window.
The Instant Details box appears only if it was open before the Slide show. It can be
moved and resized as usual, and closed and recalled by pressing ⌘-B.
22-8
23
Working With Windows
Chapter Contents:
Types of Accordance Windows...................... 23-2
Window Features ........................................... 23-2
The Window Menu ......................................... 23-5
Duplicating Windows..................................... 23-8
The Text items and Palette.......................... 23-9
The Character Palette .................................. 23-10
Entering Hebrew Text .................................. 22-11
23
Working with Windows
Types of Accordance Windows
As you have already discovered, there are many different Accordance windows. These windows
all share common features and also have unique characteristics. The general features of
Macintosh and Accordance windows are described in Chapter 4. The special features of each
window are described in the relevant chapter.
Workspace containing other windows as tabs.
Windows displaying and searching Accordance modules
Search window – Chapters 6-7
Tools window – Chapter 14
Parallel window – Chapter 16
User Notes window – Chapter 20
User Tool window – Chapter 21
Special search windows
Construct window – Chapter 10
Search All window – Chapter 15
Floating windows for easy access to other features
Resource palette – Chapter 5
Instant Details box – Chapter 5
Highlight palette – Chapter 17
Character and Text palettes – this chapter
Details and Amplify windows displaying additional information
Graph, Analysis, Concordance, and Table windows – Chapter 11
Text window – Chapter 13
Parsing, Diagram, and Syntax windows – Chapter 13
Specialized windows
Arrange Modules – Chapter 5
Reference List window – Chapter 18
Edit windows – Chapters 19 and 20
Display windows – Chapter 14
Map and Timeline windows – Chapters A1 and T1 in the supplements
The following features are common to most of the window types.
Window Features
Opening Windows
As with many Macintosh applications, you can open multiple windows in Accordance. Working
with multiple windows makes it easy to view and analyze search results simultaneously, and
explore other related resources. There are various ways to open windows:
23-2
The New submenu (File menu) lets you
open one of windows listed. The settings
in the window will depend on the current
defaults set in the Preferences dialog box
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,). The New
Construct submenu (File menu) lets you
choose the type of Construct window to
open.
Choosing Open… (File menu or ⌘-O) lets
you select any Accordance module, or any
file you have saved in Accordance. Opening
a module will set the window to display
the whole module with an asterisk (*) in
the argument entry box. Opening a saved
session will reopen the window(s) exactly as
you saved them. Double-clicking on the file
or module icon opens the window(s) in the
same way.
Selecting a module from the pop-up menus
in the Resource palette also opens the
module you select with an asterisk in the
argument entry box, and the whole module
displayed in the window.
When windows are opened by amplifying to the Resource palette (or
Amplify menu), the settings depend on the selection you are amplifying.
These windows may be dependent and recyclable. (See Chapter 12-Amplify
Features.)
Keyboard shortcuts can also be used to open some windows:
New Search window…⌘-N
Search All window…⌘-F
Simple Construct…⌘-1
Greek Construct…⌘-2
Hebrew Construct…⌘-3
Edit window…⌘-U
Context window…⌘-5
Arrange Modules window…option-⌘-A
Arranging Windows
Windows can be moved and resized as described in Chapter 4.
The Window menu lets you arrange and organize the open windows, as
described in the next section. Pressing option-tab cycles through all the open
windows (except for hidden windows), bringing the back window to the front
each time.
General Features
23-3
23
Working with Windows
Closing Windows
You can close any window by clicking in the close box in the top left corner. The File menu has
several “close” commands: selecting Close closes the front window or workspace, Close Tab
closes the front tab in a workspace. The key shortcut command–W (⌘-W) closes the front tab
if a workspace is in front, unless there are no tabs, otherwise it applies to the front window.
Close Pane closes the selected text pane,
and Close All Windows closes all open
windows except the floating windows.
Whenever you close a window in which
you have made any changes, a dialog box
asks whether you want to save the window.
Clicking Don’t Save or pressing d or n
closes the window without saving, clicking
Cancel or pressing escape or ⌘-period cancels the close action, and clicking Save or pressing
return, enter, or y opens the Save dialog box in which you can name the file.
A similar dialog box appears if you choose Close Tab, or Close All Windows, or Quit (File
menu or ⌘-Q).
Note: This dialog can be suppressed in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box
(Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,.
Duplicating and Renaming Windows
You can duplicate a window or workspace by selecting Duplicate (File menu or ⌘-D); selecting
Duplicate Tab below it duplicates just the front tab. The key shortcut command-D (⌘-D)
duplicates the front tab if a workspace is in front, unless there are no tabs, otherwise it applies
to the front window. Selecting Name… from the Set submenu (Window menu or option-⌘-N)
lets you change the name on the title bar. Duplicating and renaming windows and workspaces
are described later in this chapter.
Saving and Printing
Independent windows and workspaces can be saved for reopening later by selecting Save
or Save as… (File menu or ⌘-S). Selecting Save Session… lets you save all open windows.
The standard Macintosh dialog box lets you select a name and location for the saved file (the
default location in OS X is user/Documents/Accordance files).
Individual panes can be saved as a text file for reuse in a word processor.
The entire window, individual panes, or selected text can be printed by selecting Print… or
Print Selection… (File menu). (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)
Setting the Window Display
Details of the display of the front window or tab are set by selecting Set windowtype
display… (Display or contextual menu or ⌘-T). The resulting dialog box lets you specify the
display of the window or selected text pane, and the default display whenever that text or
window type is reopened.
23-4
Setting Defaults
Default options for most window types can be set by selecting the type of window from the
list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,). These default settings
vary with the window type, and mainly affect new windows opened from the File menu. (See
Appendix A-Setting Preferences.)
Linking Windows
Windows can be linked together either for searching or for displaying results. The LINK,
CONTENTS, HITS, and MERGE commands combine the search argument in one window with
either the search argument or the verses displayed in another window. (See Chapter 8-Search
Commands and Symbols, and Chapter 14-The Tools Window.)
The Tie To item in the Set submenu (Window menu) links the scrolling of two windows as
described in the next section.
Reusing Windows
You can reuse most windows by entering a new search argument. Windows opened by
amplifying to the Resource palette (or Amplify menu) are recycled so that repeating the
Amplify from a new selection updates a current window instead of opening a new one.
Recycling is described in the next section and in Chapter 12.
The Window Menu
On the Macintosh, the active window is the window with details
in the title bar. When windows overlap, the active window is the
one in front.
The Window menu lets you show and hide the floating windows,
arrange any open Accordance windows, get specific Accordance
Help information for the front window, and set other window
features.
Floating Windows
The first five items are the floating windows or palettes which
give you access to many of the features of Accordance. Selecting
an item opens the window and places a check mark (✓) beside
the name. Selecting the name again or clicking the close box
closes the window and removes the check mark. These windows
are described in Chapters 5 and 18, and later in this chapter.
Selecting Hide Palettes (option-⌘-0) from the menu hides all the
open floating windows and dims the menu items. Hide Palettes
changes to Show Palettes (option-⌘-0), and when it is selected
the same windows reappear.
General Features
23-5
23
Working with Windows
Open Windows
The bottom of the Window menu displays the names of all the windows and workspaces that
are currently open, with a check mark (✓) beside the front window. (The name of a window
is displayed in the center of the title bar at the top of the window.) To bring a window to the
front, select the name of the window from the Window menu.
Window Help
Selecting Window Help (option-⌘-?) opens the relevant page of Accordance Help for the front
window or tab. This feature can also be used to get detailed information about most Accordance
dialog boxes, including definitions of the tags in the Tag details dialog boxes. (See Chapter 3Getting Help.)
Hiding Windows
Hide (⌘-\) makes the front window invisible. A hollow diamond (◊) appears beside the name on
the list of open windows. The window will appear in front of the other windows if it is selected
from the menu, or if an amplify function reuses it.
This feature lets you hide windows that are currently part of linked searches. It also lets you
hide Amplify windows, such as the text window, with your chosen panes, display options,
window position and size. When you next choose that amplify, the window reappears with the
same settings and position.
Show All (⌘-0) makes all hidden windows visible again, and in OS X, brings all Accordance
windows to the front.
The Set Submenu
The submenu affects the front window or tab.
Recycling Windows
Selecting Recycle Contents (⌘-K) places the green recycle
symbol above the OK button or in the top right corner of the
front window. A check mark (✓) appears beside the Recycle
Contents menu item to indicate that the front window is recycled. When Recycle
Contents is checked, selecting it or pressing ⌘-K removes the recycle symbol from
the front window and preserves its contents. Clicking the icon on the window also
removes or restores the icon and the recycling.
Most windows which can be opened from the Resource palette or Amplify menu can
be recycled. These include the Search, Tool, Parallel, Map, Timeline, User Notes, User
Tool, Text, Search All, and Parsing windows. When one of these windows is opened by
amplifying, it is automatically recycled so that it will be reused if the same Amplify
feature is used again for a different selection. Refer to Chapter 12 and the relevant
window chapters for details of recycling.
23-6
Renaming Windows
Whenever you open a window, it is
automatically given a default name. You can
rename most windows to give them more
meaningful names. To rename the front
window, select Name… from the Set submenu
so that this dialog box appears:
The existing window name is selected in the dialog box. To rename the window, enter
the new name in the entry box and click OK. The new name appears in the center of
the title bar of the window.
The Parsing window and separate Details windows (Graphs, Analysis, Concordance,
and Table) names update to show the text upon which they are based. The names
of Search, Tools, Parallel, and User Notes windows update whenever you select a
different module to display in the same window. However, if you set a new name for
any of these windows, this name is retained when the contents change. The new name
is recalled when the window is saved and reopened, except for Details windows.
Some window names do not change as you use them, but can be set as shown above.
They include the Construct and Reference List windows.
The names of Edit windows, and of report windows such as Show Book Names or
Timeline Data, cannot be set by the user.
Tying Windows
Tying connects the scrolling of two or more windows so that when the text in one
window is scrolled, the other text moves to display the matching verse references.
The Tie To items list all windows which can be tied to the front window. Selecting
a window name from this submenu places the brown tie symbol above the OK
button in both windows, and ties their scrolling. Selecting Untie from the submenu
breaks the ties between the front window and any others. These items are dimmed
if they are not appropriate for the front window.
More than two windows can be tied in a chain. A number appearing in the tie symbol
indicates that the window is tied to two or more other windows.
Double-clicking on the tie symbol in the front window brings to the front all the
windows which are tied to it.
Only windows whose contents are listed by verse reference can be tied. Thus any
Search, Reference List, User Notes, and Text windows can be tied, as well as Reference
tools such as commentaries and text notes. The order of books or verses does not
have to be the same in each window. The other windows will scroll to match the first
verse in the front window.
Note: Some commentaries have entries covering sections of text rather than verses.
The best results with tying occur when each of these tools is tied directly to the
Search window, rather than to one another.
Tying windows can be used when you want to view the verses of two similar searches
side by side. For example, if you search two text versions, you can compare the
highlighted results in each version verse by verse by tying the scrolling of the windows.
Tying is most useful however, in combination with some of the Amplify features
described in Chapters 12-19.
General Features
23-7
23
Working with Windows
Hint: You can set up a Text window with the entire Bible text in multiple panes. If you
tie the Text window to your Search window, you will get an instant context for
each verse as it reaches the top of the Search window.
Arranging Windows
The Arrange submenu affects all visible windows and workspaces:
When you select Tile Windows (⌘-I), as many
open windows as possible are repositioned
side by side to fill the whole screen. The
windows are resized depending on the
number of panes each contains. Either the
front window or the window with the most
panes is placed in the top left corner. The
illustration shows a group of tiled windows.
If the floating windows, the Resource, Text
and Highlight palettes, or the Instant Details
box are open at the edge of the window, the
windows will be tiled in such a way that these
floating windows do not overlap the tiled
windows. (See Chapter 5-Floating Windows.)
When you select Stack Windows from
the Windows menu, all open windows are
repositioned on top of each other with a slight
offset so the title bar of each window is visible.
The window sizes are unchanged. The active
window remains in front of the stack. The
illustration shows a group of stacked windows.
Converting Tabs to Windows
The next two items allow you to convert windows
to tabs in a workspace and windows to tabs.
Selecting Detach Tab (option-⌘-T) removes the
front tab and opens it as an independent window.
Selecting Merge Windows (option-⌘-M) combines
the front two windows into a workspace. For
details see Chapter 21-the Workspace.
Duplicating Windows
A quick way to make a copy of a window is to use the Duplicate item (File menu or ⌘-D). This
creates an exact duplicate of the front window, and adds a number after the name. Duplicating
a window does not modify your original window in any way.
23-8
When a workspace is in front, selecting Duplicate makes a copy of the entire workspace, while
selecting Duplicate Tab below it duplicates just the front tab. The key shortcut command-D
(⌘-D) duplicates the front tab if a workspace with tabs is in front.
Duplicating a window lets you perform a new search using a set-up similar to the original
window, without changing the original window. This feature is especially helpful when working
with Construct windows, as explained in Chapters 10, G2, and G4.
The new window has the same search argument as the original window, but the search does not
take place until you click OK. The new window is neither tied nor recycled unless you select
these options.
Hint: This is a quick way to temporarily save a window of interest while retaining the
current recycling windows.
The Text Items and Palette
The Text palette and the corresponding items in
the Display menu enable you to set the font and style of
your notes in the Edit window of a user notes or user tool
file, the Edit layer of a Map window, Diagram and Syntax
windows, and the description box of the Construct or
Reference List windows.
The fourth item in the Window menu is Text Palette. A
check mark indicates that the palette is opened. The three
buttons with pop-up menus correspond to the Font, Size,
and Color items on the menu. The buttons on the right let
you set the text style and alignment.
The right (or control) click contextual menu offers most of
these items when used in editable text.
To use the Text items or palette, either select a portion of
text, or click to leave the cursor flashing where you wish to
enter text. Then select the font, size, style, and color from
the submenus or palette buttons.
Font, Size, and Color
The Font, Size, and Color submenus allow you to select the font along with a range of font
sizes and colors. The check mark indicates the current selection. (If multiple fonts or styles are
present in the selection, no items will be checked in the submenus.)
The Edit window of user tools limits the font selection to Arial, Helena, Yehudit, and Rosetta.
The User Notes Window page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or
⌘-,) has a Use default fonts in font menu option. This limits the fonts for user notes to the
Accordance fonts plus the two default fonts selected in the Edit Windows page.
General Features
23-9
23
Working with Windows
Style
The Style submenu and buttons let you select from the standard
styles. Selecting another style adds this style to the present selection,
for example, adding Bold to Italic results in Bold-Italic. Each style
selected in the menu shows a check mark. To remove a style, select it again,
or select Plain Text to remove all styles. The standard Macintosh command
key shortcuts also apply the styles in the same windows: ⌘-B for bold, ⌘-I
for Italic, ⌘-U for Underline, and ⌘-T for plain text.
At the bottom of this submenu is a Superscript/Subscript option which
lets you raise or lower the selection relative to the baseline of the text, as
do the arrow buttons on the palette. Selecting Superscript or Subscript
again raises or lowers the selection even further. Selecting None returns
the text to the baseline.
The Alignment submenu and buttons apply only to Edit windows
for User Tools. They let you set left, center, or right justification for
the selected paragraph.
The Style Only and Paste Style items in the Copy As submenu
(Edit menu or ⌘-[ and ]) let you copy the font, size, style, and
color of any selected text, and paste these characteristics onto
a new selection. This feature is especially helpful when you
repeatedly need to set more than one characteristic, such as the
font and size, or two styles together. The Style Only can be used
in any window, so you can copy a style in a Bible text or a tool.
The Paste Style can only be used where you can edit the text, and
use the Text items and palette.
The Character Palette
This palette displays and
lets you enter the special
characters in the selected
Accordance font. It can be
used wherever text entry in
these fonts is appropriate.
The Character Palette is
the fifth item in the Window
menu. A check mark indicates
that the palette is opened.
The Font pop-up menu
lets you select any
Accordance font.
The checkboxes let you reduce the size of the palette by hiding unnecessary rows.
The positions of overstrike characters are shown relative to a gray box.
23-10
The details bar at the bottom identifies the character under the
cursor and the associated keystroke.
When the cursor is in suitable editable text, such as an entry
box, clicking on a character highlights it and enters it into the
window.
Characters can only be entered into a search entry box that is set
to the same font. Clicks are ignored if the search text or tool
field requires a different font.
In the Edit windows of User Tools and User Notes, the User Layer of the Atlas, and
the description boxes of Construct and Reference list windows, changing the
font in the palette and entering a character enters the correct font, character, and
direction.
The palette retains the settings in the top bar until they are changed.
If the Greek & Hebrew page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu
or ⌘-,) is set to use a modern Greek or Hebrew keyboard, the palette enters the
correct character even though the label identifies the keystroke for the original
Accordance font.
Entering Hebrew Text
In any window in which you can edit the fonts and style, as described above, the default text
direction is from left to right. If you select the Hebrew font Yehudit from the Font submenu,
the direction of subsequent text entry is reversed, and any selected text is reversed to read
from right to left.
This text now contains mixed directions,
though the logical order of entry of the
characters is retained, as shown when the
Hebrew text is converted to English characters.
Apparent anomalies may arise when
working at or across the boundaries of
the inserted text. It is always a good idea
to separate the Hebrew and English by
at least one space. In this example the text selection jumps from the end of the English to the
beginning of the Hebrew, leaving an apparent gap.
When the width of the text box is changed, the text
wraps correctly sending the end of the Hebrew to
the next line.
To continue in English, place the cursor at the end
of the Hebrew, (the far left of the second line) and
select the English font. The new text is entered
to the right of the block of Hebrew. It is best to
consider the Hebrew as insertions in the main left to right text.
General Features
23-11
23
Working with Windows
Typing Hints
To quickly switch between English and Hebrew when typing:
1. Use the Style Only item in the Copy As submenu (Edit menu or ⌘-[) after clicking
in any text that is already in the style you want to copy. Then select text and
choose Paste Style (⌘-]) to change the font, size, style, and color to match your
first selection. The copied styles are retained in memory until you copy another
style (independent of copying to the clipboard).
2. To insert Hebrew in a text that is basically English, the following routine is
useful:
•
Click in Hebrew text and use ⌘-[ to copy the style, or copy a Hebrew
selection.
•
To change to Hebrew from English, type an extra space and press the left
arrow to go back a space. Now paste the Hebrew text or use ⌘-] to paste the
style and then type in Hebrew.
•
To return to English, click the mouse to the right of the last line, beyond the
extra space, and continue in English.
See Chapters G1 and G3 for details of typing in Greek and Hebrew.
23-12
Other Features
24
Chapter Contents:
Contextual Menus.......................................... 24-2
Accordance Widgets ...................................... 24-6
Differences Between Accordance on
Classic and Mac OS X .............................. 24-10
24
Other Features
Contextual Menus
A right-click on a two-button mouse opens a contextual menu with the most important options
appropriate for the area of the window that is clicked. Pressing control while clicking also
opens the contextual menu. This feature of OS X is also supported within Accordance in older
Classic OS.
The following contextual menus and items are available:
A. Workspace - Tab
Close Tab
Duplicate Tab
Detach Tab
Set Tab submenu with the Set options from the Window menu.
B. Entry Section
1. Search and Search All Argument Entry Box
Copy
Cut
Paste
History submenu
Enter submenu with Word, Key Number, Lemma,
Inflected Form, and Root as appropriate
Enter Command submenu
Enter Symbol submenu
2. Search Entry Section Surround
Set Range To submenu
Search Within Every submenu
Set Context To submenu
Compare Texts
List Text Differences
3. Tool and Parallel Argument Entry Box (and entry box of extra fields)
Copy
Cut
Paste
History submenu
Enter Word
Enter Command submenu
Enter Symbol submenu
24-2
4. Tool Entry Section Surround
Search With submenu
Extra Fields submenu
5. User Notes Argument Entry Box
Copy
Cut
Paste
History submenu
Enter Symbol submenu
C. Text Pane (the word under the cursor is selected)
1. Bible Text (Search, Parallel, Text or Reference
List Window)
Search For submenu with Word, Key Number,
Lemma, Inflected Form, and Root as
appropriate
Search In submenu with all texts of the same
language
Look Up submenu with the Amplify categories,
opening the default module in each case
Search All submenu
Favorites submenu
Copy
Copy As submenu
Print Selection
Add Selection To submenu for Reference Lists
Highlight submenu with the names of your highlight
styles
Clear Highlight
Highlight All Hits submenu with the names of your highlight styles
Clear Highlighted Hits
Show Text As submenu with the options from the Display menu
Set Text Pane Display
About This Text
General Features
24-3
24
Other Features
2. Tool Window
Search Word
Search In submenu with all the texts
Look Up submenu with the main Amplify categories,
opening the default module in each case
Search All submenu
Favorites submenu
Copy
Print Selection
Highlight submenu with the names of your highlight
styles
Clear Highlight
Highlight All Hits submenu with the names of your
highlight styles
Clear Highlighted Hits
Set Tool Display
About This Text
3. User Tool Window
Search Word
Search In submenu with all the texts
Look Up submenu with the main Amplify categories,
opening the default module in each case
Search All submenu
Favorites submenu
Copy
Print Selection
Set Tool Display
Edit User Tool
4. Report Windows (Analysis, Concordance, Table,
Book Name, Text Differences, Timeline Report,
and Tool Table Windows)
Search In submenu with all the texts
Look Up submenu with the main Amplify categories,
opening the default module in each case
Search All submenu
Favorites submenu
Copy
Print Selection
Set windowtype Display as appropriate
24-4
5. User Notes
Edit User Tool
Copy
Print Selection
6. Search All
Print
D. Tool Browser
Expand Levels
Select range
Add To Range
Clear Ranges
E. Image Windows (Graphs, Picture, Diagram,
Arrange Modules)
Copy (Picture)
Print
Set windowtype Display as appropriate
G. Map and Timeline Windows (Depends on
whether a name is selected):
Search In submenu with all the texts
Look Up submenu with the main Amplify categories,
opening the default module in each case
Search All submenu
Favorites submenu
Copy Name
Print
Set windowtype Display
General Features
24-5
24
Other Features
H. Edit User Notes and Edit User Tools Windows
Copy
Cut
Paste
Copy Style Only
Paste Style Only
Add Scripture Link
Font submenu
Size submenu
Style submenu
Color submenu
Find/Replace
Spelling
Print Selection
I. Construct Windows
1. Description Box
Copy
Cut
Paste
2. Construct Area
Copy Picture
Print
Link From submenu with list of eligible windows
J. Syntax Windows
Copy
Print
Accordance Widgets
The two Accordance widgets offer additional features to users with Mac
OS 10.4 (Tiger) and above, and are accessed through the Dashboard.
Installing the Widgets
Please run the latest version of Accordance once before launching the widgets.
24-6
If you have OS 10.4 or higher, the Accordance installer places the Accordance.wdgt and
AccUpdater.wdgt on the desktop together with Read Me files. You can download the
widgets separately from the website for use with third-party dashboard programs.
If you have OS 10.4.2 or higher, double-click each file to install the widget in your user
~/Library/Widgets/. You will work through two standard widget dialog boxes.
If you have 10.4 or 10.4.1, you must manually place the widgets in that folder (you
may have to create a Widgets folder in your user ~/Library). Do not put it in the
hard drive/Library/Widgets/ as it will not work from there. Then you can launch it
with a double-click or install it via the dashboard by clicking the + sign.
Accordance Widget
This widget offers a shortcut to see and copy the text of desired verses. It lets you quickly
retrieve verses from any Bible text you have in Accordance, and paste them into a document
you are working on.
Using the Widget
Bring the dashboard to the front (the default key is F12). Click
in the text box, enter a verse referencen and press return or
enter. The verses you requested appear in the opened scroll.
Click the magnifying glass to retrieve recent searches for
quick access.
Click Copy to copy the text to the clipboard for pasting
into another document. The text will take the font and
style used at the point of insertion.
Press control-+ to scroll to the next text in the list, and
control- - to scroll to the previous text (if the entry box
is selected the Mac will beep once). Press return or enter
to retrieve the verses for the current text. Press tab just
to select the contents of the entry box.
Only 500 verses can be copied at a time.
Use the scroll bar to see a long text.
Drag the bottom end of the scroll to resize it.
Options on the Back
Click the i button as you mouse over the bottom right corner to
set the options:
Select the text from the pop-up menu showing the list of
texts available to Accordance.
Click Update to update the list if you have added or
rearranged modules.
Check Auto Search to have the widget enter
and use a reference you have selected in the
frontmost application. (Requires “UI scripting,” see
Troubleshooting below.)
General Features
24-7
24
Other Features
Check Auto Insert to have the widget automatically paste the text at the
insertion point of the frontmost application. You can use this in conjunction
with Auto Search to have the widget automatically replace a selected
reference with the actual verses in a word processor. You will just need to
invoke the dashboard and then press enter.
Check Copy as Citation to have the text display and copy in the citation format
as set in the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,).
Click Done to return to the front.
Notes
Click command-R to reset this or any other widget.
The widget will open Accordance and hide it, if it is not already running.
Greek and Hebrew text is retrieved as Unicode and can only be pasted into
applications which support Unicode, such as TextEdit, Mellel, Nisus, and
Pages. Microsoft Word 2004 does not fully support Unicode Hebrew text.
Each user must install the widget themselves. You can option-drag to copy the
Accordance.wdgt from ~/Library/Widgets/ to the hard drive so that it will be
available for installation by another user.
You can install multiple copies of the widget (by clicking the + sign and
dragging the Accordance widget from the dashboard bar again) and set each
one to a different version for quick access to each text.
Older Bible modules do not support the widget, as well as some other
Accordance features. The widget will tell you that the text version is too
old. There are free downloadable upgrades for some Bibles on the website,
others can only be updated by upgrading to a newer CD-ROM.
Troubleshooting
Enable access for assistive devices at the bottom of the Universal Access
pane of System Preferences, must be checked for Auto Search to work
correctly.
If the widget cannot find your Accordance program, a dialog box will appear
in the Finder asking you ‘Where is Accordance?’ Dismiss the dashboard and
scroll through the list of applications to find and select the latest version of
Accordance.
If you get an error message that ‘No user interaction is allowed,’ you probably
clicked Cancel in the above dialog. Try reloading the widget.
To completely start over with the widget, remove any Accordance widgets from
the dashboard, remove the file called widget-com.oaktree.widget.Accordance.
plist from ~/Library/Preferences/, then reload the widget.
If you cannot get the widget to find Accordance, check that you are not using
unusual characters (such as ƒ) in the names of the folders or hard drive
containing Accordance.
24-8
AccUpdater Widget
This widget lets you quickly compare the current
versions of all your modules with the website
information on the latest available modules. Certain
modules may be available for automatic download by the widget.
Using the Widget
Bring the dashboard to the front (the default key
is F12).
Click Check to run a comparison between the list
of your installed modules, and the website
information. The widget opens and shows
a list of modules for which updates are
available.
Note: This may take several minutes, but you
can leave it running ion the dashboard and
return later to see the results.
Getting Information
Click on an item in the list
to open a drawer with
more information on the
update.
Clicking on the module name
in the drawer will link
to a web page listing all
CD-ROMs the module
appears on.
Please note that the newest
version may not be present on all of these CD-ROMs.
Automatic Downloads
A checkbox beside an item indicates that an
automatic update is available.
Click the items you want to select, or click the
Select All button.
Click Download Updates to get the updated
modules.
The widget flips to the back and requests your
Mac administrator login and password.
It reminds you to quit Accordance
Click Continue to perform the updates, or Return to cancel.
The AccUpdater will replace your modules with the new downloaded modules.
General Features
24-9
24
Other Features
If the widget gives you an error message, please reopen Accordance and then
rerun the widget to see which modules still need updating. It is worth trying
the update again.
Widget Size
Drag the bottom right corner to extend or shorten the scrolling list.
Click the X button to close the drawer.
Press the Close button to return the widget to its initial size.
Notes
Click command-R to reset this or any other widget.
You must be connected to the internet to get an updated list and see
information regarding upgrade paths.
Differences Between Accordance on Classic and Mac OS X
The Classic version of Accordance 7 that runs on earlier systems (7 – 9) including the PC
emulator has the following differences from the OS X application:
All Preferences are shared and stored in the Accordance folder.
The Quit item is in the File menu not the Application menu.
The Preferences item is in the Edit menu not the Application menu.
Show All Windows is active only when windows are hidden.
Command-H for Hide Accordance and command-M for Minimize Window do not
work.
Text smoothing cannot be set within Accordance, but only in the Appearance Control
Panel. (Text smoothing makes the Hebrew font very ragged on the screen.)
Some font sizes have no bit maps so will appear very ragged (particularly 9, 11, and
16).
Page Setup settings are saved with a saved window.
3D maps are not supported in 68K systems.
The two-button mouse is not supported on Classic Mac systems, but is supported
within Accordance. Control-click performs the same actions as a right-click.
Auto fade of Instant Details is not supported.
Spell checking of Edit windows is not supported below OS 10.4.
24-10
25
Printing and Saving
Chapter Contents:
Printing the Contents of a Window ............... 23-2
Setting the Page Details................................. 23-2
Saving in Accordance .................................... 23-4
Saving a Window as an Accordance File........ 23-5
Saving Groups of Windows............................ 23-6
Saving Text in a Text File .............................. 23-6
Saving Graphics as a PICT File ...................... 23-7
Greek and Hebrew Export Options................ 23-8
Unicode........................................................ 25-11
Transliteration............................................. 25-12
25
Printing and Saving
Printing the Contents of a Window
In Accordance you can print the contents of any window (except
the Instant Details box) virtually exactly as they appear on the
screen. To print a window, bring it to the front by clicking on it
(or using the Window menu), and then select Print… (File menu
or ⌘-P). The Printer dialog box which opens depends on the
type of printer you have
You can also print a selection of text in any text pane or other
text window such as a Table, Analysis, or Parsing window,
or part of the image in a graphics window. Use the mouse to
select the text or image you want to print, then select Print
Selection… (File menu)..
The print commands reflect the options currently set in the
Page Setup dialog box. The Page Setup dialog box allows you to
change paper size, page orientation, and other printing options
that correspond to the capabilities of your printer. To change
these options, select Page Setup… (File menu or control-⌘P). The Page Setup dialog box is a standard Macintosh dialog
box and is described in the User’s Guide that came with your
computer.
Setting the Page Details
The printout also reflects the current settings in the Print
Settings dialog box, which appears when you select Print
Settings… (File menu or option-⌘-P) It allows you to control the
margins and other aspects of printing windows.
The options you set in the dialog box are retained and remain in effect whenever you print
from Accordance. This is true even if you quit the program. To print using different options,
you must change the settings in the dialog box. The new settings will then remain in effect
until the next time you change them.
Setting the Margins and Units
The Margins section allows you to set the margins for printing windows with text.
Enter the desired margin sizes into each appropriate entry box.
The Pane separation box allows you to specify the distance between the columns on
your page. This option is used in conjunction with the Print all panes check box.
The Units radio buttons let you choose between inch and millimeter units for the
numerical settings.
Note: When printing a graphics window (such as a Map, Timeline, Graph, Diagram,
Construct, or Display window), the left and top margins are used to determine
its position on the page.
25-2
Multiple Pane Printing Options
The options in the Multipane printing
section help you to format the appearance of
the printout of windows with text panes. These
options also apply when you select Print
Selection….
Checking the Print all panes check box
results in a printout that contains the
text from all the panes in the front
window. If this box is not checked, only
the selected pane is printed.
The Columns pop-up menu lets you decide
which panes, if any, are printed as
columns or as interleaved verses.
Top Panes Only (the default setting)
prints the top row of panes as
columns and interleaves the bottom
row of columns.
All Panes prints both rows of panes as
columns.
None (All Interleaved) prints all the
panes in an interleaved fashion, so
that the text of the verse in the first
pane is followed by the text from each of the other panes.
Tool and User Notes panes display the entire text, but print only
the entries relating to the Bible verses showing in the window.
Commentaries with long entries for the verses are best printed
interleaved.
Parallel Verses
When printing vertical panes, Accordance automatically makes sure that each break in the text
begins on the same line in all of the columns. This means that a verse or section begins at the
same place on the page in all of the text panes, even if different font sizes and display formats
are used. This feature allows you to print parallel texts without worrying if one text is “getting
ahead” of another on the page.
The Print pane name check box adds the name of the module for each pane to the
printout. Columns show the name at the head of the column on each page, while
interleaved panes show the name before each entry.
General Options
The Include heading details check box is used to specify whether the contents
of the entry or description box should be printed at the top of the first page, to
remind you of the pop-up menu settings in the window, and the search argument.
In the Parallel window, checking this box also prints the selected pericope title.
General Features
25-3
25
Printing and Saving
Checking the Include page number check box adds page numbers to the printout.
The printout can preserve the width of the text window on the screen. To do this,
check the Page width same as window check box. In effect, using this option
overrides the right margin setting and makes the width of the output identical to the
width of the window.
If the Page width same as window box is checked, each pane prints with the
same width as in the Search window. If you are printing multiple panes and the
Page width same as window box is not checked, Accordance fits the columns
to the page width you have determined in your settings. The relative widths of
multiple panes are preserved so each column on the page is proportional to its
corresponding text pane in the window.
In either case, the width of the columns in your printout is determined by the relative
width of the text panes on the screen. For information on changing the width of a
text pane, see Chapter 6.
You can format the printout of your text as single spaced, double spaced, or triple
spaced by using the Line spacing pop-up menu. Single spacing makes the printed
text appear similar to that in the window, while double or triple spacing adds
extra spaces between each line in the printed version, so that notes can be written
between the lines.
Text Display
When you print a window containing text, the Print command uses the
options that govern the display of that text on the screen, including
the various fonts, sizes, styles, and colors. The text display options for
a window or a text pane can be set using the Set windowtype Display… item
(Display menu or ⌘-T).
If you have highlighting displayed, or the Compare text highlights, these will be
printed with the text, see Chapters 6 and 17.
Note: If the window is displaying the entire text of the module (such as a tool), you will get
a warning that you are about to print a large number of verses or paragraphs. You
may also be reminded to check the copyright notice pertaining to this module.
Hint: To avoid printing an entire tool, you can:
1. set the Show pop-up menu to Articles or Paragraphs; or
2. select a range in the tool browser, or
3. select only the text you want to print and choose Print Selection… (File menu).
Saving in Accordance
In Accordance, you can save most windows so you can reopen them later.
The only windows which cannot be saved as Accordance files are the Details
and the reports in the Display menu. However, Details windows are saved
together with the Search window from which they are derived. Display
windows with pictures can also be saved.
25-4
You can also save all open windows to preserve an entire session. Saving windows in either of
these two ways creates a file that Accordance can reopen at any time. Double-clicking on these
types of documents automatically opens Accordance.
When you close a window or windows or quit Accordance, you will get a dialog box asking
whether you want to save any unsaved windows, unless you suppress the save warning in the
General page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,). (See Chapter 23Working with Windows.)
You can also save the contents of windows or individual text panes so they can be opened in
another program. The contents of text windows can be saved as text files in either ASCII or Rich
Text Format (RTF). The contents of graphics windows (such as Map, Timeline, Graph, Diagram,
Construct, or Display windows) can be saved as PICT files. See below.
Saving a Window as an Accordance File
To save a window or a workspace as an Accordance file,
bring the window to the front by clicking in it or using
the Windows menu. Then choose Save (File menu or ⌘S). The standard Save dialog box appears:
This dialog box enables you to choose the location
and enter the name under which you want to save the
window file. The box labeled Save As: contains the
current name of the window in Accordance (with any
colon in the name replaced by a period). To save the
window in a file under another name, enter the new
name into this box and click the Save button. The default
save location in OS X is user/Documents/Accordance files,
but you can navigate to any other location.
For more information on using the Save dialog, see the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with
your computer.
Single tabs in a workspace cannot be saved, unless they are first detached using Detach Tab
(Window menu or option-⌘-T).
Opening a Saved File
To open a saved window, select Open… (File menu or ⌘-O). You can also double-click on the
file in the Finder to launch Accordance and open the window. This window appears on the
screen at the location in which it was last saved. It also becomes the active window, is brought
to the front and the search is automatically performed.
The name you enter in the Save dialog box becomes the name of the Accordance file but does
not affect the window name when the file is reopened. If you want to change the name of the
front window, it is best to do so first by choosing Name… from the Set submenu (Window
menu or option-⌘-N). After you change the window name, the new name appears as the default
in the Save dialog box. You can then save the window with the same or a different name.
However, if you save a workspace, the name you give it in the Save dialog immediately becomes
the title of the workspace. (See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.)
25-5
General Features
25
Printing and Saving
Repeated Save
Once you have saved a window, or if you open a saved window, choosing Save or ⌘-S again
does not bring up the dialog box. Instead, any changes you have made in the window are saved
to the same file, and overwrite the previous file. If you want to save the window with a new
name or location, and preserve your previously saved file, choose Save As… (File menu) to
bring up the Save dialog box again.
Saving Groups of Windows
You can also preserve an entire search or your current working set-up by saving all the open
windows and workspaces, except for report windows.
To save all the open independent windows, select Save Session… (File menu). When you select
this item, the standard Save dialog box appears with the prompt Save windows as:. Enter the
name for your saved session into the entry box and click OK.
If you reopen this file, the windows open and appear on the screen in the sizes and locations
at which they were saved. Also the searches defined in the entry box of each window are
automatically performed. Any workspaces that have not previously been saved with another
name will reopen with the name of the session and a number.
Hint: Use the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) to save a specific
arrangement of windows to use at the start of each session. If you delete any search
arguments the windows are reopened empty, and ready for a new search. There is
also an option to reopen the windows that were in use each time you quit Accordance.
Unique Window Names
If you have other windows open when you open a group of linked windows, the search cannot
be performed if the linked window names are no longer unique. In other words, if you have
a Construct window named Greek construct already open and then reopen a windows file
which contains a Construct window named Greek construct, the search will not be performed
until you close the former window to make the link reference unique.
Hint: Since the default names given to windows may be identical, it is a good idea
to rename the Construct windows that form a search before you save them, as
discussed in the previous section.
Saving Text in a Text File
You can save the text contents of any window as a text file. You can then reopen this text file in
another program such as a word processor. You can save the text of any window that contains
only text, such as the text pane of a Search, Tools, Parallel, User Notes or Tools, Text or
Reference List window, a Parsing window, an Analysis window, or a Table window. The text of
these windows can be saved either as a plain ASCII text file or in Rich Text Format (RTF). These
files can then be opened by any program that can convert these types of text files.
25-6
Note: Accordance cannot open text files (except as an import into a user tool). To save
independent windows so they can be reopened later in Accordance, use the Save,
Save As … or Save Session… options described in the preceding section.
To save the text from a text pane or a window as a text file, make the text pane active by
clicking anywhere in the pane, or bring the window to the front. Select Plain Text… from the
Save As Text File submenu (File menu). This brings up the standard Save dialog box.
Simply type the desired name instead of “untitled.txt” in the box named Save as: and click
Save. The prompt above the entry box specifies the type of text you are saving. Plain text is
saved without any font and style information for the text or the verse references. This option is
dimmed if the Greek & Hebrew Preferences are set to export text as Unicode, see below.
To preserve the font and style information, save the text in Rich Text Format (RTF). Select
RTF… from the Save As Text File submenu (File menu). Most standard word processors can
open files that are stored in RTF and display them with the same font and style information
that you see in the window on the screen. For more information about setting the text display
format, see Chapter 5.
Saving Graphics as a PICT File
You can also save the graphical contents of Map, Timeline, Graph, Diagram, Construct, or image
Display windows as a PICT file. PICT files can be opened by many graphics programs, and
imported as a graphic into most page layout programs and some word processors.
Note: Accordance cannot open PICT files. To save graphic windows so they can be
reopened later in Accordance, use the Save, Save As… or Save Session… options
instead.
Note: Up to version 6.5, Pict files from drawings like the map and Timeline could
be opened and edited in most drawing or painting programs, but with the
implementation of Quartz smoothing in 6.6, this type of PICT file is no longer
supported, except for the Diagram window.
To save the graphics from a window as a PICT file, bring the window to the front and select
Save As PICT File… (File menu). This brings up the standard Save dialog box.
To save the graphic, simply type the desired name into the box named Save windowtype
picture as: and click Save. The prompt on the entry box specifies the type of window whose
graphic you are saving.
Copying and Pasting Graphics
When a graphic window is in front the Copy (Edit menu or ⌘-C) changes to Copy Picture. This
allows you to copy the entire image to the clipboard at its full siz,e and make it available for
pasting into any program which accepts PICT images.
If you select part or all of the image in a graphics window, the Copy changes to Copy Picture
Selection. Select All (Edit menu or ⌘-A) lets you select all the picture as shown and copy it at
the size and resolution displayed in the window.
General Features
25-7
25
Printing and Saving
Greek and Hebrew Export Options
When Greek or Hebrew text is exported from Accordance, whether by copying, dragging, or
saving as text, it is affected by the current options in the Preferences dialog box. Choosing the
Greek & Hebrew page of Preferences (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) lets you specify the
appearance of these original languages in the exported text.
The options fall into these groups:
•
Keep the original fonts – but these fonts must be available to the word processor
(on the same Mac they are automatically available), and Yehudit is not a true rightto-left font.
•
Convert to other “traditional” fonts (with the same issues as above), or the Hebrew
to WorldScript for older Mac systems.
•
Convert to transliteration (Rosetta or plain English).
•
Convert to Unicode (which offers cross-platform compatibility and true right to
left in Hebrew, but is supported in the clipboard only in OS X. In older systems you
must save the text as RTF file).
Note: When copying and pasting text, these options are applied to the clipboard only
when you leave Accordance. However, if you drag and drop text between windows,
even within Accordance, these options (except for Unicode) will be applied to the
text in the new location.
Note: Text copied to the clipboard in Accordance retains its font and style information
(except for the Superscript/Subscript styles, and SMALL CAPS which are converted
to ALL CAPS). When you paste into another program which accepts font and style
information from the clipboard, the fonts and styles used are preserved.
However, not all word processors accept this information from the clipboard.
Saving the text as an RTF file (see above) lets you keep all this information, and
avoids the need to reapply the fonts, sizes and styles to the different elements of
the text.
Note: In OS X, programs that implement Quartz smoothing also tend to substitute
certain “high-ASCII” characters in Accordance fonts. In particularly the “apple”
character appeared in place of the long overstrike rough breathing mark. Export of
Helena text now converts this into a correct rough breathing (as well as the rough
breathing/grave combination before E).
Unicode Export
The Export all characters with Unicode format
checkbox converts all the fonts in the text to
standard Unicode format, supported on OS X and
on Windows. This options overrides and dims
the Export characters as: options below. It is
described in more detail below.
25-8
Greek Font Conversion
The Export characters as: pop-up menu allows you to specify how you
want any Greek in the text to appear.
•
Choosing Helena keeps the Greek characters as they are in
Accordance so that the text appears like this:
Gen. 1:1
e˙n aÓrchvØ e˙poi÷hsen oJ qeo\ß to\n oujrano\n kai« th\n ghvn
•
Selecting SPIonicconverts the characters to the free font from SBL,
TekniaGreek™ converts the characters to the font from Teknia Software,
Graeca II® converts to Linguist’s Software’s newer Greek fonts.
•
Transliteration converts the characters to the Rosetta™ font:
Gen. 1:1
•
en archeœÇ epoieœsen ho theos ton ouranon kai teœn geœn
Choosing English converts the Greek to a simple English font so it can be saved as
plain ASCII text and appears like this:
Gen. 1:1 en arche epoiesen ho theos ton ouranon kai ten gen
The Strip accents and breathing marks check box tells Accordance to save the text without
the accents and breathing marks. This option is dimmed when Transliteration or English are
selected in the pop-up menu.
Hebrew Font Conversion
There are additional options for the Hebrew text.
The Export characters as: pop-up menu allows you to specify how
you want any Hebrew in the text to appear.
•
Choosing Yehudit keeps the Hebrew characters as they are in
Accordance so that the text appears like this:
X®r`DaDh t¶Ea◊w Mˆy™AmDÚvAh t¶Ea My¡IhølTa aâ∂rD;b ty™IvaérV;b Gen. 1:1
•
Selecting Hebrew WorldScript™ converts the characters to the keyboard layout
used by Nisus, Israeli, and other Hebrew right-to-left fonts in OS 7-9. The text can
now be used in a Hebrew right-to-left non-Unicode word processor.
•
Selecting SPTiberian converts the characters to the free font from SBL,
SuperHEBREW® converts the characters to the popular font that uses a slightly
different key mapping than Yehudit™ (and others such as such as Jerusalem™),
Hebraica II™ converts to Linguist’s Software’s newer Hebrew fonts.
•
Transliteration converts the characters to the Rosetta™ font:
Gen. 1:1 b§reœ}sûiyt◊
•
baœraœ} }elohiym }eœt◊ hasûaœmayim w§}eœt◊ haœ}aœresΩ
Choosing English converts the Hebrew to a simple English font so it can be saved
as plain ASCII text and appears like this:
Gen. 1:1 bre’shiyt bara’ ’elohiym ’et hashamayim w’et ha’arets
General Features
25-9
25
Printing and Saving
Stripping Diacritical Marks
The Strip characters: pop-up menu lets you selectively remove
accents and marks from exported Hebrew text.
•
None leaves the text as it appears in Accordance.
•
Cantillation only strips the te’amim (accents) only.
•
Vowels & Cantillation also removes vowels and dagesh, but leaves the sin/shin
dot, and maqqef.
•
All Marks leaves only the consonants.
Note: Cantillation marks, which now appear in the tagged BHS-W4, are either poorly
supported in many other fonts, including Unicode, or not supported at all. They
are stripped automatically when options other than Yehudit or Unicode are
selected.
Note: The Strip characters option also applies to text exported as Transliteration
(Rosetta font).
Hebrew Direction
The Reverse direction of Hebrew characters check box allows you to convert the Hebrew
text for use in an English word processor. The right-to-left direction is used for Hebrew in
Accordance. If this box is checked, the text will appear in an English word processor exactly as
it does in Accordance. The line length will be set by the width of the text pane, and fixed by
return characters, so that it cannot easily be altered. Within each line the text will read from
right to left. If this box is not checked, the text will be reversed in an English word processor.
The Reverse direction check box is dimmed when Unicode, Hebrew WorldScript™,
Transliteration, or English are selected in the pop-up menu. In these cases the logical order
of the characters should be retained, and the text should not be reversed. Accordance ignores
the state of this check box unless a Hebrew font is selected.
Line Length and Text Wrap
When you open a file (or paste a selection) containing non-Unicode Hebrew text into an English
word processor, you may need to select the text, make the text width wider than the line length
and right-justify it. It should now appear exactly as it does in Accordance. However all word
processing features will work from left-to-right. You can set the font size and pane width in
Accordance before you export the text, as described in Chapter 6.
25-10
Unicode
Unicode fonts have been developed to simplify the use of multiple languages. Unicode is a
character coding system that assigns a standard and unique number to each character in most
modern and many ancient alphabets. It is becoming the standard for the exchange of text
between computer platforms and systems. Unlike the fonts in Accordance, there is no need to
put the Greek alpha or the Hebrew aleph instead of “a” or “A,” since each character has its own
fixed position. This allows you to use the special characters from different languages in papers,
emails, webpages, etc., without worrying whether or not the reader on a different platform or
program has access to our specific fonts.
Unicode is supported on Mac OS X and on Windows 2000 and above.
Unicode Fonts
Fonts for Unicode are widely available, and many are free. Some “large” fonts like
Cardo, Lucida Grande for Mac, and Times New Roman on Windows, include most of
the characters you are likely to need. Other like True Athena, SBL Hebrew and SIL Ezra
just contain a specific set for one language. However, if a character is missing from the
chosen font, it will be substituted from another font so the text is still readable.
Accordance and Unicode
Accordance does not use Unicode fonts in the text display, nor can it import text in
Unicode. However, Accordance does allow you to export Greek, Hebrew, Syriac, and
transliteration as Unicode. This means that the characters are remapped to the correct
Unicode characters. In Mac OS X this feature is supported for copy and paste (and drag
and drop) as well as Save as Text File (RTF), but on the PC emulator and other older
Mac systems, it is only supported for Save as Text File.
Exporting to Unicode
Select the Greek & Hebrew page of Preferences (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,).
Check the Unicode checkbox to convert the text to Unicode.
You will want to to strip the cantillation marks in Hebrew, if you find that your word
processor and chosen font do not display them correctly.
Now export your text by any method if you are in OS X, and by saving as an RTF Text
file if you have an older system.
Word Processors
The converted text can be used in any word processor that supports Unicode including
TextEdit on Mac OS X, Mellel, Nisus, and Word for Windows 2000 and above.
On Mac OS X we recommend the Mellel word processor (available at www.redlers.com)
for Hebrew and many other languages. In general you will need to select the font, and
set the text direction and justification for mainly Hebrew text, but all the characters
in mixed text should be correct. Each program is responsible for adjusting the spaces
between the characters, and they tend to appear different in each font.
25-11
General Features
25
Printing and Saving
On Windows (including users with the emulator) the Unicode export to RTF is
supported by Word (set the font to Times New Roman or Cardo).
Word for Mac 2004 does not fully support right-to-left, and does not allow editing of
the text. However, you can paste Hebrew Unicode into Word by:
First selecting a Unicode font such as Cardo or Lucida Grande,
Then selecting Paste Special from the Edit menu, and Unformatted Text from
the submenu (rather than Styled Text).
Unicode Character Entry Outside of Accordance
To enter the characters from another language when typing in Unicode in OS X:
Open System Preferences> International>Input Menu
Select the Character palette and /or Keyboard viewer as desired, and the
languages you wish to be able to enter.
Check Show input menu in menu bar.
Now you can select the language from the Input menu (flag) in the top right of the
screen when a Unicode application is in front, and type, or select the desired character
from the palette or keyboard viewer.
Transliteration
There are many different transliteration schemes for Greek and especially Hebrew. Accordance
attempts to follow the guidelines of the Society for Biblical Literature for the transliteration
from Greek and Hebrew into the Rosetta transliteration font.
The English transliteration (or transcription) is displayed in the Instant Details box and the
Parsing window. It is intended for users who cannot read the original languages. It can be
turned off in the Preferences… (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) and Set Parsing Display…
(Display menu or ⌘-T). It is also convenient for export to ASCII text such as e-mail documents.
None of these conversions is perfectly accurate, since they are based on computer algorithms
rather than a word by word analysis corrected by scholars. Whenever transliterated text is
exported, it should be checked and edited as needed.
Export to Transliteration
Copy As Transliteration (Edit menu) converts the text to Rosetta transliteration. If the
Preferences are set to export to Unicode, this allows you to convert Greek and Hebrew to
Unicode Transliteration in one operation, but this option works only for Copy-and-Paste and
only in OS X. It is not supported on older systems, nor for drag and drop, nor Save as Text
File. Therefore, to export Greek or Hebrew as transliteration in Unicode as an RTF file:
Set Greek & Hebrew Preferences to export text as Unicode.
Select the text and choose Copy as Transliteration.
Paste the text into a user tool or note Edit window and click Update.
Save the text as an RTF Text file.
25-12
Appendix
A
Setting Preferences
Contents:
Descriptions of each page in the Preferences dialog
box
A
Setting Preferences
The Preferences dialog box lets you set defaults which apply throughout Accordance, and
remain in effect unless you change them, even when you quit and reopen the program.
Selecting Preferences (Application or Edit menu or ⌘-,) for the first time opens the dialog
box to the first page.
The list in the top left corner of the dialog box allows you to select the page showing the set of
preferences you want to view or change. Some items do not appear on the list unless at least
one of the relevant modules is added. For example, you will not see Map Window Layers on
the list unless you have added the Bible Atlas to Accordance.
Clicking OK closes the dialog box and saves ALL the changes you have made to the different
pages. Clicking Cancel closes the dialog box without saving ANY changes.
When you reopen the Preferences, the dialog box will open to the last page you viewed.
General
These options apply
to many Accordance
windows.
Open initial window
as workspace with
tabs opens the first new
window in a workspace
(applies whenever no
windows are open).
The Suppress Drag
and Drop text editing
check box suppresses
the drag and drop
feature described in
Chapter 6-Viewing the
Text.
The Default startup portion of the dialog box allows you to set the
windows which open up each time you launch Accordance.
The pop-up menu lets you choose between:
Default Search Window (opens a Search window with the default
settings)
Default Session (opens a default set of windows)
Last Session (returns to all the windows open when the program was last quit).
Clicking Set Default Session saves the currently open windows as the default set. The button
is dimmed unless Default Session is selected in the pop-up menu.
The Information portion of the dialog box allows you to suppress many of the informational
dialog windows in order to speed up working with Accordance.
The Suppress opening splash screen check box suppresses the Accordance logo
window that appears when Accordance is launched.
A-2
The Suppress opening text information check box suppresses the About The Text
dialog box which appears the first time you open each module during a session
with Accordance.
Note: You are still responsible to read and note the copyright information on each
text that you use.
The Suppress save warning for all windows check box suppresses the alert which
appears when you close a window (except for the Edit windows for user notes and
user tools and edit mode of map user layers).
The Suppress information tips check box suppresses the alerts which remind you of
features which are not immediately obvious (such as the effect of holding down the
option key). It is recommended that you check this box only after you have become
familiar with using Accordance.
Appearance
The Resource Palette
section affects the
display of this floating
window:
The Buttons radio
buttons toggle the
display between
icon and text
buttons.
The Orientation
radio buttons
toggle the shape
between vertical
and horizontal
arrangemets.
The Browser section includes:
The Font Size pop-up menu affects the browser pane for tools and user tools, the
Search All window, and the Arrange Modules window.
Suppress tool auto-sizing suppresses the automatic resizing of the width of the
tools browser.
The Other section includes various global settings:
Auto-scrolling sets the speed at which text scrolls automatically with a commandclick on the scroll arrows.
Confine hypertext to the same workspace amplifies only within the same
workspace, so that if you amplify from a tab, a new amplify tab will open in the
same workspace instead of using an available open window elsewhere.
Use white background for pictures removes the black border around small pictures
in the picture display window.
Appendices
A-3
A
Setting Preferences
Use SBL Standard notation for Bible text display displays and exports book abbreviations
in Bible text using the SBL recommendations, for example 2Sam. 1:1 becomes 2 Sam 1:1. This
option does not affect the notation of the entry of verse references in Accordance.
Use European notation for verse entry and display uses a comma (,) in place of a colon (:)
to divide chapter and verse, and a period (.) in place of a comma to separate a list of references.
Note: The above two display changes affect new text panes only.
Turn off text and graphics smoothing removes the Quartz smoothing of text and graphics.
This check box appears only in OS X.
Text Display
These options set the
default display of all
Bible texts (the Font is
ignored in Greek and
Hebrew and the size is
set in proportion). The
options are identical
to those for individual
texts described in
Chapter 6-Viewing the
Text.
These display
characteristics can
be set for individual
texts, and saved as the
default for that text,
by selecting Set Text
Display… (Display
menu or ⌘-T).
Note: If you make any changes to this page, and subsequently click OK on any page of
the Preferences dialog box, ALL the current settings on this page become the
default for ALL your Bible texts.
Tools Display
These options set the default display of all tools. These characteristics can be set for individual
tools, and saved as the default for that tool, by selecting Set Tool Display… (Display menu or
⌘-T) as described in Chapter 14-The Tools Window.
The Text and Alternate Text pop-up menus set the Bible text shown in Instant Details, or
opened when you click on a verse reference (when no recyclable text window is open). The
alternate text will be used if the verse is not found in the first text.
A-4
Note: If you make
any changes to
this page, and
subsequently
click OK on
any page of the
Preferences
dialog box, ALL
the current
settings on this
page will become
the default for
ALL your tools.
Hint: The settings
which appear in
this page and the
previous page
each time they are
opened, are the
current default settings for the first English Bible text, and the first Reference tool,
in the pop-up menus. These are also the default settings for new texts and tools
added to Accordance. Therefore it is a good idea to keep the defaults for the first
Bible text and Reference tool the same as your preferences for most texts.
Greek & Hebrew
The Greek & Hebrew
entry options affect the
keyboard entry of Greek
and Hebrew.
When checked, the
Automatic final letter
check box alters the
form of certain Greek
and Hebrew letters
depending on their
position in the word. As
you enter the word, the
final form, for example
of the Greek sigma
or the Hebrew mem,
appears. But if this letter
is followed by another letter, the previous letter reverts to the regular form. Unchecking the
box keeps the characters exactly as you type them.
Appendices
A-5
A
Setting Preferences
The Automatic diacritical marks check box affects the various overstrike characters
– accents and breathing marks and their combinations in Greek, and vowel points and other
marks in Hebrew, as well as the other Accordance fonts. Checking the box lets you enter any of
the overstrike positions of the specific accent or mark, and Accordance will put the character
or the combination with the correct amount of overstrike for the previous or following letter.
Unchecking the box keeps the characters exactly as you type them.
When the Use Israeli keyboard layout for Hebrew check box is checked, the keyboard
entry is converted to the layout used by Nisus, Mellel, and other Hebrew right-to-left word
processors.
Use Greek Polytonic keyboard layout converts the keyboard entry to a modern Greek
keyboard layout for Helena (not Sylvanus Uncial). The accent characters use the modern Greek
keyboard layout character positions, but, like the Accordance overstrike accents they are typed
after rather than before the vowel. The iota subscript is entered with option-i followed by “i”.
The Export options affect the appearance of Greek and Hebrew text when exported from
Accordance into another program, whether by copy and paste, drag and drop, or saving as a
text file. These options are described in detail in Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.
Compare Text
These options affect the
comparison of texts in
the Search window and
the List of differences.
The Compare pop-up
menu defines what
kind of differences
are highlighted
when comparing
grammatically tagged
texts.
Checking an Ignore
checkbox removes
the item from the
comparison:
Upper case (and final
forms)
Punctuation
Greek accents and breathing marks
All Hebrew pointing or
Hebrew cantillation only
The Color Codes pop-up menus set the colors used for Replaced, Inserted, and Deleted words.
A-6
Instant Details Box
These options affect the
items displayed in the
floating Instant Details
box.
Set to automatically
fade turns on the autofade which fades the
Instant Details box
whenever there is no
text to display.
The Font size: pop-up
menu lets you choose
Small. Medium, or
Large.
The other options will
be dimmed until a Keyed
English text or a grammatically tagged text is added. They do not affect the parsing of selected
words in the Parsing window.
These options are described in Chapter 5-Floating Windows.
Arrange Tags
These options determine
the display order of the
grammatical tags.
The arrangement of the
tags affects the order in
which they are displayed
in the Instant Details,
Parsing, Syntax, and
Analysis windows. It
applies to full tags and
abbreviations but not
to the single letter tag
codes.
Drag any item to a new
position in the column.
Click Reset All to restore the default Accordance settings.
Hint: To have the tense, voice, and mood of verbs appear before person and number,
drag all three to the top of the column. Since these tags only occur in verbs, they
will not affect the display of other parts of speech.
Appendices
A-7
A
Setting Preferences
Citation
These options affect the
format of the text and
references when copied
as a citation.
This page is similar to
the Text Display dialog
and Preference page,
but the format is only
applied to text when
copied as a citation,
either from the Edit
menus or using the
Accordance widget. A
citation usually groups
the text together, with a
separate reference for all
the included verses, but
this page offers many options for tailoring the citation to your specific needs.
The Content portion of the dialog box allows you to set the format for the display of the text
of the verses.
The Markers appear before and after the body of the text. A single
character is normally entered, but up to 7 are accepted.
The Show as: pop-up menu specifies the layout of the verses.
Paragraphs copies the text of contiguous verses as a
continuous stream, starting a new line only for a new
paragraph.
Paragraphs With Space is the same as the Paragraph option
except that there is a blank line before each new section begins.
Separate Verses causes the text to begin a new line at the start of each verse.
Separate With Space is the same as the Separate Verses option except that it
displays a blank line between each verse in the text.
References Only is dimmed in this case as it does not apply to citations.
Note: Paragraphs and Paragraphs With Space display dim the Above Verse and Below
Verse options for the Reference display, and vice-versa, as these options are
mutually incompatible.
The checkboxes may not apply to all texts.
Copy text as one block dims the Show as pop-up menu and copies all the text as
a single paragraph, including separate paragraphs and discontinuous verses.
Suppress poetry removes the short lines so that all the text appears as prose.
Hide superscripts displays the text without the superscripted numbers and
letters which refer to the footnotes.
Scale font size to resets the font size to the size specified in the pop-up menu.
A-8
The Content References portion of the dialog box allows you to format the verse references
within the text. The initial verse reference is always omitted when copying as citation.
The Markers appear before and after each verse reference.
The Format pop-up menu allows you to specify how the references should appear.
Above Verse adds the reference on a line by itself, with the
text of the verse beginning on the following line.
Before Verse adds the full reference at the beginning of each
subsequent verse.
After Verse adds the reference at the end of the last line of
the text of the verse.
Omit Entire Reference copies the text of the verses without
references.
Omit Book and Chapter adds only the verse number.
Omit Book Name Only displays the chapter and verse numbers.
The checkboxes offer additional options for the references.
Abbreviate book name allows you to specify whether you want to display
the full book name or an abbreviation. It is dimmed unless Before verse is
selected.
Ignore reference style makes the verse references plain style like the text.
The Citation Reference formats the citation before or after the text.
The Markers appear before and after the citation itself.
The Location pop-up menu specifies where the citation references should appear.
Above Citation places the reference on a separate line above the
text.
Before Citation places the reference at the front of the first line
of the text.
After Citation places the reference at the end of the text.
Below Citation places the full reference on a separate line below
the text.
The checkboxes offer additional options.
Abbreviate book name allows you to specify whether you want to display the
full book name or an abbreviation.
Include text abbreviation includes an abbreviation of the name of the text as
part of the reference, i.e. “Gen. 1:1 (KJV).”
Note: Font and style information are preserved when copying from Accordance except
when overridden in this dialog box, but not when copying the citation via the
Accordance widget which always pastes plain text.
Note: The Yehudit font is not fully supported in conjunction with the citation feature.
You can paste a Hebrew citation into an Edit window in Accordance using Yehudit,
but you should choose separate verses in the Show as pop-up menu. Outside
Accordance the citation is designed to work together with conversion to Unicode
fonts.
Appendices
A-9
A
Setting Preferences
Speech
These options set the
voice and speed used
by Accordance to read
selected text.
Chapter 13-Amplifying
your Selection describes
these options in detail.
Search Window
This page affect the
settings of new Search
windows.
The Text pop-up menu
determines which text
will appear in the search
text and display text
pop-up menus.
The two Search for
radio buttons let you set
the window to search for
Words or Verses.
If you choose Verses,
an asterisk is placed in
the argument entry box
and the entire text is
displayed. The Range
and Field pop-up menus are dimmed, but display the settings you have selected.
Checking the Show More options checkbox opens the Search window with these pop-up
menus visible:
The Field pop-up menu lets you set the field for search commands.
The Range pop-up menu lets you choose from a predefined range.
The Add context pop-up menu lets you add surrounding verses to the “hit” verses in
the display.
The After clicking on details, show: check boxes set the tabs that appear after clicking the
Details button on any Search window. Checking any item opens a tab for that detail each time
the Details button is clicked. Graph and Table also apply to Reference tools.
A-10
Note: Checking the Concordance item may significantly slow the opening of the Details
workspace.
The Text, Search for, Field and Verse settings on this page affect only the Default Search
window when Accordance is launched, and Search windows opened from the New submenu
(File menu or ⌘-N). Show More options, Add context, and the Details apply to all new
Search windows.
Parallel Window
This page lets you set
the defaults for new
Parallel windows. Unlike
all the other default
settings, for Parallel
windows you can set
separate default fields,
number of panes, and
texts for each parallel
selected in the upper
pop-up menu. See
Chapter 15-Parallels for
details of these options.
User Notes Window
These preferences set
the default set of notes,
text order, and highlight
display of new User
Notes windows, and
the opening of new Edit
windows. See Chapter
19-User Notes for details
of these options.
Appendices
A-11
A
Setting Preferences
Edit Window
This page sets defaults
which apply to all new
Edit windows for both
user notes and user
tools.
The Block pop-up menu
lets you select a Small
“block” when editing
user tools. This will
update the tool faster
but more often. The
Medium or a Large size
block needs updating
less often but takes
longer to edit and
refresh the Edit window.
See Chapter 19-User
Notes, and Chapter 20-User Tools for details of these options.
Map Window Layers
The pop-up menus
display the same
backgrounds and layers
as the Map window. You
can choose which layers
are displayed whenever
you open a new Map
window, whether from
the New submenu (File
menu) or by amplifying
from another module.
These options are
described in Chapter A2Choosing the Layers.
A-12
Map Window
Display
These options set the
default display of all
new Map windows. The
options are identical
to those for individual
windows which can be
set and also saved as
the default, by selecting
Set Map Display…
(Display menu or ⌘-T)
as described in Chapter
A5-Setting Map Display
and Defaults.
Timeline Layers
The pop-up menus
let you choose which
layers and date scheme
are displayed whenever
you open a new
Timeline window. These
options are described
in Chapter T1-The
Timeline Window.
Appendices
A-13
A
Setting Preferences
Timeline Display
These options set the
default display of all
new Timeline windows.
The options are identical
to those for individual
windows which can be
set and also saved as
the default, by selecting
Set Timeline Display…
(Display menu or ⌘-T)
as described in Chapter
T5-Setting Timeline
Display and Defaults.
Syntax Window
These options set the
default font, color,
size, and style of the
English text in new
Syntax windows. Greek
or Hebrew text will be
sized and styled to
match the English. See
Chapters 13 and G5 for
details.
A-14
Appendix
B
Menu Reference
and Key Commands
This appendix gives a brief description of each menu
command in the order that it appears in the list of
menus on the screen.
The main purpose of this appendix is to serve as a
quick reference for reviewing the basic functions of
individual menus in Accordance.
At the end of the appendix is a list of the keyboard
shortcuts and the actions which are affected by
holding down certain keys.
B
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Keyboard shortcuts are supplied for many of the menu and submenu items in Accordance. The
shortcuts are indicated by the command symbol together with the keystroke, for example ⌘P.
In some items the command symbol is preceded by an arrow, indicating a shift-command, as in
⇧⌘P, or the option symbol as in ⌥⌘P, or the control symbol as in ^⌘P.
To use a shortcut to execute a menu item, hold down the command, or shift and command, keys
and press the keystroke. The menu and other shortcuts are listed at the end of this chapter.
An ellipsis (…) after an item indicates that selecting that item opens a dialog box with further
choices.
Accordance Menu (in OS X only)
About Accordance: Displays basic information about Accordance.
About The Text: Displays information for the text or tool that is
being searched in the front window.
Preferences…: Opens a dialog box in which many default
preferences can be set.
Services: Opens a submenu with options to interact with other
programs.
Hide Accordance: Hides all Accordance windows.
Hide Others: Hides the windows of all other applications,
including the Finder.
Quit: Closes all open windows and quits Accordance. If you
have made a change in any independent window, a dialog box
appears to give you the opportunity to save all windows.
Note: In Classic OS these items are in the Apple, File and Edit
menus.
File Menu
New: Opens a new window with a
default name. The submenu allows
you to choose from the different
types of window. The new window
becomes the “active” or front
window.
New Workspace: Opens a new
workspace in which subsequent new
windows will appear as tabs.
B-2
New Construct: Opens a new Construct window. The submenu allows
you to choose either Simple, Greek, or Hebrew.
User Files: Opens a submenu with these items:
New User Tool…: Creates and saves a new user tool file.
Import User Tool…: Imports a text file into a user tool.
Merge User Tools…: Merges two files into one tool.
New User Notes…: Creates and saves a new user notes file.
Merge User Notes…: Merges two files into one user notes.
Import Bible Text…: Imports a text file as a Bible module.
Duplicate: Creates a copy of the front window. The name of the
new window is the name of the original window followed by a
numeral.
Duplicate Tab: Creates a copy of the front tab in a workspace. The
name of the new tab is the name of the original tab followed by a numeral.
Open…: Opens a window displaying an entire Accordance module (and adds the module
if necessary). The file to be opened is selected in the standard Macintosh Open dialog
box.
Also opens a window file previously saved in Accordance. The file can contain
individual windows or groups of windows. After opening the file, any searches are
automatically performed.
Close: Closes the front window (the same as clicking the close box in the upper-left
corner of the front window).
Close Tab: Closes the front tab in a workspace (the same as clicking the tab close button).
Close Pane: Closes the selected text pane in the front window containing more than one
text pane (the same as clicking the close button).
Close All Windows: Closes all open windows without quitting the program. If you have
made a change in any independent window, a dialog box appears to give you the
opportunity to save all windows.
Save: Saves a new or modified front window or workspace as a file which Accordance can
open.
Save As: Saves the front window or workspace as a file which Accordance can open.
Selecting this item brings up the standard Save dialog box.
Save Session: Saves all open windows as a single file. Selecting this item brings up the
standard Save dialog box.
Save As Text File: Opens a submenu with Plain Text… and RTF…. Saves
the text from the front window (or selected text pane) to a text file,
either ASCII or Rich Text Format (RTF). If the active window contains
graphics, this item changes to Save As PICT File….
Page Setup: Allows you to specify information about printing. The dialog is configured
for the capabilities of your printer.
Print Settings: Allows you to set margins and headings for printing, and specify how
multiple panes are printed
Print: Prints the contents of the front window.
Print Selection: Prints the current selection in a text pane or window.
Appendices
B-3
B
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Edit Menu
Undo/Redo: Reverses any editing operation connected with
text entry, including anything that involves copying text into
the clipboard. The Redo item reverses the Undo item.
Cut: Removes the selected text and stores it in the clipboard.
Copy: Stores the selected text in the clipboard without removing
it from the window. When a graphic window is in front the
item changes to Copy Picture, and copies the whole window
for pasting into a program which accepts graphics. If part of
the image is selected in certain windows, the Copy changes
to Copy Picture Selection.
Paste: Replaces any selected text with the contents of the clipboard (if appropriate). If
there is only an insertion point, the contents of the clipboard are inserted at that point.
Clear: Removes any selected text without storing it in the clipboard.
Select All: Selects all the text in the window (or text window pane) in which the cursor is
present.
Copy As: Opens a submenu with items affecting copying into the clipboard:
No Superscript: Stores the selected text without any
superscript characters.
Citation: Stores the Bible text according to the Citation
Preferences.
References: Stores all references or the selected verse
references from the text pane.
Transliteration: Stores the selected text and converts it to
Rosetta transliteration.
Style Only: Stores the styles of the selected text in any window. The styles include the
font, size, style and color.
Paste Style: Replaces the styles of selected text with the previously stored styles,
in an Edit User layer for maps, an Edit window for user notes or user tools, or the
description box of a Construct or Reference List window.
Arrange Modules: Opens a special window to rearrange and delete the items in the
pop-up menus of Accordance modules.
Search Menu
Enter Key Numbers…: In a Keyed Bible text, allows you
to select numbers from a list which also shows the
English transliteration of the dictionary form. After you
make your selections, the numbers are entered with the
[KEY] command at the location of the insertion point or
text selection. In grammatically tagged texts this item
changes to Enter Lexical Forms…. This item is dimmed
in untagged texts.
B-4
Enter Words…: Allows you to select any word in the search text, or in the current field
in a tool. After you make your selections, the words are entered at the insertion point
or text selection. In grammatically tagged texts this item changes to Enter Inflected
Forms….
Enter Command: Opens a submenu which allows you to select a
command to be inserted at the insertion point or text selection
in the entry box of certain windows.
AND: Both expressions connected by an AND must be present
in the field.
OR: Either one or both of the expressions connected by an OR
must be present in the search field.
NOT: If NOT precedes an expression, the expression cannot
appear. If NOT is adjacent to another command, it negates
the command.
XOR: One but not both of the expressions connected by an XOR
must be present in the search field.
FOLLOWED BY: The expressions must occur in the specified
order in the search field.
PRECEDED BY: The expressions must occur in the reverse
order.
WITHIN: This command specifies the number of words within which the expressions
must be found.
LINK: Includes the search argument of the linked window.
CONTENTS: Includes the verse contents of the linked window.
HITS: Uses the word list results of the linked window.
MERGE: Uses the search results from a Bible text in a Reference tool, or the results of
another window with the same tool but a different field.
LINK, CONTENTS, HITS, and MERGE open a dialog box listing open linkable windows, if
necessary.
RANGE: Searches within the specified temporary range.
COUNT: Searches for words that occur the specified number
of times.
KEY: Searches for the number of the word in a Keyed Bible
text.
STYLE: Searches for a color highlight style or all styles.
FIELD: A dialog box appears, which allows you to select either
BEGIN or END. This represents the beginning or end of
your search field.
Enter Symbol: Opens a submenu which allows you to select a
symbol to be inserted at the insertion point or text selection.
See Appendix C for a full description of the use of the different
symbols.
Appendices
B-5
B
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Enter Grammatical Tag: Opens a submenu which shows the
parts of speech which apply to the current search text. It
appears only when the front window is a Search window,
the search text is set to a grammatically tagged text, and the
window is set to Search for Words.
Greek
Selecting a part of speech item from the submenu brings up a
dialog box appropriate to that part of speech. After you click
OK in the dialog, the tagged part of speech is added to the
argument entry box in brackets ( [ ] ). Refer to Chapters G7,
G8, and G9 for complete listings of the options available for
each part of speech in Greek and Hebrew.
Tag Entry: Places [TAG] in the argument entry box. The
word TAG is selected so you can immediately enter any
appropriate tag entry.
Hebrew
Define Range: Opens a dialog box for creating and modifying ranges
to be used in the search range pop-up menu of a Search window.
When a Tool window is in front, this item changes to Define Tool
Set…. When the Search All window is in front, this item changes to
Define Group….
Find/Replace: Opens a dialog for editing the text in Edit windows
for User Tools or User Notes. The item is dimmed unless an Edit
window is in front.
Spelling: Opens a dialog box for checking the spelling in Edit
windows, in OS 10.4 and above. The item is dimmed unless an Edit window is in front.
Display Menu
Set windowname Display…: Allows you to change the
display details of the front window. The options are
tailored to the type of front window, and offer additional
features which are not immediately obvious from the
window itself. It is important to check the available
options for each type of window.
Show Text As: Opens a submenu with the options for the
display of Bible text in verses, paragraphs, or references
only.
Hide Verse References: Hides the references of the Bible
text in the selected text pane.
List All Book Names: Opens a window displaying English
Bible book names and standard abbreviations, and, in the case
of foreign language texts, the alternate names.
List Text Differences: Opens a window listing the differences
highlighted in the first two text panes.
Define Highlight Styles…: Opens a dialog box for creating and
editing styles used to mark the Bible text.
B-6
Define Map Layers…: Opens a submenu which lets you choose the
type of map set or layer to define or modify. The User Layers…
item is dimmed unless a map window is in front. These options
apply only when the Bible Atlas is installed.
Define Time Layers…: Opens a submenu which lets you choose the
type of timeline layer to define or modify. These options apply only
when the Timeline is installed.
The other items in this menu lets you change the appearance of text
you select or enter in the Edit window for user notes and user tools,
the description box of Construct and Reference List windows, and in
the text box of a User layer for maps.
Font: The submenu lets you choose from any font installed on your
system.
Size: The submenu lets you choose from a range of sizes.
Style: The submenu lets you choose the styles of the text, and the
options of Superscript and Subscript.
Color: The submenu lets you choose from a range of colors.
Alignment: The submenu lets you choose left, center, or right justification for
a user tool.
Selection Menu
Mark Selection: Adds bookmarks in the margin of the
selected verses or paragraphs.
Remove All Marks: Removes all bookmarks from the front
window.
Add Selection To: Adds the selected verses in the front
window to the reference list chosen from the submenu.
Add Marked Verses To: Adds the marked verses in the
front window to the reference list chosen from the
submenu.
Remove Selected Verses: Deletes the selected verses from
the front Reference List window.
Remove Marked Verses: Deletes the marked verses from
the front Reference List window.
Edit User Note: Opens the Edit window for the selected verse in the front window,
allowing you to add or edit a user note. When a User Tool window is in front, the item
changes to Edit User Tool.
Group: Makes selected items in the Diagram window a single item for moving and
copying.
Ungroup: Restores the individual items in a group in the Diagram window.
Appendices
B-7
B
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Amplify Menu
These items are dimmed unless text is selected in an appropriate
text pane.
The first items each open or recycle a window, and search for the
selection in the module chosen from the submenu. The All item
at the bottom of each submenu searches all the modules in the
submenu.
English Texts: English Bibles and other texts
Greek Texts: Greek Bibles and other texts
Hebrew Texts: Hebrew Bibles and other texts
Text Sets: A user-defined set of texts
Parallels: Parallel modules (finds selected verses from a Bible
text pane).
Context: A Text window that contains the entire text of the
version in a text pane, so that the context of the selected
verses can be viewed with the parallel panes.
English Tools: English dictionaries or other tools arranged
alphabetically
Greek Tools: Greek lexicons
Hebrew Tools: Hebrew lexicons
Reference Tools: Commentaries and other reference tools
arranged by Scripture reference
General Tools: Other tools arranged by articles or chapters
Tool Sets: A user-defined set of tools
Map: Opens a map window and adds the selected place name (if the Bible Atlas is present).
Timeline: Opens a Timeline window and adds the selected name (if the Timeline is present).
User Tools: General tools created by users
User Notes: User notes on Bible verses (finds selected verses from a Bible text pane).
Language: Language: Opens a submenu with these options:
Parsing: Opens (or recycles) a Parsing window that contains the parsing information
for the selected words from a Bible text pane.
Diagram: Opens a Diagram window allowing you to create a
grammatical diagram of the selection.
Speak: Reads the selected text audibly.
Syntax: Opens a Syntax window allowing you add comments to a chart
containing the selection with its parsing.
Search: Opens (or recycles) a Search or Tool window with the same module as the
selection, and performs a search for the selected words from a Bible text pane or tool.
Search All: Opens (or recycles) the Search All window with the module group chosen
from the submenu, and searches for the selection.
Favorites: Opens (or recycles) the module chosen from the submenu, and searches for
the selection.
B-8
Window Menu
The first five items open and close floating windows which give
you access to many features. A check (✓) shows that the
window is open.
Resource Palette: Lets you open new windows and access
Amplify features by clicking on the appropriate button.
Instant Details: Displays the parsing details and gloss (or other
details) of the word under the cursor.
Highlight Palette: Lets you mark the text with the defined
highlight styles.
Text Palette: Accesses the text edit items from the Display menu.
Character Palette: Displays and enters the special characters of
the Accordance fonts.
Hide Palettes/Show Palettes: Hides or shows all open floating
windows together.
Window Help: Opens the Accordance Help window relevant to
the front window or dialog box.
Show All: Brings all Accordance windows to the front (in OS X) and makes all hidden
windows visible.
Hide: Makes the front window invisible.
Set: Opens a submenu with options that apply to the front window or tab:
Recycle Contents: Makes the window recyclable so that it
will be reused whenever it is appropriate, and adds the
recycle symbol.
Name: Changes the name of the window.
Untie: Removes the scrolling connection between this
window and other windows.
Tie To: Appears only when appropriate, and connects the
scrolling of the front window with that of the selected window.
Arrange: Opens a submenu with options that apply to all visible windows and
workspaces:
Tile Windows: Positions as many open windows as possible so
that they fill the screen and can be viewed side by side.
Stack Windows: Positions all open windows so the title bar of
each window is visible, with the front window on top.
Slide Show: Displays the text panes of the workspaces in full screen mode without
unnecessary controls and entry boxes.
Detach Tab: Converts the front tab to an independent window.
Merge Windows: Combines the front two windows into a workspace.
The other items in the Window menu are the names of the currently open windows.
Hidden windows marked with a diamond (◊). Selecting the name of a window brings it
to the front. A check mark (✓) shows the front window.
Appendices
B-9
B
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Help Menu
Accordance Help: Offers interactive help for all the features of
Accordance.
Keyboard Shortcuts
These keystrokes perform the following actions using the ⌘ key:
Command A selects all the text or objects
Command B opens and closes the Instant Details Box, or styles text Bold
Command C copies to the clipboard selected text or graphics, or a graphic window
Command D duplicates the front tab or window
Command E opens the Define Highlight Styles dialog box
Command F
opens the Find dialog box if a Map or Timeline window is in front,
opens the Find/Replace dialog if an Edit window is in front,
otherwise opens the Search All window
Command G groups selected objects in the Diagram window
Command H hides Accordance (in OS X only)
Command I tiles the windows on the screen, or styles text Italic
Command J lets you select a word or inflected form to search
Command K recycles the front window
Command L
lets you select a Key number or lexical form to search,
reopens the last Define dialog box if a Map or Timeline window is in front,
or adds/removes a Scripture link in an Edit window
Command M puts the front window in the dock (in OS X only)
Command N opens a new Search window
Command O opens an Accordance file as a new window
Command P prints the contents of the front window
Command Q quits Accordance
Command R opens the Define Range, Define Tool Set, or Define Group dialog box
Command S saves a new or changed front window or workspace as an Accordance file
Command T lets you set the display of the front window, or styles text Plain
Command U lets you edit a User Layer on a map, or a user note or tool
Command V pastes the contents of the clipboard, or styles text Underline
Command W closes the front window
Command X deletes selected text and places it in the clipboard
Command Y closes the selected pane in the front window
B-10
Command Z undoes the last text edit or diagram action
Command 1 opens a Simple Construct window
Command 2 opens a Greek Construct window
Command 3 opens a Hebrew Construct window
Command 4 searches for the selection in a duplicate of the front Search or Tool window
Command 5 displays the context of the selected verse
Command 7 adds a bookmark to the selected verse or article
Command 8 highlights the selected text with the previously used style
Command 9 reads the selected text audibly
Command 0 shows all windows
Command \ hides the front window
Command ? opens Accordance Help
Command , (comma) opens the Preferences dialog box
Command ' (quote) opens the Details workspace, or in a Details window brings its
Search window to the front
Command ;
toggles the Search window between searching for Verses and Words,
and advances the Tools window setting of the Show pop-up menu to the next option
Command : (colon) opens the Spell checker for Edit windows
Command ` (prime) cycles through open windows (like option tab)
Command . (period) stops the current action
Command [ stores the styles of the selected text (this may not work on all keyboards)
Command ] replaces the styles of selected text with the previously stored styles (this
may not work on all keyboards)
Command + (=) increases the font size in the selected pane of the front window, or
zooms in to a Picture, Map, or Timeline window
Command - decreases the font size or zooms out
Option-command A opens the Arrange Modules window
Option-command C copies the selection to the clipboard without any superscript
characters
Control-command C copies the selected text as a citation
Option-command G ungroups selected objects in the Diagram window
Option-command L lets you select a root form to search
Option-command M merges the front two windows into a workspace
Option-command N opens the Set Window Name dialog box
Option-command P opens the Print Settings dialog box
Control-command P opens the Page Setup dialog box
Option-command R copies only the references of the selected text
Option-command S switches into and out of the Slide show
Option-command T detaches the front tab
Appendices
B-11
B
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Option-command V sets the front window to search for verses
Option-command W closes all tabs except the front tab
Option-command W sets the front window to search for words
Option-command ? opens the relevant Accordance Help for the front window
Option-command 0 (zero)
hides and shows all open floating windows,
or the control panel for the Slide show
Option-command 7 removes all bookmarks
Option-command + or - resizes the text in all panes
These Shift-commands place a command in the argument entry box:
Shift-command A <AND>
Shift-command B <FOLLOWED BY>
Shift-command C [CONTENTS windowname]
Shift-command F [FIELD END] or [FIELD BEGIN]
Shift-command H [HITS windowname]
Shift-command K [KEY keynumber]
Shift-command L [LINK windowname]
Shift-command M [MERGE windowname]
Shift-command N <NOT>
Shift-command O <OR>
Shift-command P <PRECEDED BY>
Shift-command R [RANGE definition]
Shift-command S [STYLE stylename]
Shift-command T [TAG ]
Shift-command U [COUNT #]
Shift-command W <WITHIN>
Shift-command X <XOR>
These additional keystroke commands (not visible on the menus)
perform the following actions using the control key:
Control 1 through 9 changes the current search text in the top left pop-up menu to
the first, second, third text, etc.
Control + (=) changes the current search text to the next text
Control - changes the current search text to the prior text
Control or right-click overrides the amplify from a selection and opens any item in a
new window
B-12
Double- and Triple-click Amplify actions
Triple-click in a text or tool pane opens the first Greek, Hebrew, or English dictionary
Triple-click in a verse reference in a text pane opens the first commentary or Reference tool
Triple-click in a Keyed Bible text opens the related Greek or Hebrew dictionary for that word
Shift-triple-click on a word or verse reference opens the last selected tool
Command-triple-click on any of the above opens the tool in a separate window instead
of a tab
Triple-click in other window areas selects all the text
Double-click on a name in 2D Map window or Timeline opens the default English tool
In summary:
Double or triple-click — automatic amplify
+ Shift — goes to last tool(s) used to amplify from that pop-up menu
+ Command — opens in a separate window
Navigating windows
Arrow keys move the cursor through the text, or through the selected scrolling list in
a dialog
Shift arrow keys select text as the cursor moves
Command right and left arrow keys move the cursor to the beginning or end of the line
Shift-command right and left arrow keys move the cursor to the beginning or end of
the line and select the intervening text
Search, Text, Reference list, and Tool Windows:
Command up and down arrow keys scrolls to next verse or entry
Option-command up and down arrow keys scrolls to next chapter
Control-option-command up and down arrow keys scrolls to next book
Control-command up and down arrow keys scrolls to next mark
Pressing Shift with the above four command-arrows advances the text 10 times
Control up and down arrow keys changes the search text to the next or prior module
Edit Windows:
Command up and down arrow keys scroll to next verse or article
Option-command up and down arrow keys adds a note to the next verse (Notes)
Tab and Page Keys:
Tab goes between entry box and reference box (or additional entry boxes in tools)
Shift-tab selects the next text pane
Option-tab cycles through open windows
Control-tab cycles through open tabs (to the right)
Shift-control-tab cycles through open tabs (to the left)
Command-tab cycles through open programs
Page up, page down, home, and end keys work for most windows.
Appendices
B-13
B
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Holding down these keys affects certain other actions:
Contextual menus
Right click or control click in many window areas opens a pop-up menu with a
selection of the available options
Resource palette (key commands can be combined)
Option amplify from a Keyed Bible text searches for the Greek or Hebrew word,
or Key number
Option amplify from a grammatically tagged text searches for inflected form
Control or right-click on the Resource palette opensa new window instead of
amplifying when there is a text selection
Command open or amplify to any item opens an independent window instead
of a tab
Tabs
Option drag duplicates the tab in the same or another workspace
Option close tab button closes all the tabs except the one clicked
Text panes
Shift click access buttons advances the text 10 times
Option click in text pane adds a bookmark
Option click on pane font size button resizes all text panes
Option click on Add pane for a Reference Tool or User Note adds the new pane
in the top row
Command + (=) or - (hyphen) increases or decreases the font size in the
selected pane
Option-command + or - resizes the text in all panes
Option click on pane position button switches pane to left of the other row
(instead of the right)
Command click on scroll arrows to start auto-scrolling (in single pane windows)
Command click on a verse reference in a tool or user tool to amplify to all the
references in the paragraph
Control or right click scroll in Search window disables the tied scrolling of the
panes
Control or right click scroll in a Parallel window ties enables or disables the tied
scrolling (temporarily reverses the Tie Scrolling checkbox setting)
Details
Command ' (quote) in a Search window opens the Details workspace, or in a
Details window brings its Search window to the front
Pressing the shift key when clicking OK, return or enter in the Search window
adds the new search to the current Hits Graph.
B-14
Copy
Option Copy copies without superscript characters
Control-command C copies the selected text as a citation.
Option-command R copies only the references of the selected text.
Shift Copy as References or Copy as Citation copies with the full book
names
Tools browser
Option click to open the browser or on triangle scrolls and opens the browser to
the selected section
Option click on name selects a range for searching and displaying
Shift-option click on name selects or deselects an additional range
Edit window for user tools and notes
Shift click access buttons goes to the next block (Tools)
Option click in margin increases the level of the subtitle hierarchy (Tools)
Control click in margin decreases the level of the subtitle hierarchy (Tools)
Option click access buttons adds a note to the next verse (Notes)
Command L adds or removes a Scripture link
Command : (colon) opens the Spell checker
Command F opens the Find/Replace dialog
Command up and down arrow keys scroll to next verse or article
Option-command up and down arrow keys adds a note to the next verse (Notes)
Graphic edit windows (Construct or Diagram window or User Layer)
Shift click selects multiple objects
Option drag duplicates the object(s)
Command G groups selected objects in the Diagram window
Option-Command G ungroups selected objects in the Diagram window
Edit User Layer for maps (in addition to above)
Shift draw or resize oval or rectangle constrains drawing to circle or square
Shift resize pasted picture restores the original perspective
Command drag a Bezier point pulls out the handles
Shift-command drag a handle breaks the alignment between the handles
Shift-command drag a Bezier point pulls out only one handle
Appendices
B-15
B
Menu Reference and Key Commands
Picture, Map, and Timeline windows
Command click on a thumbnail opens the picture in a new window instead of
recycling an open window
Command + (=) zooms in
Command - zooms out
Drag-select and double-click in selection zooms into the selection
Shift zoom In or Out multiplies zoom by four (2D and 3D Map and Timeline)
Shift-command click zooms the window in
Option zoom Out zooms out to show all the picture
Command drag in picture scrolls the window
Command and any arrow key scrolls the window in that direction
Shift click on name makes it an “extra name” (2D Map and Timeline)
Option Copy Name in the Timeline copies the item details
Double-click on a name opens and searches the default English tool (2D Map and
Timeline)
Option click and drag measures distances (2D and Timeline)
Option click to stop the route animation displays the entire route
Option Open 3D pop-up menu draws 3D map without the layers
Shift 3D palette controls constrains the controls to vertical and horizontal
movement
Arrow Key Support for 3D Map
Pressing each arrow key is equivalent to Turn in each direction.
Pressing the shift key with any arrow key is equivalent to Move in that direction.
Pressing the option key with the up and down arrow keys is equivalent to zoom In and
Out.
Pressing the option key with the left and right arrow keys is equivalent to Up and
Down.
Dialog Box when closing a window
Pressing D or N or command D activates Don’t Save
Pressing escape or command-period activates Cancel
Pressing Y, return, or enter activates Save
B-16
Appendix
C
Names and Symbols
Chapter Contents:
Working with Names........................................ C-2
Working with Symbols..................................... C-2
Punctuation ..................................................... C-6
C
Names and Symbols
Working with Names
Book name abbreviations
In Accordance, you can abbreviate all names of search commands and Biblical books,
as long as the abbreviation is a standard abbreviation or is long enough to uniquely
identify the command or book. Thus, to specify the book of Obadiah, it is enough to
enter O, since no other books in the Bible begin with O. However, Joh is the minimum
abbreviation necessary to distinguish John from Jonah. You can also enter some
standard abbreviations such as Jn for John. The exceptions to this are Phil, which is
taken to mean Philippians rather than Philemon, and Jud which is Jude rather than
Judges. Standard German book names and abbreviations are also accepted.
Books with numeric prefixes
Some books of the Bible are normally identified with a numeric prefix, such as I
Kings. In Accordance, a numeric prefix is usually written with the book name to form
a single word. Thus, to specify I Kings as a reference enter 1Kings (without a space
between the 1 and Kings). You can also enter 1k, since this uniquely identifies this
book. If the reference is the first reference in the entry box, you may leave the space
between the number and the name.
Command abbreviations
Most of the search commands in Accordance are unique in their very first letter. When
you use the menu or keyboard shortcuts to enter search commands, the full name is
entered in the argument entry box. However, if you are typing the command directly,
you need only type enough of the command name to uniquely identify the command.
Thus, entering <w 3 w> is the equivalent of entering <WITHIN 3 Words>.
Working with Symbols
Symbols can be used in various places in Accordance to specify
additional constraints or to simplify input. When using the
menus and dialog boxes to enter commands, most of these
symbols are automatically included in the arguments at their
appropriate places. You can also access the symbols through the
Enter Symbol submenu (Search menu) and the contextual menu
(right or control-click).
A symbol menu item is dimmed whenever it is not appropriate
for entry in the argument entry box.
Blank or space
Separates words or expressions.
C-2
Angle brackets < >
Delineate a connecting command such as X <AND> Z. When you use the
Commands submenu (Options menu) or its keyboard equivalents, these
angle brackets are automatically entered as part of your argument.
Square brackets [ ]
Delineate stand-alone or modifying commands such as [LINK Greek
construct.1]. When you use the Commands submenu or Tags menu, or
their keyboard equivalents, these square brackets are automatically entered
as part of your argument.
Parentheses ( )
Group words and expressions to specify the precedence of logical operations
in your search. Thus, X <AND> (Y <OR> Z) finds verses which contain X
and either Y or Z. In contrast, (X <AND> Y) <OR> Z finds any verse which
contains both X and Y or which contains Z.
The parentheses can also be used to specify a list of alternate words. The
argument king <AND> (power, powers, powerful) finds verses which
contain the word king and any words based on the root power. The list of
words can also appear in a phrase, as in the argument king (David, Saul).
This finds all verses which contain either the phrase king David or king
Saul.
Note: When entering Hebrew text, use the left parenthesis to start and the right
parenthesis to end the grouping. This is the reverse of the way they are
labeled on the submenu.
Asterisk *
Indicates a global wild-card; that is, any number of letters in a word. For
example, b*g finds any word which begins with b and ends with g,
regardless of its length.
Standing alone within a phrase, the asterisk signifies any word or lexical form
(or punctuation in a tool). An asterisk on its own finds all the words in the
current range or field. Inside a [KEY] or [STYLE] command it stands for any
Key number or Highlight style.
A hyphen immediately following a wild-card expression excludes the words
following the hyphen from the expression. The argument begin*-beginning
finds any word that starts with begin with the exception of beginning.
In Verse references mode the asterisk signifies every verse in the text.
Question mark ?
Indicates a character wild-card; that is, any single letter in a word. Parentheses
enclosing characters immediately following the question mark limit the
characters that can occur in that position. A hyphen at the beginning of the
characters specifies that the characters in the parentheses can not occur in
that position. A hyphen between the specific characters implies a range of
allowable characters.
Appendices
C-3
C
Names and Symbols
For example, b?t finds any three-letter word that begins with b and ends with
t (bat, bet, bit, but). The argument b?(a-i)t finds the same words but the
middle letter must be from the letters a through i. The argument b?(eu)t
finds only the words bet or but. The argument b?(-u)t finds all the words
with the exception of but. The argument ?(0-9)?? finds all three digit
numerals.
Comma ,
Separates items in a list. If the entry is a verse reference, this can be a list of
chapters or verses such as Genesis 3, 4, 5 (meaning Genesis chapter 3, 4,
and 5) or Genesis 1:3, 6, 8 (meaning Genesis chapter 1 verses 3, 6, and 8).
Otherwise, the comma is used inside a set of parentheses and indicates a
group of alternative words. For example, king (Saul, David) finds verses
which contain either king Saul or king David.
When the Preferences are set to European verse notation, the comma separates
chapter and verse.
Hyphen or minus sign •
When used between two numbers, a hyphen signifies a range of characters,
words, verses, chapters, books, etc. Thus, in a search range definition,
Genesis 3-5 means chapters 3 through 5 of Genesis. The argument land
<WITHIN 6-8 Words> promise means that land must be no less than 6 and
no more than 8 words from promise. The option-hyphen is also acceptable
for a range.
•
The hyphen is also used to negate entries in certain circumstances. When it
follows a wild-card expression it removes specific words from those found
by the expression. It can also be used with a question mark and parentheses
as described previously. In tagged texts it is used to negate tag details inside
a tag expression so [ADJECTIVE -feminine] finds any adjective that is not
feminine. It can also be combined with the “at” sign (@) as described below.
Quotation marks ' "
Signify an inflected form in the argument entry box for a grammatically tagged
text. A word in the entry box without quotes is assumed to be a lexical form.
To signify that words are inflected, enter single or double plain quotation
marks ( ' or " ) around the words or the phrase. Accordance then only
searches for occurrences of that particular inflected form.
“At” sign @
•
C-4
Used to link two or more types of information so that the search applies
them to the same word. In Keyed Bible texts @ links the word and the Key
number. The argument light@[KEY H0216] finds the word light only when
it translates the Hebrew word numbered H0216.
•
@ can also link the [HITS] or [COUNT] commands to another type of
information. The argument *@-[HITS Search windowname] finds all words
except those found by the search in the linked window. In grammatically
tagged original language texts @ links combinations of tag information,
inflected forms, or lexical forms together.
Equal sign =
Used in three ways:
•
Requires a search for the exact form which immediately follows it. Each word
in the argument which is required to be exact must be preceded by the equal
sign. In non-tagged texts the exact search includes all word punctuation such
as hyphens and apostrophes, and upper or lower case characters. Thus it
distinguishes between job and Job, or sons and son’s. In Greek and Hebrew
the exact search includes the accents, breathing marks, or vowel points.
•
Allows a search for a repeated character in a word. The question mark is
followed by parentheses containing an equal sign and a numeral referring
to the number of a prior question mark in the same word. For example the
entry a??(=1) would find “all” and “add”, but not “and”. In Hebrew this can be
used to find repeating vowels as well as consonants.
•
Inside the [HITS] or [COUNT] command adds an additional modifier inside
the command so that [HITS=k windowname] uses the list of Key numbers
from the first window.
Plus sign +
The plus sign requires a search for the root form in tagged texts, so that it finds
all words derived from that root. For example:
finds additional words
that come from the root
(b-r-a).
arb
arb+
Period .
A period followed by any single character except a blank space, searches for
that character. See Chapter 8-Search Symbols and Commands.
A period is also acceptable in place of the colon to separate chapter and verse.
When the Preferences are set to European verse notation, the period separates a
list of references.
Colon :
Used between a chapter and a verse in a reference. For example, Genesis 1:2
finds the second verse of the first chapter of Genesis.
Semicolon ;
Used in verse references to divide groups of references. Therefore a new book
or chapter is expected after each semicolon, and a semicolon cannot be used
at the end of the reference list. For example, Genesis 1:2-5; 4; Acts 5:1-20
would select verses 2 through 5 of Genesis chapter 1, all of Genesis chapter
4, and the first 20 verses of Acts chapter 5.
Appendices
C-5
C
Names and Symbols
ff or f
Wherever verse references can be entered, adding “ff” or "f" after a reference
extends it to the end of the last unit. Thus Mal 2:4ff includes all the verses
to the end of chapter 2, Mal 2ff includes all the chapters until the end of
the book, and Mal ff includes all the books to the end of the Bible. This also
applies to searching in tools, and to defining ranges.
Punctuation
The following rules apply when the Sentence or Clause field is used for searches in
Bible texts.
English
In English text the following punctuation divides one sentence from another:
•
Period (.)
•
Question mark (?)
•
Exclamation mark (!)
Within a sentence the following punctuation divides one clause from another:
•
Comma (,)
•
Colon (:)
•
Semicolon (;)
•
Dash (–)
•
Parentheses (( ))
The begining of a paragraph is indicated by the ¶ symbol, unless continuous
verse display is used.
As a general rule, hyphenated words are treated as a single word for the search.
Therefore, to find Abed or Abed-Nego, search for Abednego or Abed*.
Greek
In the Greek New Testament (Nestle-Aland) the following punctuation divides one
sentence from another:
•
Period (.)
•
Question mark (;)
Within a sentence the following punctuation divides one clause from another:
•
Comma (,)
•
High point (:)
•
Dash (–)
•
Parentheses (( ))
Hebrew
np
The Hebrew Masoretic Text has no punctuation except for the , , and
markers, which are treated as individual words in Accordance.
C-6
s paragraph
Glossary
active window
The window currently at the front of the screen, to which menus,
mouse actions and keyboard strokes apply.
administrator
The user of the computer with full access to all files and functions.
amplify
argument
ASCII
constraint
construct
contextual
contiguous
crasis
default
element
emulator
expression
gloss
hit
homographs
hypertext
inflected form
lexical form
locked module
Keyed text
module
morphological
non-contiguous
parse
pericope
PICT
precedence
Access to expanded information, not dependent on a built-in link.
The criteria used to define a search.
American Standard Code for Information Interchange, a format containing
only the characters of the text, that can be read by any word processor.
A condition which further defines a search.
A graphical search argument composed of elements and connecting items.
A feature which changes depending on the context in which it is used.
A range of text with no skipped sections.
The fusion of two Greek words into one word in the text.
The setting that applies until and unless another option is selected.
A combination of search criteria defining a single word.
Software which enables one computer to reproduce or imitate
another system, such as a Mac system on a PC.
A word, phrase or unit of grammatical details.
A brief definition.
The word or phrase in the text that meets the search criteria.
Words with the same letters but different meanings.
A link to an area of expanded information in the same or a different text.
The exact characters in which a word appears in the Greek or Hebrew text.
The lemma or dictionary form from which a word is derived.
A module which requires an unlock code or password before it can
be opened or added to Accordance.
A text containing Strong’s or another numbering system to link the English
words to the dictionary forms of the original text.
A text or tool file prepared for Accordance.
Classification of words based on form rather than function.
A range of text in which sections are skipped.
To analyze a word or phrase in order to identify the grammatical details.
A section or selection from the text.
A standard picture format that can be opened by various Macintosh
drawing and painting applications.
The order in which the argument is evaluated.
Glossary
recycle
root form
RTF
search field
search range
syntax
tag
tag code
tagged text
Unicode
widget
wild-card
The automatic reuse of an existing window to show new information.
The underlying form from which multiple lexical forms are derived.
Rich Text Format, a text file format that includes font and style
information and can be read by many word processors.
The unit of text within which the search criteria must be met.
The portions of the text that are included in the search.
The form required for the entry of search commands.
Grammatical or other details associated with a word in a text database.
The letter code that contains the grammatical tag information.
A text containing grammatical or other information for each word.
The standard encoding for characters from all languages.
A small application that runs only in the Dashboard of OS 10.4 and above.
A symbol that stands for unspecified characters.
Index
A
abbreviations of names C-2
access buttons 6-5
Accordance Help 3-5 to 6
Accordance menu B-2
Accordance widget 22-7 to 8
AccUpdater widget 22-9 to 10
Add context pop-up menu 7-4
Add My Notes pane 6-9, 19-10
Add Reference pane 6-9, 14-29
Add Text pane 6-7
adding modules 2-5, 5-6
AGREE 10-19 to 21
Alignment submenu B-7
Amplify Chapters 12 to 13
Bible text 12-5
Context 13-2 to 4
default settings 12-4
details 12-5
display options 12-4
features 12-3 to 4
menu 12-2
parallels 16-9
Parsing window 13-5 to 7
recycling 12-4
shortcuts 12-5, 14-18
Search 13-10 to 12
Search All 15-5
Speak 13-9
Syntax window 13-7 to 8
tool sets 15-6
tools 14-18 to 22
user notes 19-13
user tools 20-7
Amplify menu 12-2, B-8
Analysis window 11-12 to 13
count options 11-14
display options 11-14 to 17
Key numbers 11-16
non-tagged 11-14 to 16
sort order 11-14
word lists 11-17
Analysis Bar Chart 11-8
Analysis Graph 11-7
Analysis Pie Chart 11-10
AND 8-6, 9-7
Appearance defaults A-3
Apple Help 3-5 to 6
argument entry box 4-9, 7-2
argument, search 7-7
Arrange Modules 2-5, 5-5 to 8
Arrange submenu B-9
Arrange Tags A-7
asterisk 8-2, C-3
@ “at” symbol 9-7, C-4
autofading 5-10
autoscrolling 6-5
autosizing, browser A-3
B
C
background, picture A-3
Bible import Chapter 21
see user Bibles
book names 6-12, C-2
bookmarks 6-6
brackets C-3
brackets searching 7-10
browser, tools 14-8 to 11
range 14-11 to 12
buttons, access 6-5
buttons, resource palette 5-4
citation 6-19
ciation preferences A-8 to 9
clean up 2-4
closing windows 23-4
Character Palette 23-10 to 11
character search 8-4
character wildcard 8-3
codes, unlock 1-4
colon C-5
color highlighting Chapter 17
adding highlights 17-4 to 6
deleting a style 17-4
exporting 17-7
hide highlighting 17-6
highlight palette 17-4
highlight styles 17-2 to 3
hits 17-5
printing 17-7
searching for styles 17-8
comma C-4
commands 8-5 to 10, 14-23 to 26
commands, multiple 8-11 to 12
Command submenu 8-5. B-5
commentaries Chapter 14
Compare Text 6-14 to 15, A-6
concepts 4-2 to 3
Concordance window 11-17 to 19
display options 11-18
connecting commands 8-6 to 8
Index
Construct window Chapter 10
AGREE 10-19 to 21
CHARACTER 10-10
columns 10-3
connecting items 10-8, 10-14 to 22
COUNT 10-11
definitions 10-3
description box 10-3
elements 10-3, 10-6 to 7, 10-9 to 12
empty columns 10-8
HITS 10-10
INTER 10-16 to 18
KEY 10-9
linking 10-4
multiple 10-22
multiple element items 10-11
negative column 10-13, 10-20 to 22
NOT 10-12
opening 10-4
palette 10-3, 10-5
PLACE 10-11
Simple Chapter 10
submenu B-3
wildcards 10-10
WITHIN 10-14 to 15
WORD 10-9
CONTENTS 8-8, 8-15 to 16, 14-24, 18-4
Context 13-8
context pop-up menu 7-4
contextual menus 4-11, Chapter 24
Copy As options 6-19
Copy As submenu B-4
copying graphics 25-7
copying modules 2-3
copying references 6-19
copying text 6-18 to 20
Greek and Hebrew 25-7 to 9
COUNT 8-9
count of hits 6-2
words 11-4
cross references Chapter 14
D
Concordance 11-17 to 19
default tabs 11-2, A-11
Hits Graph 11-4
reference tools 14-28
Table 11-19 to 20
Table Bar Chart 11-11
windows 11-2
workspace 11-2
dialog box 4-6
differences in texts 6-14 to 15, A-7
direction of text 23-11
display of text 6-9, 6-13
Display menu 6-14, B-6
display text pop-up menu 6-3
displaying a text by reference 7-6
documentation Chapter 3
dot, red 6-7, 19-8
drag and drop 6-20, A-2
duplicating windows 23-8
E
F
default settings Appendix A
Define Groups dialog box 15-4
Define Highlight Styles dialog box 17-2 to 3
Define Ranges dialog box 7-11
Define Text Set dialog box 15-5
Define Tool Set dialog box 15-5
Details Chapter 11
amplifying from 11-3
Analysis 11-12
Analysis Bar Chart 11-8
Analysis Graph 11-7
Analysis Pie Chart 11-10
Edit menu B-4
Edit window 19-3 to 8, 20-4 to 5
default styles 19-5, A-9
styles copying and pasting 23-10
Text palette 23-8
Update button 19-7. 20-5
editing font size, style, color 23-9 to 10
element items 10-3, 10-6 to 7, 10-9 to 12
equal sign C-5
exact searches 8-4
exact words 7-9, 8-4
export
Greek and Hebrew options 25-8 to 10
PICT file 25-7
text file 25-6
Unicode 25-11 to 12
extra fields 14-26 to 27
expressions 7-8
favorites 5-7, 13-12
ff C6
FIELD 8-10
field pop-up menu 4-9, 7-10
File menu B-2 to 3
files in Accordance 2-2
find/replace user notes 19-5
user tools 20-6
floating windows Chapter 5, 23-5
FOLLOWED BY 8-7
font conversion 25-8 to 10
font size in browsers A-3
fonts see Accordance Fonts PDF
Index
G
H
I
K
amplify to Search 13-10
@ “at” sign 9-8
Construct window 10-9
details 9-3
dictionaries 9-3, 14-17 to 18
displaying the numbers 9-2
entering key numbers 9-5 to 7
instant details 9-2
multiple numbers 9-2, 9-9
Parsing 13-5 to 6
searching 9-5 to 9
Syntax 13-4
wildcards 9-7
Key number systems 9-9
General defaults A-2
German lemmas 9-10
glossary – before Index
Greek and Hebrew defaults A-5 to 6
Greek keyboard A-6
Groups, Search All 15-4
hardware requirements 1-3
Hebrew defaults A-5
Hebrew keyboard A-6
Hebrew Text 23-11 to 12
Help menu 3-5 to 6, B-10
hide window 23-6
highlighted hits 6-3
highlighting Chapter 17
see color highlighting
highlight palette 17-4
highlight styles 17-2 to 3
History pop-up menu 7-3
HITS 8-8, 8-17 to 20
hits graph 11-4
hits highlighting 17-5
hits, number 6-2
hypertext in tools 14-12 to 17
hypertext to Scripture 14-13, 19-5, 20-7
hyphen C-4
Import User Tool 20-8 to 10
importing Bibles Chapter 21
see user Bibles
inflected forms 8-3
installation Chapter 1
order 1-2
program installer 1-2
installing Accordance modules Chapter 2
installer actions 1-5
Instant Details box 5-8 to 10
defaults 5-10
INTER 10-16 to 18
interface 4-4
interleaved printing 25-3
keyboard equivalents 4-5, 23-3, B-10 to 16
keyboard options A-6
KEY 10-9
keyboard shortcuts B-12 to 16
Keyed Bible texts Chapter 9
analysis 11-16
amplifying from 9-3
L
M
language in tools 14-20
Language submenu B-8
lemmas, German 9-10
letters, capital 8-3
lexicons Chapter 14
LINK 8-8, 8-13 to 15, 14-22, 16-4
automatic 8-9
construct 10-4
linking arguments 8-13
List All Book Names 6-14
manual 3-2 to 4
Map Layers submenu B-7
marking verses 6-6 to 7
memory allocation 2-12
menu bar 4-5
menu order 5-5 to 8
menu reference Appendix B
menus, contextual 4-11, Chapter 24
MERGE 14-25 to 26
Merge User Notes 19-14
Merge User Tools 20-10
minus sign C-4
missing verses 6-16, 13-2
modules, adding 2-5, 5-6
arranging 2-5, 5-5 to 8
moving 2-4
replacing 2-7
updating 2-4
More options
Search 7-4, 7-10 to 12
Tools 14-26 to 27
multiple commands 8-11 to 12
multiple constructs 10-22
multiple texts 6-7-9
multiple users 2-10
multiple windows Chapter 22
Index
N
O
P
pasting text 6-18 to 20
period C-5
phrase search 7-7 to 9
PICT file 25-7
PLACE 10-11
plus sign C-5
pop-up menu order 5-5 to 8
position button 6-8
PRECEDED BY 8-7
precedence 8-12
preference files 2-8 to 9
preferences Appendix A
printing Chapter 23
bookmarked verses 18-4
column widths 25-3
interleaved 25-3
line spacing 25-4
margins 25-2
page details 25-2
page numbers 25-4
Page Setup dialog box 25-2
panes 25-3 to 4
parallel panes 25-3 to 4
selection 25-2
Print settings 25-2 to 4
progress window 4-10
punctuation C-6
names C-2
negative columns 10-13, 10 20 to 22
New Construct submenu B-3
New submenu B-2 to 3
non-admin user 2-7
NOT 8-7, 10-12
notes, user Chapter 19
see user notes
number of hits 6-2
number of verses 6-2
OK button 7-3
opening Accordance 4-4
opening windows 23-2 to 3
OR 8-7
order of pop-up menus 5-5 to 8
page numbers in tools 14-4 to 5
page numbers, printing 25-4
palettes Chapter 5, 23-5
hide 23-6
Highlight 17-4
Resource 5-2 to 5
show all 23-5 to 6
Text 23-9
panes see text pane
paragraph marker C-6
Parallel window Chapter 16
Add Text check box 16-7
amplifying to 16-9
argument entry box 16-4
defaults 16-8 to 9
fields 16-6
LINK 16-4
opening 16-2
new pane button 16-6
passage pop-up menus 16-6
pericope title list 16-5
pop-up menus 16-3
recycling 16-9
searching 16-4
scrolling 16-7
text panes 16-6 to 8
Tie Scrolling 16-6
parentheses 8-11, C-3
Parsing window 13-5 to 6
display options 13-6
passwords 1-4, 2-6
Paste Style 6-20
Q
R
question mark C-3
quitting Accordance 4-5
quotation marks A-9, C-4
RANGE 8-9
ranges 7-11 to 12
range, tool 14-12
recycling windows 12-4, 23-6
red dot 6-7, 19-8
red letter text 6-4, 6-11
reference box 6-5, 14-6
reference display 6-12
reference entry 7-6 to 7, C-2
reference format
European A-4
SBL A-4
Reference List submenu B-8
Reference List window Chapter 18
adding verses 18-4
deleting verses 18-4
opening 18-2
searching 18-4
Text order pop-up menu 18-3
Index
reference tools details 14-28
reference tools non-Biblical 14-32
registering Accordance 1-7
removing modules 5-5 to 8
renaming windows 23-7
Resource palette 5-2 to 5, A-3
Rich Text Format 25-7
right-click menus 4-11, Chapter 24
RTF 25-7
running Accordance 1-6
S
Save As Text submenu B-3
saving Chapter 23
as PICT file 25-7
as text file 25-6
Greek 25-8 to 9
Hebrew 25-8 to 10
individual window 25-5
RTF 25-7
session 25-6
transliteration 25-12
Unicode 25-11 to 12
windows 25-6
Scripture links, notes 19-5, 19-10
Scripture links, tools 20-7
scroll bar 6-4
scrolling panes 6-7
Search All Chapter 15
amplifying 15-5
browser 15-3
groups 15-4
search entry section 15-2
Search amplify 13-10 to 11
Search button 13-10 to 11
search criteria Chapter 8
search entry section 4-8 to 9, Chapter 7
argument entry box 4-9
entering commands 8-5
entering phrases 7-8
entering references 7-6 to 7
entering symbols 7-7, 8-2 to 5
entering words 7-8 to 9
search field pop-up menu 7-10
Search for buttons 7-3
Search menu B-5
search range pop-up menu 4-9, 7-11
search text pop-up menu 4-8, 7-5
Search window Chapters 6 to 8
defaults 4-11, A-10
description 4-7 to 11
introduction 4-7 to 11
More options 7-10 to 12
multiple 8-13 to 20
opening 4-7
Selection menu B-7
Select Key Numbers dialog box 9-5
Select Words dialog box 7-8 to 9
selected pane 6-6
selecting text 6-18
selecting verses 6-6
semicolon C-5
Set submenu B-9
settings files 2-8 to 9
setting preferences Appendix A
Setup assistant 1-7 to 10
shortcuts, keyboard B-10 to 16
Show all text check box 13-3, 19-10
Show All Windows 23-6
Show pop-up menu 14-5 to 6
Show Text As submenu B-6
Simple Construct Chapter 10
see Construct window
Slide show 22-5 to8
control panel 22-8
navigating 22-7 to 8
switching 22-5
“smart” quotation marks 19-13
Speak 13-9
defaults 13-9
stacking windows 23-8
stand-alone commands 8-8 to 10
starting Accordance 1-6
startup defaults A-2
Strong’s numbers Chapter 9
see Keyed Bible texts
STYLE 17-8
styles, copying and pasting 6-20, 23-10
styles in text 6-4
submenus 5-7
support – facing Contents
suppress autosizing A-3
suppress drag and drop A-2
suppress information tips A-3
suppress opening splash A-2
suppress opening text information A-3
suppress save warning A-3
Symbol submenu B-5
symbols Appendix C
in argument entry box 8-2 to 5
in Construct 10-10
Syntax window 13-7 to 8
system requirements 1-2
Index
T
Table bar chart 11-11
Table window 11-19 to 20
Tabs 22-2 to 4
adding 22-3
closing 22-3
moving 22-4
overflow 22-5
rearranging 22-4
tag arrangement A-7
Tags submenu B-6
technical support – facing Contents
text access buttons 6-5, 14-6
text compare 6-14 to 15, A-6
text direction 23-11 to 12, 23-11
Text Display dialog box 6-9 to 13
defaults 6-13v, A-4
text drag and drop 6-20, A-2
text files 25-6
Text palette 23-9
text pane 10, Chapter 6
adding 6-7 to 9
bookmarks 6-6
closing 6-9
color 6-11
compare text 6-14 to 15, A-7
default settings 6-13, A-4
display font and size 6-11
display format 6-9 to 12
display menu options 6-14
display text pop-up menu 6-3
font size buttons 6-3
highlighted words 6-3, 6-12
missing verses 6-16
parallel 6-7 to 6-9
reference display 6-12
scrolling 6-4
selected 6-8
text styling 6-4
user notes marks 6-7
verse order 6-16 to 17
widths 6-8
text, red letter 6-4, 6-11, A-4
Text Sets Chapter 15
amplifying 15-6
creating 15-5
Text Settings dialog box 6-9 to 12
text smoothing A4
text styling 6-4, 23-10
Text window 13-3 to 4
hypertext to 13-4, 14-13
Show all text check box 13-9
Text order pop-up menu 13-9
tiling windows 23-8
Time Layers submenu B-7
title, window 4-8
tool pane 14-29 to 31
Tool Sets Chapter 15
amplifying 15-6
creating 15-5
Tools Display defaults A-4
tools, user Chapter 20
see user tools
Tools window Chapter 14
amplifying to 14-18 to 22
argument entry box 14-4, 14-8
browser 14-8 to 11
categories 14-2
commands 14-22 to 26
CONTENTS 14-24
extra fields 14-26 to 27
defaults 14-8, A-4
details 14-28
field pop-up menu 14-4
general features 14-17
hypertext to Scripture 14-13
images 14-15 to 16
Instant Details box 5-9. 14-14
internal hypertext 14-14 to 16
lexicon 14-20
LINK 14-23
MERGE 14-25 to 26
More options 14-26 to 27
multiple fields 14-26 to 26
Next button 14-6
non-Biblical 14-32
opening 14-3
page numbers 14-4 to 5
picture icon 14-16
Prior button 14-6
range 14-11 to 12
recycling 14-22
searching 14-22 to 25
Show pop-up menu 14-5
tables 14-16
text display 14-7 to 8
text display defaults 14-8, A-4
text pane 14-5
thumbnails 14-16
tool pop-up menu 14-3
transliteration display 5-10
transliteration for export 25-8 to 9, 25-12
triple-click shortcuts 12-5, 14-18
Tutorial 3-6
tying windows 23-7
typing hints 23-12
Index
U
Unicode 25-11 to 12
unlocking codes 1-4, 2-6
Update button 19-7, 20-5
upgrading modules 2-4
user Bibles Chapter 21
importing 21-4
markup characters 21-3
missing sections 21-3
text format 21-2
user files 2-11
sharing 2-11
User Files submenu B-3
user notes Chapter 19
adding 19-3 to 4
amplifying to 19-13
creating new file 19-2
defaults 19-7, 19-12 to 13, A-11 to 12
deleting 19-18
find and replace 19-5
Edit window 19-3 to 8
Edit window defaults A-12
marks 6-7, 19-8
merging 19-14
pane 19-11
red dot 6-7, 19-8
Scripture links 19-5, 19-10
searching 19-8 to 9
spell check 19-6
updating 19-7
verse reference 19-7
User Notes window 19-8 to 11
user tools Chapter 20
amplifying to 20-7
creating 20-3
display limits 20-7
duplicating 20-4
Edit window 20-4 to 5
fields 20-6
find and replace 19-5, 20-6
HTML tags 10-10
importing 20-8 to 10
merging 20-10
renaming 20-4
Scripture links 20-7
spell check 19-6, 20-6
TLG see Grammatical Supplement G-7
updating 20-5
User Tools window 20-2 to 3
User’s guide 3-2 to 4
V
W
X
verse order 6-16 to 17
verse reference entry 7-6 to 7, C-2
verse reference display 6-12
verse highlighting 17-6
verse text display 6-9 to 12
verses, missing 6-16
verses, search for 7-6, 13-2 to 3
widgets 22-6 to 10
wild-cards 8-3, 10-10, C-3
in Construct window 10-10
Window Help 3-6, 23-6
windows Chapter 23
arranging 23-3, 23-8
closing 23-4
contents search 8-15 to 16
description 4-6 to 4-7
duplicating 23-8
floating Chapter 5 23-5
hiding 23-6
linking 8-13 to 20, 23-5
opening 23-2
recycling 23-6
renaming 23-7
saving 25-5 to 6
showing all 23-6
stacking 23-8
tiling 23-8
title 4-8
tying 23-7
types 23-2
understanding 4-6
Window menu 23-5 to 8, B-9
WITHIN 8-8, 10-14 to 16
WORD 10-9
word highlighting 17-4 to 6
words, search for 7-8 to 9
Workspace Chapter 22
adding tabs 22-3
closing 22-3
moving tabs 22-4
opening 22-2
overflow tabs 22-5
rearranging tabs 22-4
tabs 22-3
XOR 8-7